Home

FRx Report Designer 6.7 User's Guide

1. Figure 4 12 Budget Forecast for Denver A B c D E F G H 1 J K L M N 1 Fabrikam Works Inc 2 Budget Forecast Headquarters 3 4 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC TOTAL 5 Officers Comp 25 000 25 250 25 503 25 758 26 015 26 275 26 538 26 803 27 074 27 342 27 616 27 892 317 063 6 7 Other G amp A Expense 2000 2 020 2040 2061 2081 2102 2123 2144 2166 _ 2 187 2 209 _2 231 25 364 8 9 Interest Income 228 230 233 235 237 240 242 244 247 249 252 254 2 891 10 interest Expense 4125 1136 1148 1159 1174 1182 1194 1206 1218 1230 1243 1255 14 267 11 Total Other Inc Exp amp 97 06 15 24 3 42 52 62 79 819 991 1 001 11 376 12 13 Net Inc Before Tax 27 897 28 176 28 458 28 742 29 030 29 320 29 613 29 909 30 208 30 511 30 816 31 124 353 804 14 15 income Tax Expense 24 000 25 000 25 000 25 000 27 000 27 000 27 000 29 000 29 000 29 000 30 000 30 000 327 000 16 17 Net Income Loss 28 944 29 233 29 526 29 821 30 119 30 420 30 725 31 032 31 342 31 656 31 972 32 292 367 082 Figure 4 13 Budget Forecast for Corporate Headquarters FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 132 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to Ext
2. This reporting unit was defined in the IncStmt H Fabrikam Works Inc Reporting Tree Income Scateme For the Eight Months Ending August 31 2002 building block Revenue a ee These columns were Sales KEA 7 z Sales Returns 8 622 defined in the Sales Discounts 28 738 Column Layout Net Safes 1 026 290 building block cocs 747 900 5 596 129 Gross Margin 278 390 2 093 508 Operating Expenses Rows were defined in ei Pe salary Expense 4 72 757 the Row Format Officers Compensation 7 184 204 609 building block Depreciation Expense 4 855 28 840 Office Expense 4 135 31 028 Supplies Expense 730 5 698 Maintenance Expense 1 288 10 029 Rent Expense 10 449 78 203 Travel Expense 8 856 67 101 Advertising Expense 9 588 62 515 Commission Expense 16 233 139 142 Total Operating Expenses 132 499 1 010 922 Income From Operations 145 891 1 082 586 Interest Income Expense 614 6 805 Income Before Income Taxes 145 277 1 075 781 Income Tax Expense 20 299 230 265 Net Income 114 878 845 416 Figure 1 2 Sample Report e Catalog of Reports FRx reports are stored in the Catalog of Reports Each catalog entry is made up of the row column and optional tree that define the report Once these elements are entered a report can be run Catalog of Reports In the Catalog of Reports you also specify the type of report you want to print e Financial reports e Account detail reports e Transaction deta
3. 2 M Related Ell eller aA Row Description Fmt Norm Print Colum Link to Code Code Rates Rows Unit Bal cul n General Ledger Operating 266 Operating Expenses DES Expenses 273 DES 280 Salary Expense 5000 310 Officers Compensation 5050 340 Depreciation Expense 5100 370 Office Expense 5200 Expenses 400 Supplies Expense 5225 430 Maintenance Expense 5240 460 Rent Expense 5250 490 Travel Expense 5300 520 Advertising Expense 5350 550 Commission Expense 547 Total 555 Operating H 560 Total Operating Expenses TOT 28070550 Expenses 565 Figure 2 3 Accounts in Row Formats Window Row Codes 266 565 Note e The row codes that you create in the sample report could be different than those shown in this example Adding Operating Expenses Row As with Revenue you can modify the sample row format to designate a row as Operating Expenses using the DES format code The Operating Expenses Row Codes 266 and 273 in Figure 2 3 are based on the following instructions To add Operating Expenses row 1 Go to the row following the revenue separating rows D 4 B E Z F H inti Related 3 P Row Description Fmt Rows U Norm Print Link to Code Ooo E bis i pig General Ledger 25 DES Revenue Sales 410 4109 Sales Returns 4110 Sales Discounts 4250 Net Sales 100 160 190 COGS Gross Margin 206 220 In our example this is Row Code 266 2 Click the Description column 3 In the edit b
4. A B D E F G H 1 J K L M N 1 _ Fabrikam Works Inc 2 Budget Forecast San Francisco 3 4 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Total 5 Sales 202 941 207 000 211 140 215 363 219 670 224 063 228 545 233 115 237 778 242 533 247 384 252 332 2 721 864 6 Sales Returns 3 521 3 591 __ 3 663 3 737 3 811 _ 3 887 _ 3 965 4 045 4 125 4 208 _ 4 292 4 378 47 223 7 Sales Discounts 11 737 11 972 12 211 12 455 12 705 12 959 13 218 13 482 13 752 14 027 14 307 14 593 _ 157 418 8 Total Sales 187 683 191 437 195 265 199 171 203 154 207 217 211 362 215 589 219 901 224 299 228 785 233 360 2 517 223 9 10 Cost of Goods Sold 116 500 118 830 121 207 123 631 126 103 128 625 131 198 133 822 136 498 139 228 142 013 144 853 1 562 508 11 Gross Profit 71 183 72 607 74 059 75 540 77 051 78 592 80 164 81 767 83 402 85 070 86 772 88 507 954 714 12 13 Salary Expense 30 910 31 528 30 000 30 000 30 000 30 000 30 000 30 000 31 000 31 000 31 000 31 000 366 438 14 Commissions Expense _11 524 11 754 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 11 000 11 000 11 000 11 000 127 278 15 Total Compensation 42 434 43 282 40 000 40 000 40 000 40 000 40 000 40 000 42 000 42 000 42 000 42 000 493 716 16 17 Depreciation 2500 2550 2601 2653 2706 2760 2815 2872 2929 2988 3 0
5. Natural No Ratai No Natural No Natural No If there are existing account sets click New after the Account Sets dialog box appears 2 Create a link to your general ledger For step by step instructions please see Entering General Ledger Codes on page 96 3 Select Yes from the Acct Set cell box by clicking on it 4 Click the Account Set Name box and type a name for the account set The account set name you enter here will appear in the Link to General Ledger column of the Row Format window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 102 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes 5 Ifyou want to add an alternate name or more detailed description for the account set click the Description box and type a name or description in this optional box The description you type here appears in the Description column of the Row Format window 6 From the Account Sets control box click Save 7 When you are finished creating the account set click Close Once you create your account set you need to link it to your general ledger Linking an Account Set to Your General Ledger To link an account set to your general ledger 1 Double click the Link to General Ledger column to open the GL Account Links dialog box 2 Click the Acct Set box to change the account set indicator to Yes 3 Double click a cell in the From Account range or Individual Account or Account Set col
6. 187 Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar Icon190 Understanding Building Reporting Trees197 Understanding Building Reporting Trees NIN oo u redta anti anne 203 Building Reporting Trees Manually 205 Building Reporting Trees Automatically 213 Adding Text and E mail Links to a Reporting NGS neces tea ee ote eee 216 Securing Reporting Tree Units 221 Chapter 6 The Reporting Tree function is the key to the power and flexibility of FRx Report Designer Although the row format and column layout are essential components in the design and functionality of financial reports it is the reporting tree that magnifies the power of those components FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 179 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Although you can create financial reports without the aid of the reporting tree you will be using only a fraction of the capabilities of FRx The reporting tree allows you to model a very sophisticated reporting structure and view your organization in many different ways with the click of a button Some companies may have very complex corporate hierarchies that require hundreds of tree units as well as other hierarchies that require much fewer tree units FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 180 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Reporting Trees Understanding Reporting Trees Most organizations have a hierarchical structure in which departments or other business
7. Figure 1 3 Tabular Balance Sheet FRx DrillDown Viewer With the standalone DrillDown Viewer users in your company can look at FRx reports even if they do not have access to Report Designer Using this program users can select reporting units from the reporting tree and then view and print financial statements and underlying account and transaction detail reports You can also use DrillDown Viewer to send reports to other users with e mail delete reports print reports and export reports to a spreadsheet file with formulas For more information about the Drill Down Viewer refer to your FRx Drill Down Viewer and F Rx Report Launcher 6 7 User s Guide Account Codes Although accounting systems typically treat general ledger codes as single indivisible units Report Designer looks at account codes in a way that increases your reporting flexibility FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 9 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Understanding Report Designer An Overview Most organizations have some type of structure that separates operations into different categories A typical general ledger account code contains at least one account code segment that describes the type of account for example cash or sales This segment of the general ledger code sometimes referred to in accounting systems as the object code main account or primary account is referred to as the natural account code segment in Report Designer
8. General Options Use the General Options to display the following formatting options FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 261 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab e Use For Negative Numbers To use parentheses to indicate negative numbers select this check box the default If you do not select this option the report indicates negative numbers with a minus sign e Display Commas in Amounts To include the thousands separators in currency amounts that you entered in the 1000 Separator box of the International Formats dialog box select this check box the default e Use Signs on Percentages To include a percentage sign in all percentage related columns select this check box the default e Currency Symbol on 1st Row To display a currency symbol in all amount columns on the first row of each page select this check box the default When you select this box you do not need to enter a CS print control in the first row of your row format The actual format used is specified in the Amount with Currency Symbol box in the International Formats dialog box e Display Blanks for Zero Amounts To display blank spaces instead of zeros for all zero balances in the entire report select this check box the default e Display Rows With No Amounts To display rows with zero balances select this check box By default FRx suppresses rows with zero balances in all amount columns
9. column layout One of the three FRx building blocks Column layouts contain headings for report columns as well as codes to define the type of information in a column reporting periods calculations and so forth See also row format reporting tree company code A unique identifier for a record that defines company information needed for processing financial reports control A term for any user interface component that allows you to select choices or type information for example an entry box a check box or a radio button conversion currency A currency whose value is to be converted into the base currency using the monetary exchange rate for a given date CPO Column Period Offset A switch used in row formats when linking to external worksheets If the worksheet to which you are linking has multiple columns or rows that represent different periods such as a worksheet with a 12 month detailed FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 334 forecast the CPO Column Period Offset switch tells FRx to match the accounting periods in the column layout with the appropriate columns in the worksheet You can use this technique with either combined or separate worksheet links daily rate The current spot currency exchange rate For reporting purposes a different current rate should be available for each balance sheet date database A collection of like sets of information stored in tables For example sets of a
10. e Multiple column formulas can be entered in one row if they are separated by commas as shown in row 310 Salary Expense Office Expense Calculation applied to all report columns Calculation completed on column B only Calculation completed on columns A B and C Calculation completed on a range of columns Multiple calculation applied to specific columns D Related Rates Rows Unit 5000 5200 130 75 B 130 75 4B C 130 100 75 A TO C 130 100 75 4 4130 B130 B 100 TO 130 C 4100 D100 Figure 3 17 Calculation Applied to Specific Report Columns Creating Multiple Description Columns You can use the CAL format code to create reports with multiple descriptions like the side by side balance sheet that follows Fabrikam Works Inc Side by Side Balance Sheet For the Four Months Ending April 30 2004 ASSETS LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS EQUITY Cash Checking 109 267 Accounts Payable 86 742 Cash Money Market 46 518 Accrued Taxes ee Accrued Liabilities 108 689 Total Cash 155 785 Suspense Account Accounts Receivable 162 906 Total Current Liabilities 431 Allowance For Bad Debts 2 142 Intl Corp Receivable 268 528 Leases Payable 10 100 Notes Payable 144 178 Net Accounts Receivable 429 292 z Long Term Liabilities Total Inventories 698 075 Total Liabilities 349 709 Prepaid Assets 3 462 Current Assets 1 286 614 Capital Stock 50 000 Leasehold Improveme
11. 18 19 20 21 22 23 Click Close to close the Company Information dialog box On the Company menu click Specification Sets to display the Specification Sets dialog box Select the first specification set In the Location box enter the new location Warning Leave the file name intact Click Save Ifa message displays saying that the spec set exists in the new location and asking you if want to overwrite click No Repeat steps 18 20 for each remaining spec set If you selected the Update Current User Only option in step 8 repeat steps 4 10 for all remaining computers or workstations To set up a thin client 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 Have all users close all FRx applications Install FRx to the new network location and apply the latest service pack immediately after installation Using Microsoft Windows Explorer browse to the new SysData directory Move all the files from the NEW SysData directory into a backup directory Copy all the files from the old SysData directory into the new SysData directory Warning Leave the old FRx install and SysData directory intact From one user workstation browse to the new FRx directory Double click on the FRxReg exe file to register all DLL files found in the FRx directory Launch the Report Designer on the user workstation If the Import Export paths for companies do not need to be changed skip to step 13 Otherwise on the Company menu select
12. FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 18 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus Use this table as a quick reference list for using the standard menus To Open a new row column or tree Select this menu and command On the File menu click New Open an existing row column tree or catalog ID On the File menu click Open Close an open window On the File menu click Close Close all open windows On the File menu click Close All Save the current file On the File menu click Save or press Ctrl S Save the current file with a new name On the File menu click Save As or press Ctrl A Change the printer On the File menu click Print Setup setup Repair your On the File menu click Compact FRx Database specification set or FRx system database Exit from Report On the File menu click Exit Designer View the company On the Company menu click Information information Change your default On the Company menu click Select Default company Edit the amount and date formatting On the Company menu click International Formats Edit specification sets On the Company menu click Specification Sets Turn on or turn off the On the Options menu click Tool Bar toolbar Turn on or turn offthe On the Options menu click Status Bar status bar Turn on or turn off the On the Options m
13. FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 277 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports Click OK Report processing proceeds according to your Output Selection in step 1 as follows e Ifyou selected to generate the report locally the Report Status dialog box displays a summary of the report progress To stop processing click Cancel When FRx finishes processing the report the DrillDown Viewer opens and displays it e Ifyou selected to generate the report on the Report Server the Catalog s queued successfully message box appears Click OK to close the message window and continue processing the report on the Report Server For more information on the Report Server see your FRx Report Server 6 7 User 5 Guide Generating a Report Locally For more information on the Report Server see your FRx Report Server 6 7 User s Guide To generate a report locally 1 On the Catalog of Reports toolbar click Generate Report to display the Output Selection dialog box Output Selection Output Selection Please select the output for the report Generate Report Locally IV Set as Default The Generate Report Locally option displays because the Report Server is not installed Click OK If your report includes a reporting tree the Select Reporting Unit s to Print dialog box appears F Select Reporting Unit s to Print E FABRIKAM WORKS rabikem Woks E TT DENVER Denver Region SA
14. If you use either the CPO or RPO switch and you specify multiple WKS columns in the column layout Report Designer matches an external worksheet column with each WKS column In this case you must place a value in the period cell of each WKS column You can use a specific period such as 6 or a relative period such as B 2 For more information on adding a value to the period cell see Period Code on page 152 Using a Combined Worksheet Link You can include the worksheet cell references in the Link to General Ledger column of the row format if you e Need to import only limited amounts of worksheet data from a single file e Do not need to use a reporting tree To include worksheet cell addresses in the same link as your general ledger codes you must first change the link type To change the link type 1 From the row format worksheet Link menu select Open Link Window or click the Link Form icon in the toolbar to display the Links dialog box Link Type B GL WorkSheet z Link Name GLW1 Use Default or Create New Link Name ee ocala General Ledger Year Optional Fiscal Year Usually Blank Describe the Link to the Source of Report Data Worksheet File Name c FRx 6 7 io_data cmpbud32 xls a FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 128 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets 2 Inthe Link Type box change General Ledger to GL Worksheet 3 Accept the Re
15. Microsoft Business Solutions RX Analytics e Product name and logo We have introduced a new product name logo and demonstration data that aligns the FRx product and FRx Software s ownership with one of the most recognizable brands in the industry Microsoft Corporation Through this association existing customers and prospective buyers will know how we are evolving While staying true to the trustworthy roots of our heritage we are backed by the seasoned and insightful strength and vision shared by our parent company And we will continue to reflect these ideals and live up to the standards set by our brand FRx Report Manager Report Manager is a powerful optional module that makes it easy to pull together FRx reports with the other information end users need to do their work all delivered in one comprehensive report book It automates the time consuming and manual process of producing report books containing many different types of documents and files Report Manager helps users present information in a manner that is logical organized and relevant Finally Report Manager allows users to create report books with information specialized to the needs of each individual user then streamlines the printing and distribution of the complete presentation Report Manager allows e Multiple output types including FRx DrillDown Viewer files Microsoft Office documents and other reports produced from diverse reporting packages to be
16. The remainder of the full general ledger account code typically defines the department division location area task project and other categories within the overall structure of the organization In Report Designer these segments of the general ledger code are called the responsibility account code segments Full general ledger Cash Denver Corporate account code 1100 1000 000 Natural Division Department Responsibility account code segment Figure 1 4 General Ledger Account Code This distinction between the account s natural and responsibility segments is critical to the successful use of FRx Typically users define the natural segment in a row format and the responsibility segments in a reporting tree These codes are combined in various ways when reports are printed When Report Designer s automatic build process creates row formats and reporting trees by default it separates the responsibility and natural portions of the account code Report Designer uses the concept of base year and base period rather than current year and current period This allows you to design column layouts that are easily adapted to different reporting needs If you used current period to print a report for the prior period or any other period you have to modify the column layout By using the base concept once you specify the base period in the column layout all you need to do is tell Report Designer what base period to run the r
17. The top portion of the Catalog of Reports window is used for report identification periods and dates This section contains information and instructions on e Identifying a New Report e Specifying Report Periods and Dates e Tabs for Building and Formatting Reports Identifying a New Report The top portion of the Catalog of Reports window is used for report identification The following list describes the catalog and company options you use to identify a report e Catalog ID Use to create a unique Catalog ID name e Catalog ID Description Use for a catalog description e Company FRx uses the accounting calendar information fiscal year and periods from the company you select to generate a report If you select the company code ANY FRx uses the current default company For more information on creating a new company see your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 230 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog Identification To identify a new report 1 Open the Catalog of Reports window FRx Desktop Catalog Hex Deka Leh eem ahs a ceser 2 fran Dept z Transaction Detail Departm 4 Catalog Records L gt gt i El silne m Use Posted Balances Only x baa ame aaa Mavro ma r Iv fFokmwiks C FABRIKAM WORKS Denver and San Francisco Regions 2 In the Catalog ID box type a unique Catalog ID name up to 16 ch
18. drop down list box A type of control where you can view a list of choices by dropping down a list box A downward pointing arrow on the right side of the box indicates a list box is available dynamic data exchange DDE A process that supports the linking of information between applications for example a direct link between a spreadsheet cell and a program box dynamic headings Headings in the column layout that are set up to change based on specific data you specify when a report is generated such as period or fiscal year edit mode A state in which the system accepts typing both for entering text and editing in a box A box is in edit mode when the insertion point is present effective dates The date or period number at which a specific row format column layout or reporting tree is used These dates and periods are set in the Catalog of Reports enabled Describes a command or control that is available to use The command or control appears in solid text rather than shaded when enabled Enhanced XML A custom Extensible Markup Language XML file format that preserves the drill down capability for FRx reports stored in a Web repository Enhanced XML format is readable only with the FRx DrillDown Viewer Glossary Enterprise Server The FRx Enterprise Server is an enhanced FRx Report Server with up to four CPUs and reporting engines to process up to four reports simultaneously entry date The date o
19. A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Glossary account code The unique identifier for a record that holds the balance relating to any single asset liability owner s equity revenue or expense of the business account filter A general ledger account mask used in the column layout to restrict a column to specific general ledger accounts account mask See mask account modifier An operator used to offset the period or year for a specific row and also referred to as a row modifier accounting period A period of time such as a month quarter or year for which financial statements that measure flow such as an income statement are prepared At the end of each accounting period all GL accounts must balance Accounting periods are defined in the general ledger account sets A group of accounts assigned a name for example the range of accounts from 5100 to 5600 entitled Travel and Entertainment Account sets are created in row formats alphanumeric A term for either alphabetic or numeric characters usually used in reference to a code such as a report name row code or description application A computer software program designed for a specific purpose FRx is considered an application apply date The date that determines to which GL accounting period a transaction posts See also document date entry date attribute filer Additional pieces of information financial and non financial that exi
20. Generating a Report with Report Server To generate a report with Report Server 1 On the File menu click Generate to display the Output Selection dialog box E Output Selection X Generate Report Locally 7 vs 2 Inthe Output Selection dialog box do the following To Select Generate a report on your local Generate Report Locally workstation Generate a report on the Report Generate Report to Queue Serve Note This option is only available if the Report Server product is installed 3 To select the generation option you selected as a default select the Set as Default check box 4 Click OK 5 If your report includes a reporting tree the Select Reporting Unit s to Print dialog box displays Select Reporting Unit s to Print SALES DENVER Sales E RETAIL DENVER Retail Sales Denver E WHOLESALE DENVER Wholesale Sales Denver SERVICE DENVER Service Division Denver ra LAB DENVER Lab Service Denver B STUDIO DENVER Studio Denver SAN FRANCISCO San Francisco Region SALES SF Sales Division S an Francisco E RETAIL SF Retail Sales San Francisco EB WHOLESALE SF Wholesale Sales San Francisco SERVICE SF Service Division San Francisco E LAB SF Lab Services San Francisco EB STUDIO SF Studio San Francisco 6 To select the reporting units to generate do one of the following e Press the Ctrl key while you select the units e Click Mark All
21. YTD Balances Only YTD Balances Only Side by Side Tabular Balance Sheet Cash Flow Statement Consolidated Last 3 Months and YTD Act Bud Variance Consolidated Filmworks and Canada Consolidated Filmworks and Canada and ELIM Current And YTD Actuals FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 138 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Opening the Column Layout Window 2 Double click a column layout to display the Column Layout window ACTUAL ACTUAL BASE BASE BASE BASE CUR CUR The column layout you selected displays in the window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 139 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Column Layout Menu Functions Column Layout Menu Functions Within the Column Layout window the File and Edit menus provide you with additional functions This section contains information and instructions on the e File Menu e Edit Menu Note e The menus described in this chapter are specific to the Column Layout window For information about menus that appear in all Report Designer main windows see Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus on page 18 File Menu The following is the column layout File menu Figure 5 1 Column Layout File Menu The options that are specific to column layouts are defined in the following table File Menu Commands Description Rename Renames the column and description Del
22. arD General Ledger Year Dptional Fiscal Year Usually Blank Describe the Link to the Source of Report Data 2 Click New to create a new link 3 Inthe Link Type box change General Ledger to External Worksheet 4 Accept the Report Designer default value in the Link Name box or if you would like to use your own link naming system enter another name 5 Inthe Optional Description box you can optionally type a description of the link This description displays in the row format Link column description and in the reporting tree Ext Link column 6 Click Save 7 Click Close Entering Worksheet Cell Addresses The steps for entering worksheet cell addresses for a separate link are the same as those discussed in Entering Worksheet Cell Addresses on page 129 with one exception When you use a Link to Worksheet column you do not need to enter WKS before the cell references because the column refers only to a worksheet FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 131 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets Example of Separate Worksheet Linking The budget forecast worksheets for San Francisco Denver and Corporate Headquarters shown in Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 and Figure 4 13 are linked to the row format in Figure 4 14 to report total compensation expenses
23. column layout and reporting tree you get three separate reports while only accessing the general ledger once See Figure 4 1 on page 117 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 120 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Establishing Links Establishing Links All links are defined from the Row Format window Most row formats that use general ledger account codes are created by automatic transfer from the chart of accounts You can also create a new row format by selecting New from the File menu In both cases Report Designer automatically creates a link to the general ledger by default You can have a maximum of 19 link columns within a row format To create links in the Row Format window you use the Links dialog box shown in Link type G General Ledger z Link name GL1 Use default or create new link name Worksheet file name E Optional description General ledger year Optional fiscal year usually blank Describe the link to the source of report data Figure 4 8 Links Dialog Box In the Link Type box you select the type of link to create such as row format external worksheet or XBRL For more information on linking to worksheets see Using a Combined Worksheet Link on page 128 and Using a Separate Worksheet Link on page 130 Use the General Ledger Year box to create multiple general ledger link columns to the appropriate year General ledger link columns are useful when creating year
24. e Reduce enlarge or automatically adjust your page size e Send reports via e mail directly from the Report Designer or the DrillDown Viewer e Generate groups of reports using the FRx Report Launcher without opening Report Designer e Publish reports to a Web server FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 8 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Understanding Report Designer An Overview Fabrikam Works Inc Tabular Balance Sheet For the Five Months Ending May 31 2004 ASSETS Cash Checking 134 111 13 Cash Money Market 46 751 00 Total Cash 180 862 13 Accounts Receivable 166 164 00 Allowance For Bad Debts 2 184 00 Intl Corp Receivable 271 213 00 Net Accounts Receivable 435 193 00 Total Inventories 779 026 00 Prepaid Assets 3 289 00 Current Assets 1 398 370 13 Leasehold Improvements 69 600 00 Office Furniture And Fixtures 34 500 00 Office Equipment 37 700 00 Less Accumulated Depreciation 40 635 00 Net Fixed Assets 101 165 00 Total Assets 1 499 535 13 LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS EQUITY Accounts Payable 84 253 00 Accrued Liabilities 137 867 00 Total Current Liabilities 222 120 00 Leases Payable 10 100 00 Notes Payable 142 794 00 Long Term Liabilities 152 894 00 Total Liabilities 375 014 00 Capital Stock 50 000 00 Additional Paid In Capital 500 269 00 Year to Date Income 377 152 13 Retained Earnings 197 100 00 Shareholders Equity 1 124 521 13 Liabilities and Equity 1 499 535 13
25. eee eeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeaas 283 Scheduling Reports for Processing cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeenceeeeseenceeeeeeenieeeeeneeaes 284 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL 285 Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Overview c ceceeeeeneeeeeeeeeenaees 286 Including XBRL Elements in the Row Format cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeenaaees 289 Creating a Link to the XBRL TaxoOnomy ccccceccceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeees 289 Adding XBRL Element Tags to the Row Format c cceeecceceeeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeeeeeeaes 290 Updating Existing Row Formats for XBRL 2 0 oo eecceeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeneeeeeeeeneeeeerenee 291 Including XBRL Elements in the Column Layout 000 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 293 Selecting XBRL Output Type in the Catalog of Reports 0 eeecceeeeeeeneeeeeeentteeeeeeeenaees 295 Selecting XBRL Output Type from the Catalog of Reports ccccseeeeeeeeeees 296 Selecting FRD Output Type For XBRL Reports cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneecaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 297 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide Vv Contents XBRL DeHMIOMS orense dace tpbadiacccensccccenavpheaauca ceed di ctizevawadtguseeseeaitiaderebedteatoawddatieeepied 298 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation ccccccccesseeseneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneneeenees 299 FRx Currency Translation OVErvVi
26. instructs Report Designer to reverse the amount signs in XCR columns 4100 TO 4259 DES cos 450 4503 220 Gross Profit TOT 100160 c 250 Gross Margin CAL 220 100 0 0 C BTOD 280 DES 310 Operating Expenses DES 340 Salaries and Wages i em 517 6077 547 400 Office Expense 527 460 Advertising Expense CL T ELF my 520 Total Operating Expenses TOT 340 70 489 Taane T T T 580 Net Income from Operations T01 220520 CaN 610 J t t Figure 5 17 Row Format with Credits Reversed in Normal Balance FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 161 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Fabrikam Works Inc Income Statement For the Three Months Ending March 31 2002 Actual Budget Variance Variance Unfavorable Unfavorable Net Revenue 2 136 207 1 034 335 1 101 872 51 58 COGS 1 444 056 644 131 799 925 55 39 Gross profit 692 151 390 204 301 947 43 62 Gross Margin 32 4 37 7 5 3 Operating Expenses Salaries and Wages 399 824 270 851 128 973 32 26 Office Expense 52 455 36 814 15 641 29 82 Advertising Expense 48 135 39 687 8 448 17 55 Total Operating Expenses 500 414 347 352 153 062 30 59 Net Income from Operations 191 737 42 852 148 885 77 65 Figure 5 18 Results of Reversing Credit Value in Report Note o When exporting reports to an Excel via OLE format do not select the Exp
27. or Lotus 1 2 3 You can import data from one of these programs and combine that data with data from your general ledger For example you can import budget figures from a worksheet and then create a report that compares actual figures from the general ledger to the budget figures from the worksheet External worksheet data can be accessed in two ways a combined worksheet link or a separate worksheet link e The easiest method a combined worksheet link combines external worksheet cell references in the same link column as your general ledger account codes When you do this some rows in a given column of your report contain general ledger information while other rows in that same column contain worksheet data This is the preferred method when you are importing limited amounts of data such as work hours headcount or units sold and when associating the data with a particular unit in the reporting tree is not required e You can use a separate worksheet link to access multiple rows and columns of worksheet data and associate one or more external worksheets with one or more reporting units in the reporting tree You create a special column in the row format that links to the worksheet cell addresses and then add the worksheet file names to the reporting tree Note o Linking to spreadsheets that have identical layouts reduces the number of link columns required in the row format and reduces maintenance time This section contains informati
28. 146 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Adding Column Detail The remaining rows in the Column Layout window are called Column Detail rows These rows define detail column information such as e Column type for example general ledger spreadsheet or calculations e Book Code for example actual or budget e Fiscal year and period e Period or year to date balances e Calculation Formulas e Currency Display e Special Formatting and Print Control e Transaction Start and End Dates Figure 5 6 displays and describes the Column Detail rows Column Detail Rows Use to define each Column Headers A B column in your report a GL Acct Columh Detail E area Type GL Calc ete DESC ACCT Use these rows for GL Book Code Atiri Seana Column Types Period Code Use for Calculation L rent Per YTD Formulas in Calc Columns vale Formula M olumi idth 40 y Special Format Options xtra Spaces Before Col Restricts Data Display Special Forma Print Control olumn Res S Reporting Uni Restrict Display of Reporting Currency Formatting a gt Units Use with General Ledger and Reporting Units gt Restict GL Data to Specific _ Dates Use to Restrict GL Data Justifies Column Descriptions Use for OLAP Report Figure 5 6 Column Detail Rows Note If you prefer to use keyboard commands instead of the mouse you can press Alt Page Down to move from the column header
29. 2 3 WK3 spreadsheet To select a different sheet save the sheet as a separate WK3 file If you type a file without a full path Report Designer uses the path defined for the default 1O_Data directory in the Company Information dialog box The file name appears by default in the Link to GL Worksheet header description 11 Repeat steps 3 through 10 for every reporting unit that you want to receive worksheet data Make sure that the worksheet file names are entered in the corresponding unit of the reporting tree to prevent incorrect data in your report FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 135 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets 12 In the Reporting Units dialog box click OK to accept your changes and return to the Reporting Tree window Note Remember to specify a row format for each reporting unit cations CORPORATE Corporate DYNADEMO BUDGHQ32XLS WKS2 HQ Link DENVER Denver Region DYNADEMO BUDGDV32XLS WKS1 Reg Link SAN FRANCISCO San Francisco Region 8888 2777 777 DYNADEMO _ BUDGSF32XLS_ fWKS Reg Lik _ 4 L The worksheets are referenced in Ext File T and Ext Link W columns of the reporting tree Setting Up the Catalog ID After you create the reporting tree you can set up and generate your report To set up the Catalog ID 1 From the FRx Control Panel open the Catalog of Reports es FRx Desktop Catalog a FW E FabikamWorks Inc _fir
30. 2 864 b41 84 4 837 4 837 814 Can look at next periods for YTD Y 2 4272 5772 IV 2 A 643 441 43 329 629 681 IC Current Numbers in a YTD Column 4100 C 979 053 _ 979 053 996 275 019 1 019 266 Can look at Previous periods for Cur C 2 4100 C 2 955 055 955 055 965 452 979 053 Can look at next periods for both Cur YTD 4100 TO 4999 1 275 078 1 815 118 IBB Beg balance for the period or Year 4100 TO 4999 BB 749 269 007 CED o Used for Cash Flow statements 1100 BB 82 722 Figure 3 29 Report Displaying Results of Account Modifiers Restricting Rows with Book Codes You can limit a row to an existing book code However you must have created a column layout that includes at least one GL type column with a book code In order for your reports to restrict the correct data you must associate the restricted row format with the appropriate column layout in the report catalog Note o Any book code restriction you enter in a row will override those selected in the column layout for that row only You can select a book code restriction from the GL Account Links dialog box or if you know the book code add it directly into the Link to General Ledger column To add a book code restriction using the GL Account Links dialog box 1 Double click the Link to General Ledger column to open the GL Account Links dialog box GL Account Links Formula From Account range or ci S
31. 218 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Adding Text and E mail Links to a Reporting Tree 8 To add users to the Access Granted list box do one of the following To add Users from the e mail address books Do this 1 Inthe Tree Unit Security and E mail dialog box click E mail to display the e mail address book dialog box 2 Inthe Show Names from the box select an address book from the list to display a list of user e mail addresses 3 Inthe e mail address list on the left select a user s e mail address from the list Note To select multiple e mail user addresses press the Ctrl key and select each e mail address to include 4 Click To gt to add the e mail addresses for the selected users to the list on the right 5 Click OK Users from the FRx Users list Note The FRx Users list is available only when FRx Security is active User profiles must include an e mail address for this selection to work correctly See your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator 5 Guide for details 1 Inthe Tree Unit Security and E mail dialog box click FRx Users to display the Select a User dialog box 2 Select the user names to include from the list Note To select multiple user names press the Ctrl key and select each user to include 3 Click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 219 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Adding Text and E mail Links to a Reporting Tree To add Users from
32. 227 Message box 255 Microsoft Excel exporting reports 245 linking to 125 Missing Element Tag Warning 295 296 Missing Unit Warning option 273 modifiers using account modifiers 103 Multicurrency Formatting 167 N natural account code combining with full account code 95 entering in row format 94 using in FRx 10 66 New button record control box 18 No Page Breaks between Units option 270 Norm Bal cell entering 82 O OLAP Descriptions dialog box 173 Open Column dialog box 43 138 Open Row dialog box 70 Open Tree dialog box 46 Optional Description box 123 129 131 orientation changing report 257 Outline Style command 193 Output box 244 Output File Name dialog box 250 Output Options tab 236 243 P Page Break Before Unit box 209 Page Options tab 236 257 Page Setup command 225 Page Setup tab 236 257 parent reporting unit defining account mask 183 overview 181 Index Paste command 16 191 period assigning a range 152 using account modifiers 103 Period Code 152 Period Code cell 174 Period Dates option 271 Period Description box 23 Period Numbers option 271 Period Year Description box 173 Periods and Dates dialog box 235 276 Pictures and Text command 194 Plural Description box 24 234 Plus Minus Picture and Text command 193 194 point and click totaling 92 Posted Unposted Activity option 50 233 posted transactions restricting column 164 Print Catalog Information dialog box 279 Print Control cell c
33. 272 Calculate Rows First option 272 calculations applying to specific columns 87 column layout CALC 149 IF THEN ELSE statements 157 multiplying and dividing 155 row format CAL 86 IF THEN ELSE statements 90 point and click functionality 92 TOT and CAL 86 using operators 87 Catalog ID chaining 280 cloning 282 creating 49 Catalog ID box 49 275 Catalog of Reports Catalog menu 226 Edit menu 226 File menu 225 Index Window menu 227 Catalog of Reports icon 7 CBR format code 74 CCAVG currency code 304 CCHIST currency code 304 CCSPOT currency code 304 CCX currency code 304 Chain to Catalog ID box 251 280 chart of accounts building row format 67 Choose a Reporting Tree dialog box 241 Choose a Row Format dialog box 134 238 Clear box headers footers 261 Clear command 16 191 Clone button record control box 18 282 Codes box 258 Collapse Branch command 189 column defining placement 83 defining width 64 editing 143 entering details 147 entering headers 145 headings codes mixing with text 146 formatting 145 matching placement with worksheet CPO 127 restricting to specific dates 171 using in calculations 155 Column Layout box 52 Column Layout command 226 column layouts creating 43 menus File 140 opening 138 pulling data 151 Column Period Offset option 127 Column Restriction code 176 Column Width command 193 Column Width dialog box 64 Combine button 214 Combine Posted and Unposted Amounts option 267 comma method
34. 5 Creating Column Layouts Creating Tabular Reports When you generate the balance sheet report based on the column layout the Balance Sheet displays as shown in Figure 5 28 Fabrikam Works Inc Tabular Balance Sheet For the Five Months Ending May 31 2002 ASSETS Cash Checking 134 111 13 Cash Money Market 46 751 00 Total Cash 180 862 13 Accounts Receivable 166 164 00 Allowance For Bad Debts 2 184 00 Intl Corp Receivable 271 213 00 Net Accounts Receivable 435 193 00 Total Inventories 779 026 00 Prepaid Assets 3 289 00 Current Assets 1 398 370 13 Leasehold Improvements 69 600 00 Office Furniture And Fixtures 34 500 00 Office Equipment 37 700 00 Less Accumulated Depreciation 40 635 00 Net Fixed Assets 101 165 00 Total Assets 1 499 535 13 LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS EQUITY Accounts Payable 84 253 00 Accrued Liabilities 137 867 00 Total Current Liabilities 222 120 00 Leases Payable 10 100 00 Notes Payable 142 794 00 Long Term Liabilities 152 894 00 Total Liabilities 375 014 00 Capital Stock 50 000 00 Additional Paid In Capital 500 269 00 Year to Date Income 377 152 13 Retained Eamings 197 100 00 Shareholders Equity 1 124 521 13 Lie ies and Equity 1 499 535 13 Figure 5 28 Tabular Balance Sheet FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 178 FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Reporting Trees 181 Reporting Tree Window
35. 54 into this report row 5 Starting with the Income Tax Expense row select five rows 6 On the Edit menu click Insert Row 7 Inthe next row below Commissions Expense click the Fmt Code column and select Fmt Code from the list FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 36 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format 8 Review your formatted expense rows B Description Related Rates Rows Unit Eoi General Ledger Operating Expenses 273 DES 280 Salary Expense 5000 310 Officers Comp 5050 340 Depreciation Expense 5100 370 Office Expense 5200 400 Supplies Expense Service 5225 430 Maintainence Expense Service 5240 460 Rent Expense 5250 430 Travel Expense 5300 520 Advertising Expense 5350 550 Commission Expense 542 Adding a Total Operating Expenses Row using a Formula You can include a formula in the Related Rates Rows Unit column that calculates the total operating expenses The Total Operating Exp Row Code 560 shown in Figure 2 3 on page 35 is based on the following instructions To add a Total Operating Expenses row using a formula 1 Go to the row following the underline format row for Commissions Expense B D EJF G H Description Fmt Related Nom Print Column Link to EER Ba Cri General Ledger Operating Expenses Salary Expense Officers Comp Depreciation Expense Office Expense Supplies Expense Service Maintainenc
36. 699 5 782 2 917 This section of the report is Travel Expense 670 444 226 2589 1722 867 sorted in descending order Dia 39 219 26 087 13 162 151 587 100 766 50 821 rted by YTD Absolute Variance in Descending Order Sales 39 219 26 057 13 162 151 587 100 766 50 821 Salary Expense 16 566 11 007 5 559 64 035 42 564 21 471 Rent Expense 2 251 1 495 756 8 699 5 782 2 917 Travel Expense 670 444 226 2 589 1 722 867 The row format in the following figure demonstrates the use of the SORT and ASORT format codes Following this is the report that this row format creates c D E F H Fmt Related Norm Print Link to Rates Rows Unit Bal Ctrl General Ledger DES SORT 13970179 D Sales c 4100 Salary Expense 5000 Rent Expense 5200 Travel Expense 5300 DES orted by YTD Absolute Variance in Descending Order DES ASORT 22070 260 G Sales c 4100 Salary Expense 5000 Rent Expense 5200 Travel Expense Figure 3 11 SORT and ASORT in Row Format Window Figure 3 12 Sorted Sample Report Use the following format codes with the separately licensed FRx Currency Translation module Your software license determines if Currency Translation is available with your installation Contact your vendor for more information about currency conversion licensing CCHIST This code tells FRx to perform currency conversion using the historical rate from the currency translation table The historical rate is commonly
37. 7 Tabs for Building and Formatting Reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 236 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Building Blocks Tab Building Blocks Tab Use the row format column layout and reporting tree options under the Building Blocks tab to build your report 11 FRx Desktop Catalog gt File Edit Company Catalog Options Admin Window Help Tran Dept Transaction Detail Departm A Eee Fabien works ine __Fimd New Cone Save Financial amp Transaction E Use Posted Balances Only L Row Format Oprions romes E n ee m Column Layout Hno p Options A i a Reporting Tree Gricna Foxknvik E RegionalFabikam Tree using Sub Leves SS Figure 7 8 Catalog of Reports Building Blocks Tab This section contains information and instructions on e Selecting Row Formats e Selecting Column Layouts e Selecting a Reporting Tree Selecting Row Formats Row Format Options Use the following options for the row format e Row Format Use to select a row format for your report For more information on row formats see Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats e Effective Dates This option changes the report presentation based on a specific point in time To assign multiple row formats to the report tied to an effective date or report period select this option When the report is generated FRx selects the row format using the Report Date information FR
38. 7 User s Guide 62 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Row Format Menu Functions To insert more than one row 1 Highlight the gray boxes of the number of rows to be inserted 2 Select the Insert Row command When you insert a new row FRx assigns a new row code number This number is typically halfway between the number in the row code above and the number of the row code below the newly added row For example a row inserted between rows 130 and 160 might be assigned a row code of 145 Format Menu Use the Format menu to control the font styles and column width in a report Font Styles Column Width Figure 3 5 Row Format Format Menu Font Styles Use this command to create and edit different font styles and shading for your report You can apply fonts globally or to a specific row within a report To create or edit a font style before using it 1 On the Format menu click Font Styles to display the Font Styles dialog box Font Styles l Fontstylename SEEN Font style sheet setup Italic False The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog 1234567890 2 Choose from the following options To Do this Create anew font style 1 Click New 2 Inthe Font Style Name box enter a name for the new style Edit an existing font 1 Click Find style 2 In the Select Font Style dialog box select the font that you want to edit and click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guid
39. 80 Normal Balance Column 0 cececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeeeesaaeeeeseenaeeeeeneaas 82 Prio Control COMM tics cecistrsies theceieantssl cass paskts MGvataes dl gvianGuen dela cnet 82 Gi Colm sarsii a ites cid acai Gienedelant eat eesti as eee 83 LIK COLUM iranran a a aa E Ea aaa aaae di a 84 Totaling and Calculations acceca R 86 Standard Totaling TOT esesesssseeesseserresserrrssttirrststtrtnsssttnransttntnnntttnnnnattn runsten nnn nt 86 Formula Totaling CAL eancsiscncnsaan r A 86 Point and Click Totaling for TOT and CAL rOWS 0 eeccecceeeeeeteeeeeeeenneeeeeeeentaeeeeeneeaaes 92 General Ledger Account Codes o eccccscseeeeecccceeseseeceeeeseseeceeeeeescenenseeseeeeeeesneneeeeeeensneses 94 Zero Balance ACCOUMS s isscctievecct nee na iaa aE a AE a A A AAA 94 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide ii Contents Defining an ACCOUnE Code sscseccsiolaecccievaieaceteyadinadevvvanecdgeveeaneaudeivaunectivevebad neveveaenities 94 Defining Only the Natural Code ou ce ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeneeeeeseaas 94 Defining the Full Account Code o ccccccccceecccececeseeceeeeeneeceeeeeeseeceesesstneceeeeeeseeaeeeeeseeaes 95 Entering General Ledger Codes cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeseenneeeseeeaas 96 Using Wildcards and Ranges cccecceeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeenaeeeeseeeneeeeeneeaes 97 Linking to Account Types seeria AKAA lee ie 100 ACC
40. A column layout can contain up to 255 separate columns such as descriptive text general ledger or worksheet amounts and calculations FRx Report Designer uses the same spreadsheet technique for column layouts as for row formats Enter columns across the page as you want them to appear on your reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 137 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Opening the Column Layout Window Opening the Column Layout Window You can either create a new column layout and start building it from scratch or you may prefer to open an existing column layout such as one you previously created or those created using sample data and modify the information in the column to create new column layouts Report Designer supports up to 255 columns within one column format For example columns A through Z are followed by columns AA through AZ and so forth To start a new column layout 1 On the File menu point to New and then click Column to display a blank Column Layout window FRx Desktop Col Untitled 1 DER T Fie Edit Format Company Options Currency Translation Admin Window Help 3X Qema a a Style Dotat A olu pA of ec fp e jf js To open an existing column layout 1 From the FRx Control Panel click the Column Layouts icon to display a list of available column layouts in the Open Column dialog box Open Column 3 Month Current and YTD
41. Adjust Currency Translation settings in the catalog of reports For information about administering Currency Translation refer to the FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 299 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation FRx Currency Translation Overview FRx Currency Translation Overview While many host general ledgers provide for some type of currency conversion very few provide the sophisticated currency translation needed by enterprises Microsoft Business Solutions for Analytics FRx provides a completely new method of performing currency translations automatically and dynamically across one or more entities currencies and general ledger systems This new method is named DAX Dynamic Automatic Currency Translation System DAX works with a variety of host systems all with varying degrees of sophistication While some accounting systems may store currency exchange rates that should be used by FRx other systems make no conversion rates available thus requiring rates to be stored within FRx tables DAX can alternately pull information from the general ledger via OFSI or from tables maintained within FRx Note o FRx uses an OLE server to provide standard interfaces from FRx to financial system data The FRx Open Financial Systems Interface OFSI provides a common interface to financial system data regardless of the underlying financial system The primary purposes for cu
42. B Select this code to display this column only if the period is less than the base period P gt B Select this code to display this column only if the period is greater than the base period P B Select this code to display this column only if the period is equal to the base period P lt B Select this code to display this column only if the period is less than or equal to the base period Table 5 4 Print Control Codes FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 159 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Print Control 07o Description Select this code to display this column only if the period is greater than or equal to the base period Table 5 4 Print Control Codes Continued FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 160 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Refer to the following figures for examples of a column layout that uses the XCR code a corresponding row format with credit signs reversed and the resulting report ___CoumnHeaders a e c Jf 0 JT E T Actual Budget Variance Variance 2 Unfavorable Unfavorable i G GL CAL ACTUAL Budget Original BASE BASE BASE BASE YTD A The XCR print control reverses the sign of the calculation See the corresponding report Figure 5 16 Reversing Credit Value in Column Layout Window Notice the C codes in the Norm Bal column This
43. Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a Company 14 Inthe Plural Description box do one of the following Are full months Leave the default Months Ending Are not full months Type Periods Ending The text that you type in this box is used in your report headings For example if you type Months Ending in this box the heading for a report generated for March 2004 will read For the Months Ending March 31 2004 15 Click the System Specific Information tab 16 Refer to the FRx Report Designer Getting Started Guide shipped with FRx to complete this tab FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 24 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a Sample Report Creating a Sample Report The following pages topics illustrate how to create the sample income statement shown in Figure 2 1 This report is based on the Fabrikam Works sample data Use the sample data to follow the steps and create the sample report yourself Or you can modify the instructions to use your own company chart of accounts and corporate structure Fabrikam Works Inc Income Statement For the Eight Months Ending August 31 2002 August _ YTD Revenue Sales 1 063 650 7 966 746 Sales Returns 8 622 63 952 Ssles Discounts 28 738 213 157 Net Sales 1 026 290 7 689 637 COGS 747 900 5 596 129 Gross Margin 278 390 2 093 508 Operating Expenses Salary Expense 49 181 372 757 Officers Compens
44. Creating Multiple Period Transaction Detail Reports cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeseees 174 Creating Year to Date Transaction Detail Reports 2 0 cceeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 175 Creating Debit Credit Reports 0 cccceceeesencceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeseeeceneeeeeeecenneeseeeseneeeeeee 175 Creating Tabular Reports oineraino a ideale tai tin aire 177 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree cssssssseeceeeeeeeeseeseneneeeeeseeeeseeneeeeeeeesenenees 179 Understanding Reporting Trees o eeeecceccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeieeeeeneeneeeeeeeeaas 181 Reporting Unit Structure sci ciccccicesdeceeeisaceeuet cata ceeetesisaceenebi Hadi seni stsaceenet nehacieed tances 181 Multiple Reporting Trees secs casi sania ceesvedandandssbeanaccebavadecctbed suede cdadssanadvedersanadadebaraanaads 182 ACCOUNT MASKS creure tated cvensetae dive A adang eve ven ad Gates dee ee sn eteme dias 183 Account Mask Structure and Segment ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeetaeeeeeeenaaes 183 Reporting Tree Window ccccccssscceeceeseeeeeceeeseneeecesesenneeceeneeneeeceensensaeeeeeseeeaeeeenseeaes 187 Graphical Reporting Tree snesena a a aaa aa A 187 Reporting Tree Worksheet cccceeeeeeneeeeeeeetnee neers tenes eee teeeeeetiaeeeeeetiaeeeeeenaa 188 Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar ICOM ceesecceeceeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeesenaaes 190 Reporting Tree Menus icisvsscindccsvsnecacederpotascdantsuacacede
45. Designer Creating a New Catalog ID 4 Inthe Company box click the arrow to display the Select a Company for this Record dialog box Select a Company for this Record Fabrikam Works Inc Fabrikam Works Canada Inc 5 Select FW from the list and click OK to return to the Catalog of Reports window 6 Inthe Detail Level list box select one of the following detail level reports Select Financial Report To create A high level summary report Account Only A report that contains only account detail balances Financial amp Account Two reports a high level summary and an account detail Transaction Only A report that contains transaction details Financial amp Transaction Two reports a high level summary and a transaction detail 7 Inthe Provisional list box select one of the following Select Use Posted Balances Only To include Only transactions and balances posted in the general ledger Provisional Posted Unposted Activity All transactions and balances entered and posted in the general ledger Include Unposted Activity Only Only transactions entered but not yet posted in the general ledger FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 50 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a New Catalog ID 8 Click the Report Date arrow to display the Periods and Dates dialog box Periods and Dates For the Ten Months End
46. Detail Asset Detail for Transaction Detail Reports BalSheet Balance Sheet Balsheet_Elim Balance Sheet BalSheet_SByS Balance Sheet Side by Side BalSheet_Tab Tabular Balance Sheet BSRato Balance Sheet With Ratios Cash_Flow Cash Flow Statement CashDetl Cash Detail Report Consol_BS_IS Consolidated Balance Sheet and Inc Stmnt 5 Inthe Choose a Row Format dialog box select the row format with the worksheet link information and click OK 6 Click the Wks Link arrow to display the Links for dialog box Links for DYNADEMO Denver and SF Corporate 7 Select the worksheet link and click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 134 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets 8 Click the Wks File Name arrow to display the Select Import File dialog box Select Import File Look in 10_Data z e Ber Be Taxonomy Files 9 Inthe Select Import File dialog box type or select the worksheet file to import into this unit and click Open 10 To specify a specific worksheet select on of the following options To Do this Specify a worksheet within a Type the workbook name in brackets followed Microsoft Excel workbook by the worksheet name for example COMPBUDG XLS DENVER To specify a sheet within a Type the spreadsheet name in brackets followed Lotus 1 2 3 WK1 spreadsheet by the sheet letter Note Report Designer imports only the first sheet in a Lotus 1
47. For example the natural segment 4100 can be included in hundreds of general ledger accounts but appears only one time in the row format 7 The Starting row code box automatically defaults to row 100 This default displays Row 100 as the first row when you open the Row Format window 8 The Increment each row by box automatically defaults to 30 This default increments each row code in the Row Format window by 30 For example the first row is numbered 100 the second row is numbered 130 and so on 9 Click OK to display the accounts 4100 to 5500 in the Row Format window ae Neeru nt ses Pin oes Link to Code ral General Ledger Sales Sales Elimination Sales Returns Sales Discounts coGs COGS Elimination Salary Expense Officers Comp Depreciation Expense Office Expense Supplies Expense Service Maintainence Expense Service Rent Expense Travel Expense Advertising Expense Commissions Expense Income Tax Expense Do not try to create a format that contains all of the general ledger account and subaccount combinations in your company Report Designer works with many small row formats and then uses the reporting tree and other techniques to run reports for multiple departments If your selection results in more than a few hundred report rows break the format down into smaller sections of the report FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 27 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer
48. If your Open Financial System Interface OFSI supports the exclusion of inactive accounts select this option to generate reports that exclude inactive accounts By default this option is not checked If you check this option and your OFSI does not support inactive accounts your reports are not affected e Disable ledger refresh This option is unavailable dimmed for OFSI interfaces to the general ledger Currency Translation Tab If your report includes more than one currency use the Currency Translation tab to establish conversion options Currency Translation tab Figure 7 21 Catalog of Reports Window Currency Translation Tab The following DAX currency options are available to you FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 273 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports Reports Spot Rate Source This box identifies the database from which the spot daily currency exchange rate is taken Select FRx to use the DAX Currency Conversion tables select OFSI General Ledger to extract currency exchange rate data from the general ledger Historical Rate Source This box identifies the database from which the historical currency exchange rate is taken FRx is the only option available for the Historical Rate Source because both historic conversion rates and base currency amounts are read from the FRx DAX rate table Change Average Calculations Select this check box to calculate exchange rate averages as Su
49. Inthe box to the right of the Catalog ID box type a report description 5 Check the company code displayed in the Company box this is the default company If The displayed code is for your report company Then Go to step 6 The displayed code is not the report company Click the Company arrow 2 Inthe Select a Company for this Record dialog box select the correct company code and click OK 3 Go to step 6 6 Click the Detail Level arrow and use one of the following report detail options To Create a financial report Select Financial Report Create a account detail report Account Only Create a financial and an account detail report Financial amp Account FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 275 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports 7 8 10 11 12 13 To Select Create a transaction detail Transaction Only report Create a financial report Financial amp Transaction including account and transaction details Click the Provisional arrow and select one of the following provisional data options To Select Include only posted Use Posted Balances Only transactions and balances Include all posted and unposted Provisional Posted Unposted Activity balances and transactions Include transactions that have Include Unposted Activity Only not been posted To change the report date click the Report Dat
50. Modifier zoom box i RIO i Periods AFTER Current Period Balance Current Period Balance LESS Periods Current Period Balance PLUS Periods YTD Balance YTD Balance LESS Periods YTD Balance PLUS Periods To print a beginning balance for an account select BB For example if you entered 1420 in the From Account range or Individual Account or Account Set box and BB in the Account Modifier box the link to general ledger displays this 1420 BB When you generate the report the balance at the beginning of the period displays in the Current Period column while the balance for the beginning of the year displays in the Year to Date column To specify a different period for every column in a row place a slash character in the Account Modifier box for example 1 or 3 If your column layout adjusts for each period by the modifier amount and you want your reports to generate and adjust by period you need to add this account modifier For example using 1 as the account modifier pulls data for period 10 in a column layout that is currently pulling data for period 11 This applies to this row only To change Curr current to YTD or vice versa for every column in a row enter C or yY FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 104 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes For example the following row format and report figures use the Y account modifier to stack year to date balances
51. Natural row format and places the total in row 280 of the DetIBSIS row format When you use the Row Fmt Codes PB New Page Balance Sheet you must use the Column Layout Print Amount inipamar ows being pulled from the Control option BS Column is Balance Sheet Column in Mixed IS BS Report under the YTD Column so the NATURAL row format balance sheet prints correctly 7 3 E ae E tite Row Description tat Rates Rows Unit nom How Natura PB 100 130 BALANCE SHEET DES Eo i DES J130 DES 220 ASSETS DES 250 DES 280 Cash 100 To 199 310 Net Trade AIR 200 TO 299 340 Due from FWC 300 TO 349 370 Inventories 350 TO 499 400 Net Fixed Assets 500 To 799 430 460 Total Assets TOT 28070 460 cs These rows link to ranges of rows adding the values and placing them here Figure 4 3 Detailed Balance Sheet Data in DetIBSIS Row Format FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 118 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Creating Summary Reports Using Row Links SummryBS Row Format The SummryBS row format for the summary balance sheet links to the DetaillBSIS row format again using the row format option in the Link Type box in the Links dialog box In the following figure row 100 of the SummryBS row format has the same value as row 490 of the DetIBSIS row format Amount information is being pulled from the DetIBSIS row format D H amp B
52. On the Report Options tab select the Formatting sub tab FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 310 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports 5 Select No Rounding in the Rounding of Amounts box FRx Desktop Catalog File Edit Company Catalog Options Admin Window Help jell S lel a Elms al Tran Dept Transaction Detail Depatm IA Catalog Records Z E Fabrikan works ne Financial amp Transaction amp Transaction Ss v v A v v Li a Li FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 311 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 312 FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Answers to Common User Questions Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions FAQs 314 This appendix provides answers and troubleshooting help to frequently asked Error MessageS 320 questions FAQs and to system error messages FRx System Information 324 We also provide you overall Microsoft Business Solutions for Analytics FRx system information This information includes advice about installation permissions and preventing file corruption FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 313 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions FAQs Frequently Asked Questions FAQs Incomplete Report Output Q I created a row format with general
53. Reports which combines elements from each of the other building blocks From the main Report Designer window you can access every Report Designer function You can modify any report building block or the Catalog of Reports by using the mouse or arrow keys to select the appropriate portion of the Control Panel e To select any Report Designer building block rows columns and reporting trees or the Catalog of Reports click its icon For more information about rows columns and reporting trees see Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information and Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree e To access functions that relate to your Report Designer configuration and companies use the commands on the Company menu For more information on these functions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 11 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Getting Around in Report Designer see Chapter 2 Adding Company Information in your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide e To access system administrator functions including security setup and maintenance use the Admin menu commands For more information on these functions see Chapter 1 Performing Administrative Duties in your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide e To quickly get started setting up reports for your own company see Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer The Toolbar Each mai
54. Row 430 imports total units sold from the worksheet shown previously e Row 490 calculates gross profit per unit sold by dividing row 370 by row 430 Format Conventions Take these rules into consideration when you use the combined link method e Always specify the worksheet file name in the row format link e Always begin the cell reference with the WKS worksheet indicator this tells Report Designer that this is a reference to an external worksheet and not a general ledger account FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 129 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets e Always enclose the cell reference in parentheses e Type a specific Report Designer column letter before the cell address to ensure proper placement of the data in your report e Ifyou do not use commas or column references in the formula Report Designer uses the value placement method and places the worksheet data in consecutive GL or WKS columns Any text or calculation columns are skipped The following table describes which reference method uses which format For this reference Use this format method Direct WKS B B5 WKS B B5 C C5 D D5 WKS B B5 C C5 D D5 Direct Column WKS B5 C5 D5 Plann The Comma Method brings data into the first three Report Comma Method Designer columns Value Placement WKS B5 C5 D5 Method Table 4 1 Format Conventions in Column Layouts Windows S
55. To use an account filter UNITT Additional Text entry from the reporting tree Table 7 15 Header Footer Codes FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 259 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Page Options Tab Font Styles This option sets font styles for the selected Headers Footers cells To change the report header or footer font style select the text Then select a font style from the Font Styles list You can create new font styles or edit existing ones and then use these styles in your report Use this option to create and edit fonts and apply shading to the font used in your report headers and footers To create or edit a font style 1 On the Headers Footers tab click Edit Font Styles or select Font Styles from the Edit menu to display the Font Styles dialog box Font Styles Default Font style name Defaut Arial 12 bold shade Times 12 bold Font style sheet setup Times 10 bold italic Preview Times 12 Italic False Avial 10 bold italic shade The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy Atial 09 bald italic 09 bold 4 Aial 12 bold jtalic dog 1234567890 Arial 16 bold italic Red Arial 12 bold italic Blue 2 Use one of the following font style options To Do this Create a new font style 1 Click New 2 Inthe Font Style Name box enter a name for the new style Edit an existing font style 1 Inthe Font Styles dialog box select a font Click
56. Tree check box Note For the Income Statement sample report you do not need a reporting tree To create a report without a reporting tree leave the Use Reporting Tree check box blank In the Reporting Tree box click the arrow to display the Choose a Reporting Tree box Choose a Reporting Tree Consolidated Tree Summary Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrikam Work Tree using Sub Levels Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels Regional Fabrikam Work Tree using Sub Levels Functional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels Consolidated Tree using Row Linking Sub Accounts with Departments in the Row Select the reporting tree you created or FabrkWrkA the sample reporting tree and click OK Click Save FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 52 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Generating and Viewing a Report Generating and Viewing a Report When you generate this sample report it processes using the FRx default settings from the Output Page Options and Report Options tabs To generate the report 1 Click the Generate Report icon or Press F9 to display the Select Reporting Unit s to Print dialog box Note If you did not use a reporting tree the Report Designer begins processing your report and displays it in the DrillDown Viewer as shown after step 3 lF Select Reporting Unit s to Print eT ES o o Denver Sale
57. XLS Figure 7 10 Output Options List The descriptions and usages of these options are described below e Printer Use to print a report to your default printer e FRx DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML Use this default setting to send a report to the DrillDown Viewer for viewing on a computer running Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows XP When you select this option FRx saves this file with an frd extension by default The default path where FRx stores the file is determined by the Import Export Path selected in the Company Information dialog box When you open the file in the DrillDown Viewer you can view your report on screen print it export it to other applications send it via e mail and save it with another name For more information on the DrillDown Viewer see your FRx DrillDown Viewer and FRx Report Launcher 6 7 User 5 Guide e HTML Via Excel 2000 This option produces report output as an HTML file When you select this option FRx saves the file with an htm extension If you do not have the Excel 2000 application on your workstation FRx will display an error message When you use this option you must select the Activate Browser option under HTML Options to view the generated HTML report in a Web browser immediately e XML Use this option to export the report as an XML file The output file is in the standard XML format and can be imported into other XML compatible applications or displayed in a Web br
58. an historic rate ID to identify the related rate in Column D Spot rate code ree pee nt R Nom Pint em ei to Cod i ows Unit General Ledger E m Net Accounts Receivable Total inventories Prepaid Assets Current Assets Leasehold Improvements Office Furniture And Fixtures Data Processing Equipment Office Equipment Less Accumulated Depreciatign Net Fixed Assets Total Assets E1000 Type 5 4 ae CCHIST DES M CCSPOT TOT DES CCHIST CCHIST CCHIST CCHIST CCHIST TOT DES TOT LNE 370 TO 430 Invent 1310 TO 1350 1319 1430 220 T0 610 FURNITURE AND FI FURNITURE AND FI FURNITURE AND FI FURNITURE AND FI 310 730 TO 850 220 TO 940 O Historic rate codes Figure 9 2 Row Format Window Showing Spot and Historic Rate Codes In the following figure the average row format code CCAVG in row 1540 requires the average type selection in Column D Average rate code B Description Fmt Long Term Liabilities TOT TOT DES Total Liabilities Common Stock Add l Paid In Capital Year to Date Income Retained Earnings Treasury Stock TOT 1660 Stockholders Equity 1690 DES 1720 Currency Translation Adjustment TOT 1750 DES Total Liabilities and Equity TOT Type 5 LNE 4 Code Rates Rows Unit Bal 1270 TO 1330 1210 1360 CCHIST COMMON_STOCt C CCAVG AVGDAILY CCHIST RET_EARN CCHIST COMMON_STOCt C 1480 TO 1630 1660
59. applies this date to the accounting system s current period settings to define the current system period For example if the current system date is 8 21 00 and there are 12 monthly periods in the accounting system the current system period ends on 8 31 00 S 1 Defines the base period as one period before the current system period S 2 Defines the base period as two periods before the current system period S 1 Define the base period as one period after the current system period Table 7 6 Selections for Default Base Period FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 234 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog Identification Default Use Period List CUR Defines the base period as the current processing period as defined in the general ledger C 1 Defines the base period as one period prior to the current general ledger period C 2 Defines the base period as two periods prior to the current general ledger period C 1 Defines the base period as one period after the current general ledger period 01 To hard code a specific period number Table 7 6 Selections for Default Base Period Continued To identify report periods and dates 1 Click the arrow to the right of the Report Date box to display the Periods and Dates dialog box Periods and Dates Base Period This information is not saved with the catalog record Base Year 2004 Rebuild FRx GL indexes Period Covered
60. below current balances A B c o E a pE BXB A CURRENT PERIOD ACTIVITY DES BXC A DES Gross Sales c NP 410 4109 Returns amp Discounts NP 4110 4250 Sales TOT 220 250 c cs Cost of Goods Sold 450 4503 370 Gross Profit TOT 280 310 c DES 370 Total Units Sold WKS B 47 C 46 D 410 E 49 CPO DES 430 Gross Profit Unit Sold CAL 370 430 H 80 cs DES 490 DES 490 DES 490 BXB YEAR TO DATE ACTIVITY DES BXC A DES Gross Sales c NP 410 4109 Returns amp Discounts NP 4110 4250 7Y Sales TOT 730 760 Cost of Goods Sold 450 4509 7Y Gross Profit TOT 790 820 The Y account modifier stacks the year to date balances below current balances in the report below Figure 3 27 Row Format Window with Year to Date Account Modifier The following report illustrates the use of the Y format code Fabrikam Works Inc Gross Profit Per Unit Sold For the Month Ending June 30 2004 Denver San Francisco Combined Retail Wholesale Retail Wholesale Retail Wholesale Total Sales CURRENT PERIOD ACTIVITY Sales 135 293 48 248 122 666 46 857 257 959 95 105 353 064 Cost of Goods Sold 105 698 33 101 95 711 35 008 201 409 68 109 269 518 Gross Profit 29 595 15 147 26 955 11 849 56 550 26 996 83 546 Total Units Sold 25 230 9 884 28 704 11 413 53 934 21 297 75 231 Gross Profit Unit Sold 1 173 1 533 0 939 1 038 1 049 1 268 1 111 The year to date totals appear below the Current Period Activity HEART
61. column placement 126 company entering 22 Company box 50 208 Company Information dialog box 22 344 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide Company Name box 23 configuring FRx 11 Copy command 15 191 credits restricting column to credit 164 using the normal balance 82 Currency Code cell 168 currency codes assigning in row format 111 currency conversion historical rate source 274 spot rate souce 274 currency rate source 309 Currency Rate Subtype ID in column layout 307 Currency Symbol on 1st Row option 262 Currency Translation tab 303 309 currency translation purpose 300 currency translation reports 303 currency defining in the row format 111 Current Per YTD cell 174 Current YTD period 154 Cut command 15 191 D date including in column header 144 restricting a column 171 Date Period cell 239 240 242 date setting the report 276 DAX Dynamic Automatic Currency Translation 300 debit amount including the normal balance 82 restricting a column 164 debit credit reports creating 175 Default Base Period box 233 234 default base period codes 234 Default Font Style box 258 Delete button record control box 18 Delete Column command 141 Delete command 140 191 Delete File After Printing Viewing Sending box 251 Delete Unit command 192 deleting column layout 140 columns from column layout 141 reporting tree 191 reports Index after printing viewing or sending 251 row format 58 Demote Unit command 195 212 Descr
62. column with periods enter FILL WKS Select this code to display data pulled from an external worksheet for example Lotus 1 2 3 or Microsoft Excel e A_ATTR Select this code to display the Account Attribute in the column The account attribute must apply to a single full account and extracts underlying account information from the general ledger such as account ID State or Zipcode The Account Attribute function must be supported by your accounting system For information about using the Account Attribute in the row format see Using Account Attributes and Transaction Attributes in Rows on page 107 When you select A_ATTR as the column type specify the Attribute Category in the Book Code Attribute Category detail row of the column layout e T_ATTR Select this code to display the Transaction Attribute in the column Transaction attributes could include information such as the transaction Batch ID number The Transaction Attribute function extracts attribute data from the general ledger and must be supported by your accounting system For information about using the Transaction Attribute in the row format see Using Account Attributes and Transaction Attributes in Rows on page 107 When you select T_ATTR as the column type specify the Attribute Category in the Book Code Attribute Category detail row of the column layout e XBRL_TAG Select this code to display the XBRL element tag found in the row form
63. cut off on a generated report For more information about column layouts see Creating Column Layouts on page 137 To identify the reporting unit when you generate reports for multiple units in a reporting tree type the UNIT code in the Description cell When you generate the report FRx FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 71 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats inserts the reporting unit s Title Description For information about reporting trees and reporting units see Creating a Reporting Tree on page 179 You can include an Additional Text code for additional text entries from a reporting tree in a row format Enter the Additional Text code in the format UNITT where is the additional text entry number for the reporting unit For example UNITT4 specifies the fourth additional text entry for the reporting unit When the report is generated the report row will display the additional text For more information about creating additional text entries in a reporting tree see Adding Text to the Reporting Units in a Tree on page 216 To use additional text in the row format 1 From the Row Format window select the Description cell of the row in which you want to add the Additional Text code Insert rows if necessary 2 Select from the following options To Apply a font style to the additional text Do this Click the Font Style arrow and select a font style from
64. date in this column For example the date defined in the previous step includes only March 4 2002 To enter a range of dates 1 Type a start date in the Start Date cell for example 12 04 2002 2 Type an end date in the End Date cell for example 01 15 2004 Using a date range includes all the transactions entered during this date range in this column For example the date range defined in the previous steps begins December 4 2002 and ends January 15 2004 Note Any date or date range specified in the full date format overrides any period and year for the Fiscal Year and Period Code for this column Justification The Justification cell formats the Description column based on your selection This option only affects the column descriptions and not the actual values To apply Justification formatting to a Description column 1 Double click the Justification cell in a Description column to display the Select Justification dialog box Center Justification Right Justification 2 Select one of the following options e General Justification Applies any formatting you set up in the row format for the Description column e Left Justification Left justifies your column descriptions e Center Justification Centers your column descriptions e Right Justification Right justifies your column descriptions 3 Click OK to return to the Column Layout window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 172 Chapter 5 Creating
65. dialog box A type of window fixed in size that requests further information from you to continue processing You must provide the information or respond to the query before the system continues processing direction keys The Up Arrow Up Down Arrow Down Right Arrow Right and Left Arrow Left keys used to move the insertion point or focus or choose from a list of options disabled Describes a control or command that is unavailable for use The controls and commands appear shaded rather than solid when disabled The system disables commands and controls when they are illogical to use document control menu A menu that is standard on all document windows including forms dialog and message boxes that lists commands you perform on the document windows such as maximize minimize size and move Not all commands are available in all types of document windows document control menu box The leftmost symbol in the title bar of a document window form dialog or message box When you click this box or press Altt hyphen the Document Control menu opens FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 335 document date The date you assign to a transaction document such as an invoice Often the document date is assigned the date you enter the document See also apply date entry date DrillDown Viewer FRx DrillDown Viewer allows you to view print export save and send reports created in FRx Report Designer
66. dialog box Then either enter an account number or double click to open the Select General Ledger Account dialog box Always enter the same number of characters as in the full account mask or the column will be blank when the report runs FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 169 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Using Account Filters with Reporting Units The Account Filter cell can work either in place of or in conjunction with the Reporting Unit cell which restricts a column to a specific reporting unit For example the Reporting Unit cell can restrict the column to a certain department Retail whereas the Account Filter ___ColumnHeaders a e ce o Ee F CTT CK Sales Service OOO 2 bewer San Francisco Total Denver San Francisco Total Column Detail taaa GL CALC DESC GL GL ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE YTD YTD YTD J Sp Tomat Mak _Pi Cont TEI it 17 2100 77 MAMI 779 2200 77 Figure 5 23 Account Filters in Column Layout Window Attribute Filters The Attribute Filter cell works in conjunction with the A_ATTR or T_ATTR column types and Attribute Categories Attributes work like virtual account segments and must be supported by your accounting system For information about using account attributes and transaction attributes in the row format see Using Account Attributes and Transaction Attributes in Rows on page 107 The Attribute Filter cel
67. display all account information You create row formats in two ways e Manually by entering the row information into the Row Format window e Automatically by building basic formats directly from your general ledger chart of accounts as described in the following sections This section contains information and instructions on e Building a Row Format From the Chart of Accounts e Defining the Account Segments in a Row Format e Opening a Row Format Building a Row Format From the Chart of Accounts A master row format contains every unique natural account from all departments This format may contain many more accounts than a single department uses By default FRx suppresses printing any row without a corresponding balance in the general ledger This allows you to use the master format for all departments but still generate custom reports for each department When you build a row format from the chart of accounts FRx examines your entire chart of accounts or the account range you specify FRx then creates a master format with the account code segment you specified in the row format The selected account code segment is typically the natural account code segment To build a master row format 1 On the File menu point to New and then click Row to open an untitled Row Format window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 67 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Building a Row Format 2 On the Edit menu click Add Rows from Chart of A
68. each column of data in your report The report headers apply to the entire report This section contains information and instructions on e Creating Typical Headers e Creating Dynamic Conditional Headers Creating Typical Headers Double click a cell in the Column Headers row to display the Header Options dialog box shown in Figure 5 3 and then define your column headers Header Options Cell text Eont styles z Cancel Format options Underline z Justification C Left Spread from To a G Center C Bight Figure 5 3 Headers Options Dialog Box When you use the Header Options dialog box you see the following selections e Cell text Type text in this box or click Insert Code to select special codes e Insert Code Use one of the following codes listed in Table 5 3 to specify variable information such as date or period number in any header You can combine more than one variable code in the same cell Since codes rely on the calendar information from the Column Detail section codes only work with GL WKS or CALC columns When FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 143 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Headers you use these code for CALC columns you must complete the Base Year or Period fields Header Option Description Month This code prints the name of the current month in the heading The name appears in upper and lower case unless you enter the code in upper case as MONTH
69. edit menu from any of the Report Designer building blocks The following menu appears when you right click from a row format column layout or reporting tree cell Figure 1 6 Shortcut Edit Menu You can edit the box using one of the following options Shortcut Menu Description and Steps Selection Cut Use the Cut command to remove information from a building block cell 1 Highlight the information you want to cut 2 Right click and select Cut Copy Use the Copy command to copy information from a building block cell 1 Highlight the information you want to copy 2 Right click and select Copy Table 1 2 Shortcut Edit Menu Selections FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 15 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Getting Around in Report Designer Shortcut Menu Description and Steps Selection Paste Use the Paste command to paste information into a building block cell 1 Click the box in which you want to paste 2 Right click and select Paste Clear Use the Clear command to clear information from a building block cell 1 Highlight the information that you want to clear 2 Right click the cell row column or unit 3 Select Clear Find Use the Find command to locate information contained in a building block cell Refer to the instructions To find text later in this chapter Replace Use the Replace command to locate and replace information in a building block box Refer to the instructio
70. financial level and amounts will not be displayed in the account or transaction detail levels CCAVG This code tells FRx to perform currency conversion using the average rate for a range of dates from the currency translation table The average rate is commonly used for income rows in the report When you use the CCAVG row format code you must also specify an average type AVGDAILY AVGWEEKLY or AVGMONTHLY as the related rate in Column D of the row format Your FRx Administrator must select the method for calculating exchange rate averages in the FRxRates DAX table For more information about calculating exchange rate averages see Selecting the Method for Average Rate Calculation in Chapter 3 of your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide CCSPOT This code tells FRx to perform currency conversion using the spot daily exchange rate from the currency translation table If there is no spot date that matches the report date FRx uses the closest date prior to the report date The spot rate is commonly used for cash accounts CCX This code suppresses any currency conversion for this row and remains in effect until a different currency code is encountered FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 304 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports The following figure shows an example of currency conversion format codes in a row format Notice that the historic rate code CCHIST requires
71. footer if you enter TITLE as a code under Page Options on the Header Footers tab in the Catalog of Reports It also displays in the report row description if you enter UNIT in the row format description box In the Informal Desc box type an optional informal description to be used for reference purposes only It is not displayed in any window listings or printed on any reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 208 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Manually 9 10 11 12 If you are entering a detail unit one that pulls data from the general ledger a row format or an external worksheet in the Account Mask Acct Mask box you must type an account mask using the following account mask character types e Hook amp represented by the ampersand character to go to the row format account codes at report generation time e Wild card represented by the question mark to avoid building any specific detail unit into the tree You can also place an account mask in a summary unit for example for expenses directly related to that unit Note If you place an account mask on a summary unit accounts that are used in parent units should not be used in child units because this would cause amounts to be duplicated See Figure 6 4 Account Masks in Reporting Tree Window on page 184 for an example account mask structure Do one of the following To Do this Apply a format s
72. graphical reporting tree for Fabrikam Works Inc This graphical tree shows the report hierarchy and the relationship between each parent and child reporting unit Gan ma Utoe riepeoipion DENVER FABRIKAM WORKs Consolidated B SALES DENVER CORPORATE Corporate B SERVICE DENVER CORP DETAIL Corporate Detail amp amp amp amp 2000 000 ENT 4 DENVER Denver B SERVICE SF SALES DENVER Sales Division Denver Se amp amp 11 00 77 SERVICE DENVER Service Division Denver Bebb 200 77 SAN FRANCISCO San Francisco SALES SF Sales Division San Francisco bebebcb 21 00 27 SERVICE SF Service Division San Francisco b amp b amp 2200 77 Graphical Reporting Tree Figure 6 6 Graphical Reporting Tree In this example the graphical reporting tree shows that the Corporate reporting unit is parent to the Corp Detail reporting unit The Denver and San Francisco reporting units are parents to the Sales and Service child units All three of these parent reporting units Corporate Denver and San Francisco are child units to the Fabrikam Works parent Reporting Tree Worksheet You can also view parent and child reporting units and their order in the Reporting Tree worksheet located on the right side of the Reporting Tree window WFABRIKAM WORKS cor PEDETAIL Compar Uri Cose Tis Deon sect DENVER p FABRIKAMWORKs Consolidated EB SALES DENVER CORPORATE Corporate E SERVICE DENVER CORP DETAIL Corporate Detail amp amp amp amp 7000 000 SAN F
73. in which case the month appears in all caps The name of the month abbreviates to the first three characters in your report if you chose to round the amounts to thousands millions or billions or if you set the column width to less than nine characters Otherwise the month displays by default in the full name format PER This code prints the numeric form of the fiscal period identified for that column If the column spans multiple periods the last period in the range prints PERDESC This code prints the fiscal period description identified in the general ledger YR This code prints the column s fiscal year in numeric form EDATE This code prints the column ending date in the Short Date format as specified in the Amount amp Date Format box of the Company Information dialog box For more information about setting the short date format see Entering and Editing Company Information in your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide SDATE This code prints the column start date in the Short Date format specified as in the Amount amp Date Format box of the Company Information dialog box For more information about setting the short date format see Entering and Editing Company Information in your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide MON This code prints the abbreviated month for the selected fiscal period The abbreviation can appear in either upper or lower case edit t
74. ledger an external worksheet another row format or a specific fiscal year list box A control that contains a list from which you can select available choices Some list boxes are fixed in size on the form others scroll to provide for variable length lists still others drop down from a downward pointing arrow button appended to the right of a box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 337 lookup box A box from which you can open a zoom window to view and select possible values for the box mask A format that keeps codes or numbers uniform The mask can require a certain type of character such as a number or a letter and it can require a certain number of characters or digits Account masks are used in the general ledger to keep the format of all account numbers uniform See also date mask and numeric mask characters menu bar The main menu of the application also called the action bar in some graphical user interface environments menu command A menu selection that immediately performs an action such as sending output to a printer opening a form or calling up a dialog box so that you can specify additional information Menu commands that open dialog boxes have ellipses following the command name modifier See account modifier module A subset of a software application such as accounts receivable general ledger and inventory Multiple Document Interface MDI An interface style in which users can work
75. ledger codes but when I print a report using the row format no numbers appear on the report I see only headers and some title rows What did I do wrong There are several possible reasons for the absence of numbers on a report The most likely cause is an incorrect general ledger code The way that you check this depends on whether or not the report uses a reporting tree Report Uses Reporting Tree If the report uses a reporting tree and you use the natural account code in the row format clear the Use Reporting Tree box and regenerate the report Check the following row format numbering issues 1 2 If amounts appear in your report the problem is with the reporting tree Does the account code length used in the row format match the number of hooks used in each reporting tree unit If the account code mask and hooks cannot match with the account code structure FRx Report Designer can not return data Does the tree include detail units and do the detail units use a complete account mask with hooks amp Without detail units and hooks in the account mask Report Designer cannot connect to the row format and the general ledger Hooks are necessary for the segments that will be defined by the row format The other segments can use either numbers or wild cards If amounts do not appear check both the row format and the column layout Are the correct general ledger codes used in the row format Report Designer must have
76. not frequently perform data backups you can lose reports and other valuable FRx data Although our FRx Support group can attempt to repair a corrupted file we cannot guarantee successful file repairs Compacting the FRx System and Specification Set Databases The FRx system database contains companies registration information FRx security information users font styles and other FRx operation information Specification sets contain report components such as row formats column layouts reporting trees and catalogs When you compact the system or specification set databases Report Designer creates a new file with the same structure and removes user deleted records and other unnecessary information The remaining information is moved into a new file When you compact these files on a regular basis these files remain small in size These compacted files help reduce errors and lost data Depending on how frequently you use FRx you should compact these databases weekly or bi weekly To compact the system or specification set databases 1 Ensure all users exit Report Designer Note The user compacting the databases must have exclusive access to the FRx files On the Company menu click Select Default to display the Select Default Company dialog box Select the appropriate company and click OK On the File menu point to Compact FRx Database and then click FRx System Database Click OK to compact the database Tip If all
77. not select this check box e Allow Rollup lt 1 To allow a roll up of less than one percent select this check box If you do not select this option an entry of 25 in the Rollup cell of the reporting tree indicates that 25 of each row should be rolled up to the parent With this box selected an entry of 25 would limit the roll up to 25 one fourth of one percent For additional information see Building Reporting Trees Manually on page 205 e Disable Tree Security To allow all users to drill down into all detail levels select this check box Advanced Tab The Advanced tab contains several different advanced settings You can use the settings to e Generate an exception report with your report e Roll up periods by number or date e Change report processing priority FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 270 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab Advanced tab Change calculation priority J yd E l Figure 7 19 Catalog of Reports Window Advanced Tab Exception Report The following selections are available to you Report Missing Accounts To generate an exception report that shows the general ledger account balances that were not included in the financial report select this check box FRx determines missing accounts using the lowest and highest account numbers from the row format then displays a list of those accounts that are not in the row format but exist in the ge
78. of the greatest strengths of FRx Report Designer is its ability to summarize data from one row format to another This allows you to create detailed reports directly from the account data in your general ledger and then combine or summarize this detail in different summary reports You can create a master row format and then use it as a source for other reports Row linking reduces the setup and maintenance time for detail and summary level reports For example you can 1 Create a master row format that links to the general ledger 2 Create a new row format for a balance sheet and income statement linked to the master row format 3 Create a row format for a summarized balance sheet linked to the detail balance sheet FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 116 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Creating Summary Reports Using Row Links Figure 4 1 illustrates these general ledger detail balance sheet income statement and summary balance sheet links fk NATURAL Flow Format DETLBSIS Aow Format SUMMAYBS Few Format SS pata Link Data Link oe General Ledger rere toler eee Report Trial Balance Detail Report Summary Balance Sheet Row Format Natural DetIBSIS SummryBS Linked to General Ledger NATURAL row format Detl BSIS row format Figure 4 1 Creating Summary Reports Using Links This section contains information and instructions on e Natural Row Format e DetlBSIS Row Format e Summ
79. other users have exited Report Designer the database should successfully compact You are now ready to switch to a non demo company Return to the Company menu click Select Default to display the Select Default Company dialog box Select the company and click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 330 Appendix A FRx System Information 8 On the File menu point to Compact FRx Database and then click Current Spec Set Database 9 If you are using more than one specification set repeat steps 6 8 for each company that uses a different specification set Warning If all other users are out of Report Designer and you receive errors when compacting contact your FRx software support provider Saving the Report Catalog after Making Changes and Before Generation When you make changes to a catalog save the catalog before you generate a report If you do not save your changes Report Designer must create a new record to store these changes before passing the report to the FRx reporting engine These records accumulate over time and result in larger data files These files are more susceptible to corruption and damage Excluding the FRx SysData Directory from Network Virus Scans FRx stores reports and other information in Microsoft JET database files Virus scan programs can corrupt these database files FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 331 Appendix A 332 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide FRx Software
80. packaged together for posting to a network or Web site or for delivery via email or print e Recipients to view all documents contained in a report book using an enhanced version of the DrillDown Viewer software e Headers footers and consecutive page numbering throughout the entire book e Report generation locally or via the FRx Report Server e On demand reference guides Comprehensive User Guides in a bound format are now available on demand as a helpful reference for common tasks and troubleshooting The information has been reorganized into soft cover books which include FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide F Rx Report Server 6 7 User s Guide FRx DrillDown Viewer and FRx Report Launcher 6 7 User s Guide FRx Report Manager 6 7 User s Guide FRx WebPort 6 7 User and Administrator s Guide and FRx 6 7 Sample Reports A useful document designed to help customers determine which User Guides to obtain is included with each product shipment Additionally all User Guides are included on the FRx 6 7 product CD Improved in FRx 6 7 Microsoft Excel graphing via FRx instant OLAP software instant OLAP is now included in every edition from FRx Desktop through FRx Enterprise Additional functionality includes the ability for users to utilize the FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide viii Preface instant OLAP software output format and export a report directly int
81. peat PeR Individual Account or To Account range eam Account Set Natural No Natural No Natural No Natural No Natural No Account Code CO Account Type fe Sets Row Modifier Save As Edit Coox c cea FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 106 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes 2 From the GL Account Links dialog box click the Row Modifier arrow to display the Row Modifier dialog box Row Modifier r Account and Book Code Modifiers Account Modifier Book Code 7B je factuat r Attributes T 3 From the Row Modifier dialog box click the Account Modifier arrow and select B to override the book code in the column layout 4 Click the Book Code arrow and select the book code restriction you want to use for the row Note You only can specify one book code restriction per row 5 When you are finished click OK 6 Click OK to accept your changes and to exit the GL Account Links dialog box To add a book code restriction directly into the Link to General Ledger column 1 Open the row format that will contain the book code restriction 2 Locate the general ledger row you want to restrict 3 Click in the Link to General Ledger column for the row and type the following text into the cell substituting the correct book code for lt BookCode gt including angle brackets IB lt BookCode gt Note You only can specify one book code restriction p
82. receivable accounts payable etc in which a general ledger update has been run radio button A control that allows you to select one option among multiple options A radio button that is selected indicates the option is active A radio button that is not selected indicates the option is inactive Unlike a group of check boxes a group of radio buttons represents a mutually exclusive choice selecting one of the buttons disables the others record A database term for a collection of logically related fields that is one set of information You might think of a record as a paper form that contains information about one subject such as a customer or a purchase order Glossary report book A comprehensive book containing FRx reports and other documents that can be published for viewing in DrillDown Viewer WebPort and a Windows directory and in e mail report building blocks FRx uses three basic building blocks for a report a row format a column layout and a reporting tree Report Designer Report Designer extracts information from your general ledger and optionally combines it with information from Lotus 1 2 3 or Microsoft Excel spreadsheets Then it uses your customized report formats and your customized management reporting hierarchy to produce reports Report Launcher FRx Report Launcher allows you to generate reports previously saved in the Report Designer Catalog of Reports Report Manager FRx Rep
83. report To change the level of rounding used in your report click the Rounding of Amounts arrow and select from the following options If you select this option 1 117 691 600 48 rounds to No Rounding 1 117 691 600 48 Whole Dollars 1 117 691 600 Thousands 000 0 1 117 691 6 Whole Thousands 000 1 117 692 Millions 1 117 7 Whole Millions 1 118 Billions 1 1 Whole Billions 1 Table 7 16 Rounding Options Although rounding by definition produces rounding differences or rounding errors you can alter how and when rounding is performed to balance your need for precision and internal integrity of reports The following two rounding options will cause changes to totals and summary reports For specific examples of how these options work together see Examples of Combining Rounding Options on page 265 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 263 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab Use Rounded Values for Calculations and Totals To round the row values before totaling the report select this check box the default setting If you prefer to perform the calculations and then round the results clear this check box See Table 7 19 on page 266 and Table 7 20 on page 266 for examples of how this option affects your reports Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree If the report uses a reporting tree select this check box to round the reporting unit valu
84. reporting units and the account masks for reporting units This section contains information and instructions on the e Graphical Reporting Tree e Reporting Tree Worksheet Graphical Reporting Tree The graphical tree on the left side of the Reporting Tree window shows reporting units on tree branches that help you to easily visualize the parent child unit hierarchy relationship You can use the Reporting Tree Format menu to control the appearance of your graphical tree with different outline styles For example when you select the Tree Lines Picture and Text outline style option tree icons display to the left of each unit and indicate whether the reporting unit is a parent unit or a detail unit Tree Icon Description E This symbol indicates parent units that have units reporting to them El This symbol indicates detail units Table 6 1 Reporting Tree Icons Other outline views include or exclude indentations and connecting lines For more information on selecting an outline view for your graphical tree see Format Menu on page 193 You may also find it helpful to expand or collapse the graphical reporting tree for different views of the hierarchy For information on how to expand or collapse the graphical tree see step 4 in To view a reporting tree on page 188 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 187 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Window The following figure shows the
85. s Guide 316 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions FAQs Changing Report Descriptions Q A I want to change the description For the XXX Months Ending xxx in the Catalog of Reports but it doesn t stay changed How can I change it permanently The Company menu gives you access to these settings Use the following steps to changes these settings 1 On the Catalog of Reports window select the Company menu and click Information to display the Company Information dialog box 2 Inthe Period Description and Plural Description boxes change the text Specific Headings for Specific Column Layouts Q A I want a specific heading to print whenever I use a specific column layout for example a Three Month Budget Report How can I set the heading Use the following steps to create a specific report heading for a column layout 1 Onthe Column Layout window select the Edit menu and click Description to display the Column Layout dialog box 2 Inthe Description box type a new description for the column layout and click OK 3 Click Save 4 Open the Catalog ID window and click the Page Options tab and then the Headers Footers tab 5 Select the header position and select COL from the Codes box 6 Click Save This places the description from the column layout in the report header Balance Sheet Totalling Rounded Numbers Q A When I select the Whole Dollars rounding option my balance sheet doesn t tot
86. see Enable E mail Options on page 254 To add e mail addresses to a reporting tree 1 From the FRx Control Panel click the Reporting Trees icon to display the Open Tree dialog box Open Tree Consolidated Fabrikam Summary Departments by Region with Divisions in the Row Regional Fabrikam Tree Regional Fabrikam Tree Regional Fabrikam Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrikam Tree using Sub Levels Regional Fabrikam Tree after reorganization Functional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels Regional Fabrikam Tree w Additional Text 2 Select a reporting tree FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 217 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Adding Text and E mail Links to a Reporting Tree 3 Click OK to display the reporting tree in the Reporting Tree window f FABRIKAM WORKS CORPORATE Ue DENVER E SALES DENVER E SERVICE DENVER SAN FRANCISCO EB SALES SF B SERVICE SF 4 On the graphical tree select a reporting unit The corresponding row in the worksheet to the right becomes highlighted 5 Inthe worksheet scroll to the right to display the Security E Mail column 6 Inthe selected reporting unit row click the Security E Mail arrow to display the Tree Unit Security and E mail dialog box Tree Security and E mail 7 To include lower level child reporting units in the e mail recipient s view of the report select the Add to children check box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide
87. system administrators who set up and administer Report Designer and or maintain the currency translation rates database FRx DrillDown Viewer and FRx Report Launcher 6 7 Users Guide This guide helps users display print and export FRx financial reports to the FRx DrillDown Viewer and launch reports from the FRx Report Launcher FRx Report Server 6 7 User s Guide This guide helps users manage reports running on FRx Report Server and use the schedule to create revise and manage report schedules and exceptions FRx Report Manager 6 7 User s Guide This guide helps users generate display print subscribe to export save and send reports that were created and saved using the Report Designer FRx WebPort 6 7 User and Administrator s Guide This guide helps authorized users send FRx report output to the FRx WebPort repository and view reports via a Web browser It also helps WebPort administrators manage report files and folders and control user access to WebPort FRx 6 7 Sample Reports This guide provides users with examples of key reports using a demonstration database and Report Designer Other Documentation Some components of the FRx product include online help that is installed with that component The following online help volumes are available FRx Report Designer Online Help FRx DrillDown Viewer Online Help FRx Report Launcher Online Help FRx Report Server Online Help FRx Report Manager On
88. that defines how monetary amounts are shown on reports The mask controls the symbols and placement of decimals and thousands separators as well as the presence or absence of currency symbols and leading trailing zeros See also numeric mask characters full account code An account code defined in the general ledger The fully qualified account includes the natural segment combined with the sub segments such as departments locations and divisions functional currency The primary currency in which a company typically transacts business also known as home currency or base currency See base currency general ledger A ledger of accounts that are reported in the financial statements Posting transactions updates the accounts in the general ledger general ledger index G32 The general ledger index or G32 is a file extension for index files created and maintained by FRx There is one G32 file maintained per FRx company and it is located in the FRx SYSDATA directory This file contains basic information about a company such as the account mask account segmentation and calendar setup It also may contain the chart of accounts and unposted transactions depending on the accounting system and company setup graphical user interface GUI A computer application screen interface that uses icons and pictures to represent objects or selection choices historic rate The currency exchange rate that was current when the activi
89. that does not exist FRx will create the new folder in the WebPort e Report Name To name the report as it will display in the WebPort type the report name in this box The Catalog ID is used as the report name by default FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 256 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Page Options Tab Page Options Tab Page Options tab In this tab portion of the Catalog of Reports Window the Page Setup tab is active by default Within the Page Options tab are two sub tabs the Page Setup tab and the Headers Footers tab You can use these tabs to change your report page formatting Figure 7 13 Catalog of Reports Window Page Setup Tab Page Setup Tab The Page Setup tab contains your report page setup options These options are described below Margins The Left Right Top and Bottom Margins boxes display the report page margins The default margin value is 75 To change the margins select the margin value and enter the new value Orientation This section displays the report page orientation To change the orientation select one of the following options e Portrait Displays the report vertically on the page e Landscape Displays the report horizontally on the page Scaling This option displays the percentage of scaling in a report To change the scaling select one of the following options e Reduce Enlarge to Changes the report size to the percentage yo
90. the Two Months Ending February 28 2003 Actual Budget Actual Budget Current Current YTD YTD Sales 556 272 00 486 935 55 1 103 330 00 956 676 22 usfr pt_SalesRevenueGross usfi pt_SalesRevenueGrossServices Figure 8 1 XBRL Element Tags Displayed in DrillDown Viewer FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 297 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL XBRL Definitions XBRL Definitions XBRL Term Definition XBRL Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL is an open specification that uses XML based data tags to describe financial statements for both public and private companies XBRL Taxonomy Document An XBRL taxonomy document is an XML Schema file that describes a set of concepts used in preparing an XBRL instance document A taxonomy document can be either an XBRL taxonomy such as US GAAP CI or a custom taxonomy created in conformance with XBRL specifications Custom taxonomies are used to extend the XBRL taxonomies to address company and or industry specific items not addressed in the XBRL taxonomies Taxonomy The XBRL taxonomy is a classification system for business and financial reporting data elements XBRL taxonomies can be regarded as extensions of XML Schema Instance Documents Instance documents contain data An XBRL instance document contains accounting financial or other business related data for example a financial statement issued by a company expre
91. the accounts or account sets in your general ledger 3 Inthe Search box type the first digits of an account code Salary Expense Officers Compensation Bonuses Hourly Pay Overtime Pay Social Security Tax Medicare Tax ax SUTA Tax Workers Compe 4 Select an account and click OK 5 When you are finished creating the link click OK If you have specific questions about any option or box in the GL Account Links dialog box please review the following sections To zoom on an account segment in a row format 1 From a row format double click the Link to General Ledger cell 2 Click the Account Code option FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 96 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes 3 Double click the Acct Segment cell to display the Select a Segment for zooming dialog box Select a Segment for zooming Full Account Natural Segment Location Division Department 4 Inthe Select a Segment for zooming dialog box select an account segment and click OK 5 Double click a cell in the From Account range or Individual Account or Account Set column to display the Select General Ledger Account dialog box The displayed list is filtered by the account segment you specified 6 Inthe From Account range or Individual Account or Account Set cell type or select an account and click OK 7 Click OK to return to the Row Format window Using Wildcards and Ranges Entering Wildcards When
92. the additional text row reporting unit 2 Click the Related Rates Rows Unit arrow to open the Select Tree for Lookup dialog box 3 Double click the reporting tree you want to use 4 When the Select a Reporting Unit for Restriction dialog box appears double click the reporting unit to which the row is to be restricted Fmt Code Column Format codes control the content of a row Every row is interpreted as a general ledger detail row unless a code is present in the Fmt Code column Double click the Fmt Code column to display a list of available codes TOT This code allows you to use simple mathematical operands or between amounts or row codes that you specify in the Related Rates Rows Unit column For more information about this format code see Totaling and Calculations on page 86 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 73 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats CAL This code allows you to use complex mathematical operands and IF THEN ELSE statements between amounts or row codes that you specify in the Related Rates Rows Unit column For more information on calculations see Formula Totaling CAL on page 86 DES The DES code inserts headings and blank lines in reports For example row 95 in the following figure uses the DES code to insert a blank line Row 98 uses DES to insert the description Revenue Note O If a report contains title rows and undersco
93. the list Restrict the additional text to a specific reporting unit 1 Select the Related Rates Rows Unit cell of the additional text row Click the Related Rates Rows Unit arrow to open the Select Tree for Lookup dialog box Double click the reporting tree you want to use When the Select a Reporting Unit for Restriction dialog box appears double click the reporting unit to which the row is to be restricted 3 On the File menu click Save to save the row format FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 72 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats 4 Type UNITT substituting the unit text number for Note For example UNITT4 specifies the fourth additional text entry for the reporting unit from Column Z of the tree A B D E H Row Description Fmt Related Norm Link to Hel oe l PeT a Herera kadga 50 100 DES Type 2 LNE DES UNIT UNIT FABRIKAM WORKS INC DENVER SALES DENVER Cash BCDEHI 117 Payables C BCDEH 2 2209 Type 1 LNE 220 Net Sales C 412 427 4109 Cost of Goods Sold 457 4509 Type 1 LNE 310 Gross Profit TOT 310 340 c Operating Expenses 5000 TO 5400 Provision for Taxes 5500 5 Select from the following options To Do this Apply a font style to the Click the Font Style arrow and select a additional text font style from the list Restrict the additional 1 Select the Related Rates Rows Unit text to a specific cell of
94. to replace all occurrences of the text FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 61 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Row Format Menu Functions Renumber Rows This command allows you to define starting row codes and a number by which to increment the row codes that follow Blank row codes and label row codes are not affected by renumbering Renumber Rows Starting at row code fi 00 Increment rows by Figure 3 3 Renumber Rows Dialog Box Description Ctrl D This opens a dialog box where you can edit a row format description Row Format Specification set BalSheet Description Detailed Balance Sheet Figure 3 4 Row Format Dialog Box The Name and Specification set boxes are display only You cannot access or change them Enter the text you want to describe the row format in the Description box you can use upper and lower case letters numbers and spaces Note o You must save the row format in order to save the description change Delete Row To delete a row 1 Click the gray box to the left of the row code to be deleted 2 Select the Delete Row command To delete one or more consecutive rows 1 Highlight the rows gray boxes 2 Select the Delete Row command A window asks you to confirm the deletion Insert Row To insert a row 1 Click the gray box to the left of the row code of the row following where you want the new row 2 Select the Insert Row command FRx Report Designer 6
95. to year comparative reports and the general ledger account coding changes from one year to the next Report Designer uses this link for that fiscal year as well as any earlier years unless there is already a link for an earlier year This section contains information and instructions on e Creating Row Formatting Links e Linking Rows to a Summary Report FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 121 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Establishing Links Creating Row Formatting Links To create links 1 From the FRx Control Panel open a row format or select a new one 1 FRx Desktop Row Untitled 1 DER File Edit Format Company Link Options Admin Window Help 3X Qema ee eE Defaut CU 2 On the Link menu click Open Link Window to display the Links dialog box Note You can also open the Links dialog box by clicking the Link Form icon or double clicking the Link to General Ledger column heading 3 Click the Link Type arrow and select one of the following links e General Ledger Link Type G e Row Format Link Type R e External Worksheet for example Lotus 1 2 3 or Microsoft Excel Link Type W Note Report Designer can import Microsoft Excel xls files and Lotus wks wk1 or wk3 files e GL WorkSheet Link Type B e XBRL Taxonomy Files Link Type X 4 Inthe Link Name box accept the name assigned by Report Designer or type another name to identify t
96. unit After you complete the reporting tree structure you can verify that the parent units have been selected for each child using the Reporting Units dialog box 1 Inthe Reporting Tree window select a child unit 2 Doone of the following to display the Reporting Units dialog box e Press the F8 key e Click the Tree Form icon e On the Tree menu click View Form 3 Inthe Parent Unit box view the parent unit for the child unit FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 212 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Automatically Building Reporting Trees Automatically Before you begin make sure that you have reviewed the entire Understanding Building Reporting Trees topic including the information on building trees automatically and the information on building trees manually See Understanding Building Reporting Trees on page 197 After you create a new reporting tree in the Reporting Tree window you can add reporting units to the reporting tree automatically using the Add Reporting Units from Chart of Account dialog box You can use this dialog box to e Add reporting units from the Chart of Accounts e Define the account mask e Define other reporting unit hierachies and ranges You can also refine or edit a reporting tree that you have built automatically using the Reporting Units dialog box or the Reporting Tree worksheet See Building Reporting Trees Manually on page 205 The follo
97. units report to one or more higher level units In a traditional organization chart the lower units boxes on the chart typically report up to increasingly higher units FRx uses the term reporting unit for each of the boxes in an organizational chart A reporting unit can be an individual department from the general ledger or it can be a higher level summary unit that combines information from other reporting units Each reporting unit represents an individual report that contains rows from a row format and columns from a column layout The reporting tree contains a group of reporting units FRx allows you to easily add or change reporting units without requiring a change to the general ledger This section contains information and instructions on e Reporting Unit Structure e Multiple Reporting Trees e Account Masks e Account Mask Structure and Segments Reporting Unit Structure Reporting units are categorized as detail units which draw information directly from the general ledger or from an external worksheet and summary units which summarize data from lower level units An FRx reporting tree consists of parent reporting units and child reporting units Parent reporting units are summary units that pull summarized information from the detail units Summary units can be both a detail unit and a summary unit that is they can draw information from lower units as well as draw directly from the general ledger or an exte
98. used for rows that show non monetary assets such as fixed assets inventory or capital stock When you use the CCHIST row code you must also select a Historical Rate ID as the related rate in Column D of the row CCAVG This code tells FRx to perform currency conversion using the average exchange rate from the currency translation table The average rate is commonly used for income rows in the report When you use the CCAVG row code you must also select an average type AVGDAILY AVGWEEKLY or AVGMONTHLY as the related rate in Column D of the row CCSPOT This code tells FRx to perform currency translation using the spot current exchange rate from the currency translation table The spot rate is commonly used for cash accounts FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 79 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats CCX This code suppresses any currency conversion for this row and remains in effect until a different currency code is encountered Related Rates Rows Unit Column This column can e Tell FRx that a description or underline row is linked to an amount row Consequently the title and underscore prints only when the related amount does For more information see Relating a Format Row to an Amount Row on page 81 e Define the rows to include in a calculation when using a TOT or CAL format code For more information see Totaling and Calculations on page 86 e Restrict a row to a specific rep
99. with Divisions in the Row FabrikamConsol Regional Fabrikam Tree FbrkmDynaGL Regional Fabrikam Tree FbrkmDynaw KS Regional Fabrikam Tree using WKS Links Fbrkmwrk Regional Fabrikam Tree using Sub Levels ForkmwrkAReOrg Regional Fabrikam Tree after reorganization allies Functional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels Formatting Tips Regional Fabrikam Tree w Additional Text Select a tree from the list and c lick OK to display it in the Reporting Tree window Pre cona ea aks CORPORATE LE CORP DETAIL Company Unit Code Title Description Acct Mask DENVER FABRIKAM WORKs Consolidated B DENVER ADMIN CORPORATE Corporate SALES DENVER CORP DETAIL Corporate Detail amp amp t amp 2000 000 D SENI E DENVER DENVER Denver E SALES SF DENVER ADMIN Denver Administration amp amp amp amp 1000 000 E SERVICE SF 6 SALES DENVER Sales Division Denver Rebebeb 1100 77 SERVICE DDENVER Service Division Denver Bbebeb 1 200 27 SAN FRANCISCO San Francisco SALES SF Sales Division San Francisco Rhee 21 00 79 SERVICE SF Service Division San Francisco amp bb amp 2200 77 Graphical Reporting Tree Worksheet Reporting Tree The tree displays showing the parent and child reporting units in a graphical reporting tree on the left and in a worksheet reporting tree on the right On the graphical tree to the left view the hierarchy relationship of the parent and child reporting units To expand and collapse a branch of the tree do one of the fo
100. you did not select the Transaction Rounding option To resolve the error in this scenario 1 2 3 4 5 Verify that none of the solutions mentioned above resolve the error message Open the catalog for the problematic report Click the Report Options tab and then click the Acct Tran Detail tab Select the Transaction Rounding check box Re generate the report FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 318 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions FAQs Restore a Deleted or Overwritten Row Column or Tree To restore a deleted or overwritten row column or tree 1 2 on O A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Have all users close the Report Designer and the FRx Report Launcher On the Company menu click Specification Sets to display the Specification Sets dialog box Note the location of the Specification Set where the building block is stored If you have done extensive report design for example modifying existing reports or creating new one since your last backup and need to preserve this work proceed to step 5 Otherwise skip to Step 6 Note Deciding to restore the file from backup without completing step 5 eliminates any changes or new reports created since the backup You could have to re create some changes and reports that occurred after the backup Rename the file referenced in the path you noted in step 3 Restore the f32 file from your last backup Launch the Report Designer On the
101. you enter either natural or full account codes into the GL Account Links dialog box you can place a wildcard which is the question mark symbol in any position of the account code FRx pulls all account codes for the defined numbers without regard for the wildcard numbers For example if the row format contains only the natural segments assuming a four character natural code entering 6 in a row instructs FRx to include all accounts whose natural code begins with a 6 Note e You only add hooks amp in row formats when you are using the Add Rows from Chart of Accounts feature For more information see Building a Row Format on page 67 Entering an Account Range If you want a row to contain amounts from a range of general ledger accounts you can enter an account range To enter an account range 1 Double click the Link to General Ledger column 2 Enter the beginning account number in the From Account range or Individual Account or Account Set cell of the GL Account Links dialog box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 97 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes 3 Enter the ending account number in the To Account range box The entry that appears in the Formula box at the top of the GL Account Links dialog box might look like this for example 6100 TO 6900 This tells FRx to pull data from account 6100 through account 6900 inclusively into the row amount Entering Ranges Usi
102. 002 XBRL is intended to provide an XML based framework that the global business information community will use to create exchange and analyze financial reporting information including regulatory filings such as annual and quarterly financial statements general ledger information and audit schedules XBRL is freely licensed and facilitates the automatic exchange and reliable extraction of financial information among various software applications and technologies including the Internet With the 6 7 release of Report Designer you can include XBRL element tags in the row format by linking to the version 2 0 XBRL taxonomy us gaap ci 2003 07 07 xsd or a custom taxonomy that complies with the XBRL version 2 0 standard and selecting the appropriate XBRL element tag for GL Link CAL and TOT type rows Only rows that are tagged with an XBRL element tag will be passed into the XBRL instance document If the row description is blank FRx uses the XBRL element label from the taxonomy as the description In the column layout the XBRL_TAG column type allows the XBRL element tags found in the row format to be presented in a column of the FRx DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML frd output file See Figure 8 1 on page 297 for an example There are no changes to the FRx reporting tree building block however for reports that yield data based on reporting trees selecting XBRL output type will create separate instance documents for each selected reporting u
103. 075 781 Income Tsx Expense 30 399 230 365 Net Income 114 878 __ 845 416 4 To view additional information you can do the following To View Do this A report row broken out by Double click a report row reporting units from the current reporting unit Other reporting units from the On the reporting tree double click a the reporting tree reporting unit Note o See FRx DrillDown Viewer and FRx Report Launcher 6 7 User 5 Guide for information about viewing printing and exporting your reports using the DrillDown Viewer FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 54 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Completing Your Setup Completing Your Setup Congratulations You know how to create report in the Report Designer Now you can finish editing your row format or create a new row format or reporting tree as necessary For more information see the following chapters and guides For information See about Row formats Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Linking Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Column layouts Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Reporting trees Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reports Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Companies FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide international formats FRx Administration F Rx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator 5 Guid
104. 1 420 910 1660 1 420 1720 cs G Norm Print Column Link to Ctr General Ledger 3100 C 3110 C 4100 TO 7000 4109 4509 c 3000 3300 Figure 9 3 Row Format Window Showing Average and Historic Rate Codes FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 305 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports Currency Translation Adjustments A currency translation adjustment is needed whenever some balances are converted at a spot rate and others are converted at an historic or average rate In row 1720 of Figure 9 3 the formula in the currency translation adjustment row will correct out of balance conditions between assets and liabilities and equity The formula subtracts the total of Net Fixed Asset in row 910 shown in Figure 9 2 from sum of Stockholders Equity in row 1660 and Total Liabilities in row 1420 Using Currency Translation in the Column Layout You can include international currency amounts in FRx reports by specifying the currency code in your column layout The GL amounts you display in the report could be shown in the original transaction currency or a converted currency depending on how international currency transactions are recorded in your general ledger When DAX Currency Translation is active the Currency Display detail row in the Column Layout can be used in two ways e In GL type columns use Currency Display detail row to specify whether th
105. 13 Record Control Boxes seis cis scceeievhs eectect i daenetectane NG 18 Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus ccceeeceeeeeneeeeeeteenneeees 18 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide i Contents Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer seceeees 21 Creating a COMPANY cece ceeeeee eee eeeeeee eee eeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseenaeeeeseeaas 22 Creating a Sample Report srrisrnisroiadiii aa a aE tes radars 25 Building a Row Format from the Chart of Accounts cc cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 26 Modifying a Row Format caiicc eiisieleds ceadiecel EAE 28 Revenue ROWS ookin e a a 28 Operating Expenses ROWS cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasecaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 35 INCOME ROWS erbin ai a cavanadaievavdedlavdiavedduniasevaadcdedst deadandaaaabiecaes 38 Saving Your Row Format File ccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeesesencaeeeeeeeaas 42 Creating a Column Layout 2 caciccceeeiiccsetidieecdeeeeiddasdeiiieassernevineineiedees Aeead ed eneieeeet 43 Working with Reporting Trees cceeeeceeceeeeeeene eee ee eecneeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 46 VIEWING aM EXIStING TOC 2 2 2 2 4ce020 esas ected E 46 Creating a New Reporting Tree cccccccceeesnecceseeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeseeaeeeeseeeaceeeeeteeeneeentees 47 Creating a New Catalog ID eitis E ER ANAE 49 Generating an
106. 2 mdb file directly but configuration and setup selections you make from within the Report Designer are stored in this file and determine how FRx functions If the error message is caused by security settings inside the FRxSys32 mdb file use the following steps to remove the error 1 Ask all other users to close Report Designer and Report Launcher 2 On the Report Designer Admin menu click Organization to display the Organization Information dialog box 3 Click the FRx Security button to display the FRx Security Information dialog box 4 Do one of the following If Then The Use FRx Security Clear it check box is selected The Use FRx Security 1 Select it check box is not 2 Click OK selected 5 Click OK to close the Organization Information dialog box 6 Repeat steps 2 5 The Use FRx Security check box should now be in its original state You have effectively toggled the security between on off or off on 7 Close Report Designer and launch it again 8 Then select the problematic company as the default The error should now be resolved for you Incorrect Regional Settings If incorrect regional settings is causing the error message change the Windows Regional Settings on the problematic workstation Regional settings should match the settings used on functional workstations FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 323 Appendix A FRx System Information FRx System Information This section con
107. 3 230911 _235529 240240 245045 249045 254944 260043 265244 2861147 9 10 Cost of Goods Sold 123700 126174 128697 131271 _133897 136575 139306 142092 144934 147833 _150790 153805 1659075 11 Gross Profit 89626 91419 93247 95112 97014 98954 100934 102953 105011 107111 109253 111439 1202073 12 13 Salary Expense 35800 36516 35000 35000 35000 35000 35000 3600o 3eooo seooo seooo seooo 427316 14 Commissions Expense 13972 14251 12000 12000 12000 12000 12000 13000 13000 13000 13000 13000 153223 15 Total Compensation 49772 50767 47000 47000 47000 47000 4700o 49000 49000 49000 49000 49000 580539 16 17 Depreciation 2355 2402 2450 2499 2549 2600 2652 2705 2759 2814 2871 2928 31584 18 Office Expense 1782 1818 1854 1891 1929 1967 2007 2047 2088 2130 2172 2216 23901 19 Supplies 350 357 364 371 379 386 394 402 410 418 427 435 4693 20 Maintenance 550 561 572 584 595 607 619 632 644 657 670 684 7375 21 Rent 4675 4769 4864 4961 5060 5162 5265 5370 5478 5587 5699 5813 62703 22 Travel 3700 3774 3849 3926 4005 4085 4167 4250 4335 4422 4510 4600 49623 23 Advertising 3666 3739 3814 3890 3968 4048 4129 4211 4295 4381 4469 4558 49168 24 Total Other G amp A 17078 17420 17767 18122 18485 18855 19233 19617 20009 20409 20818 21234 229047 25 26 Before Tax Income 22776 23231 23696 24170 24653 25146 25649 26162 26686 27219 27764 28320 305472
108. 32 Financial amp Transaction option 50 232 Financial Report option 50 232 Find button record control box 18 Find command 16 192 Find dialog box 61 Find What box 17 61 fiscal year assigning in the column layout 151 column header codes 144 linking year to year 121 using the base 151 Fmt Code selecting 73 Font Style Name box 63 260 Font Styles command 226 Font Styles dialog box 63 font styles creating and editing 260 Format Name box 239 240 242 formatting amounts display 82 international 209 negative values 157 262 row by row 90 combined worksheet link 129 fonts and shading See font styles creating and editing reports 261 row formats Fmt Codes 73 placing values in columns 83 related rows 81 Formatting tab 236 261 FRD output type for XBRL reports 297 Freeze at Description command 196 Index frequently 314 frequently asked questions incomplete report output 314 From Account range or Individual Account or Account Set cell 96 97 From Acct box 214 FRx Company Code box 22 FRx instant OLAP Microsoft Server Cube option 247 FRx Reporting Engine status window 273 full account code combining with natural 95 entering in row format 95 restricting row to reporting unit 81 Functional Currency box 23 G general ledger connecting to the reporting tree 181 displaying in the column layout 148 entering codes in the row format 94 links creating GL worksheet link 124 using combined GL worksheet 128 General Ledger Y
109. 43 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide vi FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Preface Who Should Read this Guide The purpose of this guide is to explain the functions features and capabilities of Microsoft Business Solutions for Analytics FRx The guide includes e General information about the logic and workings of FRx Report Designer to draw financial data from your general ledger e Step by step instructions for building reports using various Report Designer features Technical reference information that explains the purpose function and output result for every option in the product This guide is written for all users of Report Designer who create or run FRx financial reports How this Guide is Organized This guide is organized into the following chapters e Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer e Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer e Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats e Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information e Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts e Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree e Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports e Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL e Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide vii Preface What s New in Report Designer 6 7 This version of the software includes the following new features
110. 47 _ 3 108 33 529 18 Office Expense 1841 1878 1915 1954 1993 2033 2073 2115 2157 2200 2 244 _ 2 289 24 692 19 Supplies 315 321 328 334 341 348 355 362 369 376 384 392 4 225 20 Maintainence 620 632 645 658 671 685 698 712 726 741 756 77 8 315 21 Rent 4500 4590 4682 4775 4871 4968 5o6e8 5169 5 272 5378 5 485 5 595 60 353 22 Travel 4o75 4157 4240 4324 aa aaoo 4 589 4681 4775 4870 4967 _ 5 067 54 655 23 Advertising 3 359 3 426 3495 3 565 3636 3709 3 783 3 858 3 936 4014 4095 4 176 45 052 24 Total Other G amp A 17 210 17 554 17 906 18 263 18 629 19 1002 19 381 19 769 20 164 20 567 20 978 21 398 230 821 25 26 Before Tax Income 11 539 11 770 12005 12 245 12490 12 740 12 995 13 255 13 520 13 790 14 066 14 347 143 223 Figure 4 11 Budget Forecast for San Francisco A B c D E F G H J K L M N 1 Fabrikam Works Inc 2 Budget Forecast Denver 3 4 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Total 5 Sales 230008 234608 239300 244086 248968 253947 259026 264207 269491 274881 280378 285986 3084886 6 Sales Returns 3850 3927 4006 4o8e 4167 4251 4336 4422 4511 4601 4693 4787 _ 51637 7 Sales Discounts 12832 _ 13089 13350 _ 13617 _ 13890 _ 14168 _ 14454 _ 14740 _ 15035 _ 15335 _ 15642 _ 15955 172104 8 Total Sales 213326 217593 221944 22638
111. 599 13200 3 2 520 H SALES Net Sales 4100 _ GROSS_MARGIN Gross Margin CAL SALES 720 E 640 Specific Column Caluclation CAL B SALES D SALES J680 Specific Column Caluclation CAL A GROSS_MARGIN A SALES 720 Column Calculation CAL GROSS_MARGIN SALES _ 760 Figure 3 16 Calculations in Row Format Window Modifying a Number in Selected Columns The CAL format can be very helpful when you need to modify a number in one column of a particular row but not affect other columns in the report The following figure illustrates calculations that place the row calculation results into specific report columns e To perform a calculation on all report GL columns you do not need to enter any column assignment For example if you enter 130 75 FRx multiplies each column in row 130 by 75 and places the result in the current row See row 190 e To restrict a formula to certain columns enter the column letter followed by an equal sign and the formula If you enter B 130 75 the calculation is performed only on column B as shown in row 220 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 87 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Totaling and Calculations e You can specify multiple columns as shown in row 250 When you use with specific column placement the relates to the restricting column Row 250 translates to the following A A100 A130 75 B B100 B130 75 C C100 C130 75 e You can enter ranges as shown in row 280
112. 6 and so on To add a single day 1 Type the day of the fiscal period in the Start Date cell For example 12 Using a single day includes only the transactions entered on that date in this column For example the day defined in the previous step includes only day 12 of the fiscal period To add a range of days 1 Type the beginning day of the fiscal period range in the Start Date cell For example 12 2 Type the ending day of the fiscal period range in the End Date cell For example 18 Using a day range includes all the transactions entered during this range in this column For example the day range defined in the previous steps begins 12 days and ends 18 days into the fiscal period Report Designer uses the month and year specified in the Fiscal Year and Period Code cells for the column FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 171 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Full Date You can type a date or a date range We recommend that you key in the date in the MM DD YYYY format However you also can type the date in the MM DD YY format If you type a two digit year value that is greater than 30 Report Designer assigns it a 1900 century date If you type a year value that is less than or equal to 30 Report Designer assigns it a 2000 century date To enter a single date Type a start date in the Start Date cell for example 03 04 2002 Using a single date includes only the transactions entered on that
113. 7 Taxonomy 298 text mixing with codes in column header 146 Title Desc box 208 toolbar Catalog of Reports 229 main 12 reporting tree 196 row format 65 TOT row format code 74 86 Total Assets row box 112 Total Liabilities amp Equity row box 112 totaling point and click 92 using in row formats 86 totals suppressing in column 164 transaction detail reports available codes 150 creating debit credit 175 customizing 173 including multiple periods 174 options 267 year to date 175 Transaction Only option 50 232 Transaction Rounding option 269 Tree Form button 134 212 Tree Lines and Text command 193 Tree Lines Picture and Text command 193 194 Tree Options tab 236 269 Tree Unit Security and E mail dialog box 218 C Jnit Code box 207 nits for Tree dialog box 242 nposted transactions including in reports 164 se Signs on Percentages option 262 se For Negative Numbers option 262 se Account Filter option 268 se Dates option 239 240 242 qaqcaqcg cac 350 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide G Jse Period Numbers option 239 240 242 Jse Posted Balances Only option 50 233 se Reporting Tree box 209 se Reporting Tree option 270 se Rounded Values for Calculations and Totals ption 264 266 se Row Format s and Worksheet Links from Re porting Tree box 238 V value placement method column placement 126 View Form command 195 W Web Publishing tab 243 255 width assigning column 157 wildcards en
114. 7 User s Guide 204 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Manually Building Reporting Trees Manually You can build the reporting tree manually in the Reporting Tree worksheet as shown below Or you can build a reporting tree manually using the Reporting Units dialog box See To build a reporting tree using the Reporting Units dialog box on page 206 You can also use the Reporting Units dialog box or the worksheet in the Reporting Tree window to refine or edit an existing reporting tree This section contains information and instructions on Building a Reporting Tree with the Reporting Tree Worksheet Building a Reporting Tree with the Reporting Units Dialog Box Defining Parent Child Relationships Verifying a Unit s Parent Unit Building a Reporting Tree with the Reporting Tree Worksheet To build a reporting tree using the Reporting Tree worksheet 1 Do one of the following If you are Do this Building a new reporting tree On the FRx File menu point to New and click Tree to display a blank Reporting Tree window Refining or editing an existing 1 Do one of the following to display the Open reporting tree Tree dialog box e From the FRx Control Panel click the Reporting Trees icon e On the File menu point to Open and click Tree 2 Select a tree from the list to display it in the Reporting Tree window In the worksheet on the right of the Reporting Tree window ent
115. 735 10 Retail 25 000 27 589 28 973 28 141 29 552 28 704 30 144 29 278 30 746 29 863 31 361 30 460 349 811 11 Total Units 68 000 72 309 76 696 73 755 78 230 75 230 79 795 76 735 81 390 78 270 83 018 79 835 923 263 12 13 Year to Date 14 15 Units Sold 16 Denver 17 Wholesale 9 000 18 500 29 975 39 665 51 370 61 253 73 192 83 273 95 451 105 734 118 155 128 644 128 644 18 Retail 23 000 47 250 72 250 96 985 122 485 147 715 173 725 199 459 225 989 252 238 279 299 306 073 306 073 19 San Francisco 20 Wholesale 11 000 21 970 33 218 44 407 55 880 67 294 78 996 90 637 102 574 114 448 126 623 138 735 138 735 21 Retail 25 000 52 589 81 562 109 703 139 255 167 959 198 102 227 380 258 126 287 990 319 351 349 811 349 811 22 Total Units 68 000 140 309 217 005 290 760 368 990 444 220 524 015 600 750 682 140 760 410 843 428 923 263 923 263 Figure 4 9 Worksheet with Monthly Statistics Row 430 in Figure 4 10 shows how to use the CPO switch to link the columns from the worksheet Description gt Fmt Code 130 CURRENT PERIOD ACTIVITY DES 220 Gross Sales 250 Returns amp Discounts 280 Sales 310 Cost of Goods Sold 340 370 Gross Profit J400 430 Total Units Sold 490 Gross Profit Unit Sold BxC DES TOT TOT DES DES CAL Related z l c Link to Norm Pri
116. 83 292 161 681 729 296 698 385 031 749 269 9 00 Operating Expenses 167 944 169 374 170 822 508 140 277 883 230 257 450 754 12 70 Provision for Taxes 6 910 7 012 7 111 21 033 4 659 16 374 79 873 73 70 Other Income Expenses 352 339 325 1 016 1 940 924 2 688 62 20 Net Income 18 679 18 958 113 903 151 540 12 216 139 324 215 954 29 80 Figure 3 10 Sample Report with Examples of Line Type BXB and BXC These codes indicate the beginning and end of a box FRx draws a box around the report rows that begin with the BXB row and end with the BXC row REM This code indicates that the row is a remark row only and is not printed on the report Use REM in the row format to explain your formatting techniques SORT and ASORT These codes sort expenses or revenues sequence an actual or budget variance report by the largest variance or sort the row descriptions alphabetically The SORT code sorts the report in ascending or descending order based on the value in a selected column To use the SORT code 1 Select the SORT format code FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 77 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats 2 Enter the range of rows to be sorted in the Related Rates Rows Unit column 3 Enter the column letter to be used for the sort in the Column column The report is sorted in ascending order by default For descending order enter a negative sign before the column letter
117. AL and TOT type rows Only the rows that are tagged with an XBRL element tag will be passed into the instance document so it is important to tag all necessary rows If the Description cell for the row is blank the description will be filled in with the XBRL element tag label from the taxonomy however if the Description is already populated it will remain as is Double clicking the Link to XBRL Taxonomy cell in the row opens the XBRL Element Tag zoom dialog box The taxonomy displays in a tree that shows both the label for the XBRL element and the XBRL element tag Click the expansion symbol to expand nodes of the taxonomy tree and drill down to the appropriate XBRL element tag As you move from row to row within the XBRL Link column the tree will re zoom to the last node highlighted before the tree was closed so you can select the next tag without having to re drill in the taxonomy tree The row format will allow only one XBRL element tag per GL Link CAL and TOT row FRx will generate a message if you attempt to enter more than one tag in a row You can select to overwrite the existing tag with the new tag or cancel the new tag entry Note To use an XBRL element tag in a CAL or TOT row select the CAL or TOT format code Fmt Code first then add the XBRL element tag FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 290 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Including XBRL Elements in the Row To add XBRL ele
118. CUR column FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 174 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Customizing Transaction Detail Reports Creating Year to Date Transaction Detail Reports To run a transaction detail report for the entire year type 1 TO BASE in the Period Code cell of the CUR column and BASE in the YTD column as shown in the following example E E ee ee ee ee a aaa GLAcct Apply Date DociD Activity Balance Sy ACCT TAPL GL ACTUAL BASE BASE YTD Note Transaction reports spanning multiple fiscal years are not supported for most GL interfaces Creating Debit Credit Reports To create reports that categorize transactions by debit and credit you must have two CUR columns for the debits and credits and a YTD column for the period totals Enter the debit code DR in the Column Restriction cell of one of the CUR columns and the credit code CR in the other See the following example _ Column Headers a Be c F i abs Batch Apply Date Beg Balance Debits Credits Type GL Calc ete DESC TBAT ode Attribute Categor ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL ea BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE CUR BB CUR CUR YTD FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 175 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Customizing Transaction Detail Reports As with other transaction reports 1f you want to display details for multiple periods enter a range for example 1 TO BASE in the Period Code cell Note e Using
119. Column Layouts Customizing Transaction Detail Reports Adding the OLAP Description to the Column Layout If you intend to send report output to an OLAP cube using FRx Instant OLAP you need to include an OLAP Description in the Column Layout The OLAP Description consists of the Period Year Description and the Book Code Description These description elements along with the row format description and the reporting unit identify a unique data cell in the OLAP cube The OLAP Description row is available only for column types GL WKS or CALC You can type directly into the OLAP Description cell in the Column Layout or you can double click in the cell and type into the OLAP Descriptions dialog box The OLAP Descriptions dialog box is the recommended entry method You do not need to enter an OLAP description unless you are sending report output to an OLAP cube To add the OLAP Description to column layouts 1 From the Column Layout window scroll down to the OLAP Description row 2 For column types GL CALC or WKS double click the column cell in the OLAP Descriptions row to display the OLAP Descriptions dialog box OLAP Descriptions Period Year Description Book Code Description Corel Note If you try to type an OLAP description into a column type other than GL CALC or WKS the program displays an error message and clears the OLAP Description cell 3 Inthe Period Year Description box type your period year descrip
120. Company menu click Specification Sets to display the Specification Sets dialog box Click Export to display the Export Selection dialog box Tabs for Catalogs Rows Columns and Trees are displayed Select the building blocks you need to restore Click Export Note the location of the export tdb file Close the Report Designer Delete the restored f32 file Return the file name changed in step 5 back to its original name Launch Report Designer On the Company menu click Specification Sets to display the Specification Sets dialog box Click Import to import the deleted or overwritten building blocks Ifa system prompt asks if you would like to overwrite the building block with the same name click Yes Note Use caution when restoring building blocks from backup Make sure to select the correct catalogs rows columns and trees FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 319 Appendix A Error Messages Error Messages Building Block User Error Q I m receiving the error message lt Building block gt is locked by lt User gt or lt Building block gt is in use by lt User gt when opening a row column or tree In the error the lt Building block gt is a row format column layout or reporting tree the lt User gt is a user name The possible causes of these errors are e The building block is currently open by the specified user on another computer e The building block was open by the s
121. Currency Type to Display dialog box Functional USD Andorran Peseta United Arab Emirates Dirham Afghanistan Afghani Albanian Lek Netherlands Antillian Guilder Angolan Kwanza Argentinian Austral Austrian Schilling Australian Dollar Aruban Florin Barbados Dollar Bangladeshi Taka Belgian Franc Bulgarian Lev Bahraini Dinar 2 As needed select a currency to display the conversion e NAT to display the amount in originating natural currency e FUNCT to display the amount converted to functional base currency for this company e Other to display other reporting currencies if available 3 Click OK to return to the Column Layout window Example of Combining Currency Code with Currency Display For example if you use the BP Currency Code with the NAT Currency Display the amounts in the local or natural currency amount display in your report If you use the BP Currency Code with the FUNCT or default Currency Display the amounts converted to the home or primary reporting currency for example US will display When you combine the following Currency Display with the Currency Code you receive the following report results assumes USD is the functional currency Currency Currency Report Display Code Result NAT YEN Y6 000 FUNCT YEN 60 FUNCT Blank 2 310 NAT USD 2 250 Table 5 6 Currency Display and Currency Code Combination with US as the Functional Currency Curr
122. DATE CHES Sales 766 930 273 503 695 354 265 617 1 462 284 539 120 2 001 404 Cost of Goods Sold 599 164 187 636 542 553 198 449 1 141 717 386 085 1 527 802 Gross Profit 167 766 85 867 152 801 67 168 320 567 153 035 473 602 Total Units Sold 147 715 61 253 167 959 67 294 315 674 128 547 444 221 Gross Profit Unit Sold 1 136 1 402 0 91 0 998 1 016 1 191 1 066 Figure 3 28 Year to Date Balances Below Current Balances Combining Account Modifiers You can combine the period offset account modifier with the current and year to date account modifiers For example if you use the code C 2 FRx uses the current balance for the period that is two periods earlier than the period specified in the column layout However if you use the code Y 1 FRx forces each column balance to use the year to date balance one period earlier than the other rows FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 105 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes Figure 3 29 shows the effect of various account modifiers Fabrikam Works Inc Example Modifiers April June Account Current YTD Current YTD 4100 4100 l C 3 841 5 837 1 019 266 5 857 080 477245227 4772 52 79 371 4100 TO 4999 4100 TO 4999 258 172 1100 Cash 1100 26 545 Account Modifier G L IY YTD Numbers in a current column 4100 Y 3 841 f 837 957 6 857 080 Can look at Previous periods for YTD Y 1 4100 Y 1 2 862 486
123. Denver Retail Denver _ Denver Lab _ Denver Studio Sales Wholesale Sales Services Services _ San Francisco _ San Francisco _ San Francisco _ San Francisco Retail Sales Wholesale Sales Lab Services Studio Services Figure 6 2 Flowchart Summary of All Units Reporting Tree Account Masks When creating a reporting tree the same row format can be used repeatedly whether you are generating a departmental income statement or a consolidated summary income statement FRx delivers this tremendous versatility by separating the responsibility segments of the account structure from the natural segment Because the row format defines only a portion of the account structure it must work together with the reporting tree where the remainder of the account is handled This is accomplished through the use of an account mask which uses symbols to identify for FRx what part of the chart of accounts is located in the row format versus the reporting tree The Account Mask determines the amount of detail information that should be drawn from the general ledger Each reporting unit must be either a child unit that has an account mask to draw data from the general ledger or a parent unit with detail information rolling up to it from a lower unit Account Mask Structure and Segments Typically detail units have a general ledger account mask Summary units often summarize data from their child u
124. E z 7 G enti Related A Link to DetlB J PB J5 DES 490 Liabilities Equity 850 1180 LNE Total Liabilities and Equity TOT 120T0 130 BXC This row 100 has the sape value as row 490 in the DetIBSIZ row format Figure 4 4 Summary Balance Sheet Data in SmmaryBS Row Format Column Layout All three reports must use the same column layout such as the Curr_YTD Column Layout shown in Figure 4 5 Column Headers SSS ees eet Bo Month YTD SSS aS a SS E Type GL Cale etc DESC ook Attrib on ee eee Period Code Po Current Per TD Column Width Figure 4 5 Cunen Year to date Column Layouts Window In addition the DetIBSIS row format requires that you use the Print Control Option BS Column is Balance Sheet Column in Mixed IS BS Report under the YTD Column This option is required because the DetIBSIS row format uses the PB Page Break as a format code Using these two codes tells Report Designer to print the consolidated Balance Sheet FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 119 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Creating Summary Reports Using Row Links Reporting Tree All three reports can use a reporting tree like the one shown in Figure 4 6 Summary B S uses the SummryBsS row format that links to the DetIBSIS row format Summary of All Units SummryBS Detail Unit DetlBSIS Natural Accounts amp amp amp amp 0000 000 Natural Detail B S amp I S uses the De
125. FRx Softw ware A part of Microsoft Business Solutions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide Copyright 2004 FRx Software Corporation All rights reserved Revision History Document Number Document Date Software Release RDUG March 1 2004 6 7 Legal Notices FRx Software Corporation makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents of this manual and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose We welcome user comments and reserve the right to revise this publication and to make improvements or changes to the products and programs described in this publication at any time without notice Printed in the United States of America No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of FRx Software Corporation Copyright and Trademarks Notice Copyright 2004 by FRx Software Corporation All rights reserved Microsoft FRx instant OLAP and Drilldown Viewer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation or FRx Software Corporation or their affiliates in the United States and or other countries All other registered trademarks and trademarks are property of their respective owners FRx Software Corporation is a subsidiary of Microsoft Corporation FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Contents Prelat osoni vende a rewdens eteed steideteisrevtevesbeiv
126. Filter option is unavailable Header Label Type a header for your report that indicates the account filter you are using for your subtotals FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 268 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab This header label is very important when you run the report using several different filters the header label identifies which filter was used to create each report Options for Transaction Detail Reports The following options are available for Transaction Detail Reports Subtotal By Period To print the opening balance period subtotals and YTD total in the YTD column select this check box the default If you do not select this option only the opening balance and YTD total prints on the report Transaction Rounding To apply rounding to every transaction in your transaction detail report select this check box To use this option you must click Round to Whole Dollars on the Formatting tab Tree Options Tab Tree Options tab If your report includes a reporting tree you can control the way your report appears using the Tree Options tab Figure 7 18 Catalog of Reports Window Tree Options Tab Reporting Unit Selection The Reporting Unit Selection allows you to select the following options Select Units at Run Time Display the reporting tree before report generation so that you can mark the reporting units to include in your report Include All Units Use t
127. Financial amp Account To view transaction details or both account and transaction detail Transaction Only or Financial amp Transaction Note When you print a report the difference between an Account Only report and a Financial amp Account report becomes significant If you select the Financial amp Account detail level FRx prints both a summary financial report and an account detail report When you select the Account Only detail level only the account detail report prints FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 232 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog Identification 7 From the Provisional drop down list box select one of the following balance options to include in your report To Select Include only transactions and Use Posted Balances Only balances posted in your general ledger Include all transactions and Provisional Posted Unposted Activity balances entered and posted in your general ledger Include only transactions Include Unposted Activity Only entered but not yet posted in your general ledger Note FRx can create reports based on posted balances or reports that include amounts from unposted balances for creating provisional pro forma reports Specifying Report Periods and Dates Use the Periods and Dates box shown in Figure 7 7 to indicate the base period base year and date for your report Periods and Dates Base Period This informa
128. Font to display the Font dialog box Make changes as necessary to Font Font style Size Effects or Color attributes and click OK Apply a font font style or size 1 Click Font 2 Make your selections and click OK Apply shading to the style 1 Click Shading 2 Select or define the background color and click OK 3 Click Save 4 Click Close FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 260 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab Clear Use the Clear option to clear the Headers Footers text or codes from the Left Centered or Right cells To clear text 1 Select the text or code to remove 2 Click Clear Report Options Tab Report Options tab The Formatting tab is active by default The Report Options tab contains options such as formatting and rounding amounts formatting detail reports subtotaling and filtering account detail formatting reporting trees generating an exception report and currency conversion To access these options you use five subtabs under the Report Options tab Figure 7 15 Catalog of Reports Window Reports Option Tab This section contains information and instructions on the five Report Options subtabs including the e Formatting Tab e Acct Tran Detail Tab e Tree Options Tab e Advanced Tab e Currency Translation Tab Formatting Tab You control formatting and rounding of amounts at the report level from the Formatting tab
129. For the Seven Months Ending Report Date uy 31 2004 Default Base Period 7 E This information is saved with the catalog record In the Base Period box type the fiscal base period number for the report to use To save a base period and year with the report see the Default Base Period on page 234 which discusses the Default Base Period settings Select the Rebuild FRx GL Indexes check box to rebuild the local GL index before processing the report In the Period Covered box edit the text as needed In the Report Date box edit the text as needed To change the Default Base Period click the Default Base Period box and select one from the list To edit these codes select a code and change the period number to reflect the appropriate base period For example to specify the base period as five periods prior to the current general ledger period click the Default Base Period arrow select C 1 and manually change the setting to C 5 Click OK to populate the Report Date box in the Catalog of Reports window FRx calculates a date using the information you entered in the Periods and Dates dialog box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 235 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Tabs for Building and Formatting Reports Tabs for Building and Formatting Reports The tabs in the Catalog of Reports window contains options that build and format your reports Some Catalog of Reports subtabs such as Web Publishing and C
130. General Ledger Account Codes To Use this format Add a range of 120 TO 130 wildcard accounts Subtract a full account 1205 2100 000 1205 2000 000 code Subtract a partial 1210 1205 account code Subtract a wildcard 1100 120 account Subtract a range of 1205 1000 000 TO 1205 2000 000 full account codes Subtract a range of 1200 TO 1205 partial account codes Subtract a range of 120 TO 130 wildcard accounts Table 3 5 Acceptable Formats for Adding and Subtracting Account Codes Continued Although you can edit the accounts in the regular worksheet edit box use the GL Account Links dialog box to apply the correct formatting to your account links Any of the accounts can include wildcard characters Note e If you want to subtract accounts you must put parentheses around those accounts For example if you enter 450 4509 you are telling FRx to subtract account 4509 from any account that starts with 450 The GL Account Links dialog box demonstrates how to enter accounts 450 minus account 4509 GL Account Links DE Natural No 450 Natural No 4509 Natural No Natural No Natural No Figure 3 25 GL Account Links Dialog Box Entering Accounts FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 99 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes Acct Segment Specify the type of account segment Full or Natural or a specific ac
131. Guide 216 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Adding Text and E mail Links to a Reporting Tree 4 Inthe Additional Text dialog box you can do the following To Do this Add additional text to a 1 Inthe first blank row type the text up to 255 reporting unit characters 2 To add additional text entries for this reporting unit in a new blank row type the text 3 Click OK Remove a text entry for a 1 Select the entry to remove reporting unit 2 Click Clear Close the Additional Text Click Cancel dialog box without saving changes Note The Additional Text box has ten rows available for text entries You can include two entries in an Additional Text box separated by a semicolon For example in the first Additional Text box type Adjusted after acquisition Unadjusted To use a semicolon as a character in the text entry enclose the semicolon in single quotes Adding E mail Addresses to a Reporting Tree You can enter e mail recipients in the Reporting Tree window in the Catalog of Reports or both E mail addresses must be set up in the reporting tree in order to make the Use Tree or Combined Catalog and Tree options available from the Catalog of Reports Selecting a combined catalog and tree e mail security sends users in the catalog an e mailed file containing only the units available to them in the tree For more information about selecting the Use Tree e mail option from the Catalog of Reports
132. If you did not select the Use integrated NT Security option type your login user ID to the OLAP cube server in this box Password If you did not select the Use integrated NT Security option type your login Password to the OLAP cube server in this box Cube Server Type or select the name of the server where the OLAP cube is located Cube Database Type or select the name of the OLAP cube database Fact Server Type or select the name of the server where the OLAP cube FACT tables are located Note FACT tables are the relational representation of the XML based report files They are an interim compilation of the report data that supports the OLAP cube generation For server based cubes the FACT tables are kept permanently in a user defined SQL Server Database location Table 7 11 FRx instant OLAP Microsoft Server Cube Settings FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 248 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab Microsoft Server Description Cube Options Fact Database Type or select the name of the database where the Microsoft SQL OLAP cube FACT tables are located Table 7 11 FRx instant OLAP Microsoft Server Cube Settings Continued e FRx instant OLAP Microsoft Local Cube Options When you select this option the following selections display under the Output Options tab on the right side of the screen FRx instant OLAP Microsoft Local Cube CUBEO01 CUB Iv m A description of
133. Income Expense rows 570 Income From Operations TOT 238 560 575 577 Interest Income Expense c 5650 7000 578 Adding an Income Before Income Taxes Row using a Formula You can include a formula in the Related Rates Rows Unit column that calculates the income before income taxes The Income Before Income Taxes Row Code 579 in Figure 2 4 on page 38 is based on the following instructions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 39 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format To add an Income before Income Taxes row using a formula 1 Go to the row following the underline format row for Interest Income Expense 570 Income From Operations TOT 238 560 577 Interest Income Expense C 5650 7000 In our sample format this is Row Code 579 Click the Description column Then in the edit bar type Income Before Income Taxes Click the Fmt Code column and select TOT from the list Click the Related Rates Rows Unit column O a WO N Then in the edit bar use the row code range formula lt Income From Operations row code gt TO lt Interest Income row code gt to calculate income before taxes In our example we used the formula 570 TO 578 7 Leave the Income Tax Expense row as is 8 Inthe next row click the Fmt Code column and select Fmt Code from the list This places an underline beneath the Income Tax Expense row 9 Review your formatted Income Before Income Taxes row
134. Information to display the Company Information dialog box Select the first company Type or select the new Import Export path and then click Save Repeat step 11 for all remaining companies Click Close to close the Company Information dialog box On the Company menu click Specification Sets to display the Specification Sets dialog box Select the first specification set FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 327 Appendix A FRx System Information 16 17 18 19 20 In the Location box enter the new location Warning Leave the filename intact Click Save Ifa message displays saying that the spec set exists in the new location and asking you if want to overwrite click No Repeat steps 16 18 for each remaining spec set Repeat steps 6 8 for each remaining user workstation Permissions Required for FRx Users Certain user permissions are required for each FRx module Report Designer Users The following user permissions are required All users require Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for the FRx program directory IO_Data directory and Sysdata directory If you use directories other the IO Data directory for report output users must also have Read Read and Execute Write and Modify permissions for these additional directories If users are restricted to specific companies you can grant them permissions for only the company directories they use If you are using the F
135. L row 3 Use your arrow keys to highlight the first row that you want to use in your calculation 4 Press the operand key that you want to use Note You can add or subtract the row values in a TOT row You can add subtract multiply or divide the row values in a CAL row 5 Highlight the next row that you want to appear in the calculation 6 Repeat steps 3 5 for each row that you want to include in the formula 7 When you are finished review your formula and choose from the following options e Ifyou want to accept the formula press Enter e Ifyou want to revert to the original formula press Esc You can select a range of rows using point and click totaling To do this click your mouse anywhere in the beginning row and drag it to select the range that you want to include in FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 92 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Totaling and Calculations the formula You can also use your arrow keys in combination with the Shift key to alter the range To select a range 1 2 From the TOT or CAL row click the Related Rates Rows Unit cell Click the gt sum button from the toolbar By default FRx selects the group of cells immediately above the selected TOT or CAL row to the preceding TOT or CAL row Accept the default range or hold down the Shift key and press the arrow keys to select a range or using your mouse click and hold to highlight the range of rows Note If you manually type a rang
136. LES DENVER Sales Division Denver E RETAILDENVER Retai Sales Denver WHOLESALE DENVER Wholesale Sales Denver SEAVICE DENVER Service Division Denver E LAB DENVER Lab Service Denver STUDIO DENVER Studio Denver SAN FRANCISCO San Francisco Region SALES SF Sales Division San Francisco E RETAILS etai Sales San Francisco WHOLESALE SF Wholesale Sales San Francisco SERVICE SF Service Division San Francisco E LAB SF Lab Services San Francisco STUDIO SF Studio San Francisco Cancel Mark All Unmark All 4 Select the reporting units that you want to generate by pressing the Ctrl key while you select the units or click Mark All 5 Click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 278 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports 6 The Report Status dialog box displays a summary of the report progress To stop processing click Cancel When FRx finishes processing the report the DrillDown Viewer opens and displays it Printing Catalog Information To print catalog information 1 On the File menu click Print Catalog to display the Print Catalog Information dialog box Print Catalog Information Dynamic WKS Full Year Actual Forecast Ext WKS Eff_Date Effective Dating in theTree Used for Company Rec Exception Exception Reporting Exception_IS Exception Report for Income Statement Formatting Tips Rev amp Exp per Employee Gross Profit Per Uni
137. Modifying a Row Format Modifying a Row Format This section describes the steps to format report rows for a sample income statement including e Revenue Rows e Operating Expenses Rows e Income Rows Revenue Rows The Row Codes 25 259 used below in Figure 2 2 represent formatted rows for a sample income statement The revenue rows in this sample income statement include Revenue description Sales Net Sales Cost of Goods Sold COGS Gross Margin and rows to create a separation from expenses H General Ledger B Description Rates Rows Unit 25 DES 50 Revenue DES 75 DES 100 Sales c 410 4109 160 Sales Returns 4110 190 Sales Discounts 4250 Revenue Sales 206 Net Sales TOT 100 160 190 213 DES 220 COGS 450 4509 Net Sales COGS Gross Margin 238 Gross Margin TOT 206 220 Separate Revenue 252 DES from 259 DES Expense SiE Figure 2 2 Accounts in Row Formats Window Row Codes 25 259 Note e The row codes that you create in the sample report could be different than those shown in Figure 2 2 Adding a Revenue Description You can modify the sample row format you created in Building a Row Format from the Chart of Accounts on page 26 to include additional rows and then designate the rows as Revenue using the DES format code You can add Revenue report rows in the row format window with rows displayed The revenue Row Codes 25 75 in Figure 2 2 are based on the following
138. N and ELSE Formulas The THEN and ELSE formulas can be any valid calculation from the simplest value assignments to complex formulas Note the formulas in the following window IF A200 gt 0 THEN A B200 e This statement specifies that IF the value in column A of row 200 is greater than zero THEN place the value from column B row 200 into column A of the current row See row 300 e Inthis statement you can also use the character in either true false evaluations or in the formula to represent all columns For example the formula described in the IF THEN statement above placed a value in one column of the current row e Inrow 400 the value from B200 is placed in every column of the current row e Inrow 500 the value from each column in row 200 is placed in the corresponding column in the current row e With the formula in row 600 you instruct FRx to evaluate each column in row 200 and if greater than 0 place its value in the same column in the current row A B c D F H Row Description Fmt eRT Print Column Linkto Code Code ates Rows Unt Ctl General Ledger 100 Salary Expense 5000 200 Officers Comp 5050 300 One Column CAL IF A200 gt 0 THEN A B200 400 Every Column CAL IF A200 gt 0 THEN B200 500 Corresponding Column CAL IF A200 gt 0 THEN 200 600 Evaluate Each Column CAL IF 200 gt 0 THEN 200 Figure 3 22 IF THEN ELSE Statements in Row Format Window Using UNIT restrict a row to only a singl
139. OUNL SOUS vids cc 2iesiedactenciat saacedeved aes tiaeias dec ceevsaaaesdaeus dngdeeceas avedeuead gave ddete aduadene dayees 101 Using Account Modifiers eessen aeien NE SNE NTa AEA TEN 103 Combining Account Modifiers 0 0 0 cccceeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeseneaaeeeeseeeaaeeeeteeaaeeees 105 Restricting Rows with Book Codes ccccccceeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeenaaes 106 Using Account Attributes and Transaction Attributes in ROWS 0eseeees 107 Assigning Currency CodeS arees E eM eeteeeees 111 Automatic Rounding for Balance Sheets cceecseceeeeeeceeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaas 112 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information ccccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 115 Creating Summary Reports Using ROW Links ou eeccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 116 Natural ROW FOlimatcs issccsveh ccscceectsskacinecectsaceteestsbecevet bet adineevtisannecvi nsbadeeed Sat secnete sane 118 DellBSIS ROW FOMA tases dii a A T S a 118 SUMMYBS RON FOMA es a E acs euedeetaalds 119 Column Layou aesa a n a E E AA 119 Reporting Tee 4s 22c2escaanedactys ances deveaaceedstvuaaacceevesaagesdeersaancedlevine cevest sad actedeesaactsievenacd 120 Establishing Links sei e2 decd craideneeidiatneceadiashi cesta ce levasls indtecsivisiivenen iedevas de etaaienedes 121 Creating Row Formatting Links 20 00 ccc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeeseeeeeaeeeeseeaeeeees 122 Linking
140. RANCISCO DENVER Danver B SALES SF SALES DENVER Sales Division Denver Sbebeb 1 100 27 SERVICE DENVER Service Division Denver Bbebeb 1 200 277 SAN FRANCISCO San Francisco SALES SF Sales Division San Francisco 8 amp 88 2100 77 SERVICE SF Service Division San Francisco amp bb amp 2200 77 B SERVICE SF Easy to Read Column Format Figure 6 7 Reporting Tree Worksheet The worksheet displays each reporting unit in a separate row in the order of the reporting tree hierarchy With its easy to read column format you can also view the account mask typically for detail units any additional text and other information about the reporting unit Essentially the worksheet contains all the information that is also in the Reporting Units dialog box for an individual reporting unit However the Reporting Tree worksheet gives you the advantage of viewing all the reporting units together For more information on the Reporting Units dialog box see Building a Reporting Tree with the Reporting Units Dialog Box on page 206 To view a reporting tree You can view both the reporting tree worksheet and graphical reporting tree in the Reporting Tree window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 188 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Window 1 2 From the FRx Control Panel click the Reporting Trees icon to display the Open Tree dialog box Open Tree Consolidated Fabrikam Summary LI l Departments by Region
141. Report Server FRx sends your report to the Report Server queue by default If Report Server is not installed all reports process locally on your workstation For more information on Report Server see your FRx Report Server 6 7 User s Guide To set the default or change the report processing location from the File menu choose Generate and in the Generate Report dialog box set the default value Note When you generate a report for one of the sample companies Fabrikam Works Inc or Fabrikam Works Canada FRx processes the report locally by default Table 7 5 Catalog of Reports Toolbar Selections Note For main toolbar button descriptions see The Toolbar on page 12 of this guide FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 229 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog Identification Catalog Identification Use the Catalog of Reports window to identify date build and format your reports FRx Desktop Catalog Edit Company Catalog Options Admin Window Help Iau E Tran_Dept _ Transaction Detail Departm JA gt p ecaa Tran_Der ee re resanl ee Reports report wel Fabrikam Works Ine I identification Financial amp Transaction a Page Options Report Options come os E me tom Operaio o r E The Catalog of l Reports tabs Davo etarsvibause O v Fwa E a neen a O O O Figure 7 6 Catalog of Reports Window Report Identification and Tabs
142. Report Server instead of your own workstation FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 284 FRx Software Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Overview cssssescee 286 Including XBRL Elements in the Row Format 289 Including XBRL Elements in the Column UO aster tees tees eke 293 Selecting XBRL Output Type in the Catalog Of Reports 5 vst oe debe tadak nieka 295 XBRL Definitions 298 Chapter 8 Microsoft Business Solutions for Analytics FRx supports output to XML based financial reports using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL version 2 0 specifications and taxonomies You can include XBRL taxonomy links in your row format and create XBRL instance documents using FRx Report Designer This chapter includes an overview of XBRL and describes how to e Include XBRL elements in the row format e Include XBRL Tag column types in the column layouts e Select XBRL Output Type in the Catalog of Reports Common XBRL terms are defined at the end of the chapter FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 285 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Extensible Business Reporting Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Overview The XBRL 2 0 specification and taxonomy for financial reporting of commercial and industrial companies under US GAAP was released by the XBRL Committee on November 15 2
143. Reporting Tree dialog box do the following e Inthe Name box type a unique name for the new reporting tree e Inthe Description box type a description for the reporting tree 7 Click OK to save the reporting tree and return to the Reporting Tree Window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 48 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a New Catalog ID Creating a New Catalog ID In the Catalog of Reports you bring together your row format column layout and any reporting tree and then assign it a catalog ID name To create a catalog ID 1 From the Report Designer Control Panel window on the File menu click Catalog of Reports to display the Select Catalog for Display dialog box Select Catalog for Display r Tabular Balance Sheet Balance Sheet Side by Side Balance Sheet With Ratios Cash Flow Statement Balance Sheet Consolidated Balance Sheet And Income Stmnt Consolidated Balance Sheet Consolidated Side By Side o Cao Financial Repot l Use Posted Balances Only z tree partial acco A TON at produce E 3 Inthe Catalog ID box type a code to describe this sample report For example type IncStmt Note The Catalog ID is a user defined name The name can be up to 16 characters in length but cannot contain any of the following invalid naming characters lt gt FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 49 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report
144. Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format To modify sales report rows 1 Go to the Sales row in your sample row format D 4 B E E F G H inti Related j P Row Description Fmt Norm Print Column Link to i Code o me peel BES Girerelledgai Revenue Sales 410 4109 Sales Returns 4110 Sales Discounts 4250 In our example this row is Row Code 100 2 Click the Link to General Ledger column 3 Then in the edit bar change 4100 to 410 4109 Note In row 100 a C appears in the Norm Bal column This reverses the sign of the normal balance credit account and makes it appear as a positive amount on the report 4 Select the Sales Elimination row 5 On the Edit menu click Delete Row This removes the elimination row from the report 6 Starting with the COGS row select three rows 7 On the Edit menu click Insert Row to add three new rows 8 Inthe row following the Sales Discounts row click the Fmt Code column and select Fmt Code from the list This places an underline beneath the Sales Discounts row 9 Review your formatted Sales row 100 Sales C 410 4109 160 Sales Returns 4110 190 Sales Discounts 4250 Adding a Net Sales Row that Includes a Formula You can modify a row to include net sales by changing the format code to TOT total and adding a formula to calculate net sales The Net Sales Row Code 206 in Figure 2 2 on page 28 was added using the following instructions FRx Repor
145. Rounded Numbers cceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeetetneeeeeetiaeeeereeee 317 Restricting Income Statement Accounts in the Account Detail Report 318 Out of Balance Message when Drilling into Transaction Detail ces 318 Restore a Deleted or Overwritten Row Column or Tree c ceceeseeeeeeeeeetreeeeeeeee 319 Error MCSSAGCS Senesi r nia A a deced catia agnecnents sagacdaved avacedevis dadedeavas atiecdeve Madneseet datees 320 Building Block User Error were c etecctespoessedestsniedenentsanedacsseonegcdestphiedaudet pondsaesteebedsauderphuds 320 Disk or Network EMO oseca lan nite ees 320 Specification Set Database Security does not Match Current FRxSys32 Security Setting 2 eect eeeeeeeee ee eeeee eater eeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeenaeeeeeeeeaees 322 FRX System INfONMALION seanina AEE AA EEE 324 Client Installation Types 0 0 0 cceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaees 324 Moving FRx to a New Location or New Server uu eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettteeeeeeettneeeeeeenee 325 Permissions Required for FRX USES ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseencneaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetenneeas 328 Maintaining FRx Data Files and Preventing Corruption 0c cceecceeceeeeeetteeeeereeee 329 HOSS Y sanssserssisanecsedansnssiensrsasuaonssasnsansdacansanssstncanasnsestandsssasnssistannnsnsnsnssanseadansssescesapndinennn 333 VA CM oes sd conse vets He acetate E A EA PE A 3
146. Rows to a Summary Report c cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeaas 123 Linking to External Worksheets 00 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeenneee eee eeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaeeeeseeeiaeeeeenenaes 124 Referencing External Worksheet Cells ccceeeceee cence ee eeeneeeeeeeiaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeas 125 Identifying Individual Worksheet Cells 20 eececeeeeeneneeeeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 125 Automatic Matching of Worksheet Columns to the Current Period 005 127 Using a Combined Worksheet Link 00 0 0 eecceeeeeeeenee cece eeene eee ee tants eeetaaeeeeeetneeeeeeees 128 Using a Separate Worksheet LINK 0 cc eceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeteeeeeaeeeeteeaeeeees 130 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts i i cicsciccscsscccsceccssestenecacssitnensecentacisteasesninnecs 137 Opening the Column Layout WiINdOW 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeetaeeeeesenaaes 138 Column Layout Menu Functions 00 cccccceeeee cence eee eeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeneeeeseeenaeeeeeeeeaas 140 File Menu cccccccccctectedectteanccscpetasccceecqheatdecepausnceecepssaceceasubuaadecepenugcctenesaacecenan vescarapenies 140 Edit MON sia a E dystteeedatides dio aan eee 141 Adding Column Headers sonrasi intel ian aiid aiete 143 Creating Typical Headers 2c2 cccccseeceeeedestnceeeecedecseeteedbageeeedentueeeenecuaiesecedenseeeeee 143 Creating Dynamic Conditional Headers ce ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee
147. Rx Report Server users must also have Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for the Queue directory This is typically the same as the SysData directory If your company is using the FRx WebPort users publishing reports must have Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for the WebPort Data directory on the Web server Report Launcher Users The following user permissions are required All users require Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for the FRx program directory IO_Data directory and Sysdata directory If you use directories other than the IO_Data directory for report output users must have Read Read and Execute Write and Modify permissions for these additional directories If users are restricted to specific companies you can grant them permissions for only the company directories they use DrillDown Viewer Users Local DrillDown Viewer users require Read and Read amp Execute permissions for the FRx program directory and IO_ Data directory FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 328 Appendix A FRx System Information If you use directories other than the IO_Data directory for report output users must also have Read and Read amp Execute permissions for these additional directories If users are restricted to specific companies you can grant them permissions only for the company directories they use To use the subtotaling functionality in the DrillDo
148. Sources If your FRx license includes the currency translation function the Report Options tab contains a sub tab named Currency Translation From the Currency Translation tab you tell FRx which spot rate source and historic rate source to use for currency conversion The source you select depends on your accounting system There could be two Spot Rate Source options FRx and OFSI e If your general ledger stores conversion rates along with amounts and the FRx interface to the general ledger can read the conversion rate data select OFSI as the Spot Rate Source FRx then reads the general ledger conversion rates to calculate currency conversions e Ifthe general ledger does not store conversion rates or FRx cannot extract conversion rate data select FRx as the Spot Rate Source to draw the exchange rates from the FRx DAX rate table FRx is the only option available for the Historical Rate Source because both historic conversion rates and base currency amounts are read from the FRx DAX rate table Selecting Average Rate Calculation If the row format for your report uses CCAVG row format code specify one of the following methods for calculating the average rate FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 309 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports e To use the number of rates as the denominator for calculating averages select the Use Sum of Rates Number of Rates Entered Balance for mont
149. The ASORT code sorts the report by the absolute value of the value in the selected column In other words the sign of the value is ignored in the sort This format code shows values sequenced by the magnitude of the variance whether positive or negative To use the ASORT code 1 Select the ASORT format code 2 Enter the range of rows to be sorted in the Related Rates Rows Unit column 3 Enter the column letter to be used for the sort in the Column column The report is sorted in ascending order by default For descending order enter a negative sign before the column letter Note Do not include formatting or total rows in a sort calculation If you include format or total rows FRx sorts these rows along with the general ledger rows FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 78 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats The Sort format code sorts the report in ascending or descending order based on the values in your selected column The Asort format code sorts the report by the absolute values in your selected column Fabrikam Works Inc Variance Analysis Sorted by Variance Service Division San Francisco This section of the re port is For the Four Months Ending April 30 2002 sorted in ascending order April YTD Actual Budget Variance Actual Budget Variance Sorted by Monthly Variance in Ascending Order Salary Expense 16 566 11 007 5 559 64 035 42 564 21 471 7 lt Rent Expense 2 251 1 495 756 8
150. These codes pull variable information into the headers and footers of your report Use the Left Center or Right formatting options to define the Code alignment FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 258 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Page Options Tab Using the following table select one of the following codes from the drop down list FRx includes the information from the COMP Company Information dialog box Company Name box TITLE Reporting Tree window column D Title Description ROW Row Format description COL Column Layout description TXTDATE Periods and Dates dialog box Report Date box NUMDTE Catalog of Reports window Report Date box formatted as mm dd yy TXTPER Periods and Dates dialog box Period Covered text box TXTP D Periods and Dates dialog box Period Covered and Report Date boxes TXTPER Periods and Dates dialog box Base Period box formatted as text PAGE Print page number RUNIT Reporting Tree window column B Company and column C Unit Code PDATE Current computer system date at processing PTIME Current computer system time at processing CAT Catalog of Reports window Catalog ID box BLANK To force a blank line CATDESC Catalog of Reports window Catalog Description box ROUND Formatting tab Rounding of Amounts box FNAME Output Options File Name box TREE To use report header from tree format FILTER
151. Total Operating Expenses row code gt to calculate income from operations In our example row format the formula is 238 560 In the row following the Income From Operations row click the Fmt Code column and select Fmt Code from the list This places an underline beneath the Income From Operations row Review your formatted Income From Operations rows H Link to General Ledger B Description Related Rates Rows Unit Income From Operations TOT 238 560 Adding Interest Income Rows You can insert and modify income rows by applying formatting features you have used in the above sections The Interest Income Row Codes 575 to 578 in Figure 2 4 are based on the following instructions To add interest income rows 1 Go to the Income Tax Expense row 570 Income From Operations TOT 238 560 575 580 Income Tax Expense 5500 In our example this is Row Code 580 Starting with this Income Tax Expense row select three rows On the Edit menu click Insert Row to insert three new rows In the first inserted row click the Description column and in the edit bar type Interest Income Expense Click the Norm Bal column and select C from the list Click In the Link to General Ledger column and in the edit bar type 5650 7000 In the next row click the Fmt Code column and select Fmt Code from the list This places an underline beneath the Interest Income Expense row Review your formatted Interest
152. Units check box e To process specific reporting tree levels 1 Select the Include Specific Number of Levels box 2 Enter a value in the Levels Down form Starting Unit box 3 From the Building Blocks tab select a Starting Unit This allows the reports to process without interruption e To select specific units before processing the report select the Select Units at Run Time box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 281 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports 9 Click Find 10 Inthe Select Catalog for Display dialog box select the last chained report and click OK 11 Choose from the following options To Do this Add another report to the chain Repeat steps 3 through 10 for each report that you want to chain together Complete the chain and run the 1 Click Save reports 2 Select Generate Report 3 In the confirmation message box click Yes The Catalog IDs run one after the other in the order they were chained Cloning Your Reports It takes a lot of care to set up a report the way that you want To simplify the process you can reuse your catalog IDs by cloning them Cloning your catalog IDs allows you to use your own report definitions as the default for creating new definitions To clone a catalog ID 1 2 From the FRx Control Panel click Catalog of Reports In the Select Catalog for Display dialog box select the report that you want to clone and c
153. User s Guide 211 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Manually Promoting and Demoting Reporting Units with the Tree Menu To promote and demote reporting units with the Tree menu 1 Inthe Reporting Tree window on the graphical tree click a reporting unit 2 On the Reporting Tree menu select one of the following Higher in the tree Promote Unit Lower in the tree Demote Unit Assigning Parent Child Relationships in the Reporting Units Dialog Box To assign parent child relationships in the Reporting Units dialog box You can assign a child unit to a parent unit or designate a unit as the parent unit using the Reporting Units dialog box 1 From the Reporting Tree window click the Tree Form icon to display the Reporting Units dialog box 2 Use the Unit Code arrows to select the child unit 3 Inthe Parent Unit box click the arrow to display the list of reporting units and select a unit to designate as the parent unit 4 Click OK to apply the selection and return to the Reporting Tree window For more information see Reporting Tree Toolbar Icon on page 196 For more information on defining parent units see Defining Parent Child Relationships on page 211 After you defined the parent child relationship you can verify the parent unit for a specific reporting unit See To verify a unit s parent unit on page 212 Verifying a Unit s Parent Unit To verify a unit s parent
154. You can use the Paste function to paste copied information from other Windows based applications or from other FRx worksheets into this worksheet Clear Clears blanks out all selected cells Find Ctrl F Locates information contained in the row format Replace Ctrl R Locates and replaces information contained in the row format Table 3 2 Row Format Edit Menu Commands FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 59 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Row Format Menu Functions File Menu Commands Description Add Rows from Chart of Accounts This command allows you to create a new row format with general ledger accounts using data from your current chart of accounts A selected subset of general ledger account information is transferred to the new row format For more information about using this command see Building a Row Format From the Chart of Accounts on page 67 Renumber Rows Allows you to define starting row codes and a number by which to increment the row codes that follow Description Ctrl D Opens a dialog box where you can edit a row format description Rounding Adjustments See Automatic Rounding for Balance Sheets on page 112 Account Sets With FRx you can create an account set by assigning a name to a group of accounts Then you can use this account set name in multiple row formats See Account Sets on page 101 Delete Row T
155. a Column Restriction code overrides any conflicting setting assigned in the row format FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 176 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Creating Tabular Reports Creating Tabular Reports You can design a report with the amounts from one period extended across the page into multiple print columns Using multiple display columns can emphasize particular totals To create a tabular report 1 Create a column layout similar to the following example GL ACTUAL BASE BASE YTD 2 Inthe row format you must enter the column that you want the result to be displayed in Do this by placing the column letter in the column restriction column column G Example of Column Layout for Creating a Tabular Report In the following row format notice the detail information for Current Assets and Net Fixed Assets in column B the total format code TOT in column C rows 625 and 850 and the formula for combined total assets in column D row 910 _ Prepaid Assets 625 Current Assets TOT 19070610 640 DES 670 Leasehold Improvements 1510 700 Office Furniture And Fixtures g 730 Data Processing Equipment 760 Office Equipment 730 Less Accumulated Depreciation 850 Net Fixed Assets rar 880 DES 670 TO 790 1520 11530 1540 1575 310 Total Assets TOT 19070880 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 177 Chapter
156. a password in this box Print Headings Use to include your defined column and report headings in the worksheet file Print Format Rows Use to include your defined format rows DES LFT RGT and CEN rows in the worksheet file If you do not select this option only amount rows export to the worksheet Print Underscore To include underscore and double underscore rows in Rows the worksheet files Export Formulas Use this option only with worksheets to export formulas from the row format TOT and column layout to the worksheet Table 7 8 Formatted Excel Output Options FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 245 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab e Worksheet Options The following Excel and Lotus output options are available from the Output Options tab e Export to Lotus WK1 to export your report to a Lotus 1 2 3 WK1 file e Export to Excel XLS to export your report to a Microsoft Excel XLS file This file can then be read without custom fonts by any version of Microsoft Excel When you select one of these worksheet options the following output options display on the Output Options tab xcel XLS BSRATIO XLS These options are described in the following table Worksheet Options Description Print Headings Use to include your defined column and report headings in the worksheet file Print Format Rows Use to include your defined format rows DES LFT RGT an
157. al Ledger cell you can enter a general ledger account using the natural account code segment full account code or a combination of the natural segment and one or more responsibility segments If your account code includes spaces as part of the account structure FRx inserts an underscore _ character in place of the space by default If you want to change the underscore character you need to change it in the System Preferences dialog box For more information see your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide Defining Only the Natural Code The most flexible row format is one that contains only the natural segment of the account code For example you could use the natural account code segment 6010 as the advertising expense code for all of your departments Then you could define 6010 in the report row format and specify the associated responsibility segments in the reporting units of the reporting tree FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 94 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes The full account code is created when FRx combines the row format with the reporting tree at report creation time Although row formats that contain the natural account code segment are the most flexible for you to use you can create row formats that contain a subset of the full account code This will work well as long as the same number of hooks are present in the account mask of each unit in the reporting tree For m
158. al correctly How can I fix this Any rounding technique will introduce rounding differences into your total making a true balance impossible You can solve this problem by adding an automatic rounding adjustment to your report To automatically adjust rounding 1 On the Row Format window select the Edit menu and click Rounding Adjustments to display the Rounding Adjustments dialog box 2 Inthe Total Assets row and Total Liabilities amp Equity row boxes type the row codes 3 Inthe Rounding Adjustment row box type the row code it must contain a general ledger account that you want to contain the adjustment FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 317 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions FAQs 4 In the Adjustment Amount Limit box type the maximum adjustment amount to allow Note When a rounding adjustment is necessary Report Designer adjusts the selected row and then totals the report again to reflect the new balances Restricting Income Statement Accounts in the Account Detail Report Q When I calculate my current earnings for balance sheet purposes how can I keep all those income statement accounts from the Year to Date Income row out of the account detail report A Open the Row Format window From the row format in each row that you want to suppress double click the Print Control column select XD and click OK This suppresses detail for this row when printing an account detail report Any rounding techni
159. an be turned on or off For example the Status Bar command on the Options menu can be checked on or off transaction In general a business event which can be measured in currency and can be entered in the accounting records triangulation currency A currency whose exchange rates are maintained in FRx for both the base currency and the conversion currency If an exchange rate table is not maintained between two currencies but a third common currency is available with exchange rates for both currencies the first currency can be converted into the common triangulation currency and then the common currency can be converted into the second currency tree See reporting tree Glossary WebPort The FRx WebPort product lets users publish FRx reports in Web repository environment that supports both FRx reports and non FRx objects such as Word documents Excel spreadsheets or OLAP cube files This product makes files viewable with your internet or intranet wildcard character A special character that stands for any one or more possible characters a placeholder For example the is a wildcard in account mask boxes XBRL Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL is an open specification that uses XML based data tags to describe financial statements for both public and private companies XBRL taxonomy document An XML Schema file that describes a set of concepts that are used in preparing an XBRL instance docu
160. ancel Clear FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 241 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Building Blocks Tab 10 11 In the Effective Dates dialog box select one of the following e Use Period Numbers to make a row format effective as of a selected period e Use Dates to make a row format effective as of a selected date Double click the Format Name box to display the Choose a Reporting Tree dialog box Select a reporting tree and click OK Double click the Date Period or Starting Date box and enter the period number or date for the selected row format The row format goes into effect as of the date or period you select Repeat steps 6 8 for each reporting tree that you want to include Click OK to return to the Catalog of Reports window To specify a starting unit click the Starting Unit arrow to display the Units for Tree dialog box Units for Tree FBRKMWRKA 2 RETAIL DENVER Retail Sales Denver E WHOLESALE DENVER Wholesale Sales Denver SERVICE DENVER Service Division Denver 2 LAB DENVER Lab Service Denver 2 STUDIO DENVER Studio Denver SAN FRANCISCO San Francisco Region SALES SF Sales Division San Francisco 2 RETAIL SF Retail Sales San Francisco ae Sales Division Denver 2 WHOLESALE SF Wholesale Sales San Francisco SERVICE SF Service Division San Francisco E LAB SF Lab Services San Francisco 2 STUDIO SF Studio San Francisco 12 Inthe Units for Tree
161. ange them Note You must save the reporting tree in order to save the description change Delete Unit Deletes the reporting unit at the current cursor position Click the gray box in front of the row you want to delete and then click Delete Unit You can then confirm the deletion in the confirmation window Insert Unit Inserts a new reporting unit at the current cursor position Click the gray box in front of the reporting unit before which you want to insert a new reporting unit and then click Insert Unit or an existing tree Note You cannot insert a row on the first summary row Zoom F3 In cells that support this function pens a dialog box with a list of valid values to select from displays dimmed if this function is unavailable Table 6 3 Reporting Tree Edit Menu Commands Continued FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 192 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar Icon Format Menu The Format menu is shown in the following figure Column Width Outline Style Figure 6 10 Reporting Tree Format Menu You can use the following Format menu commands to adjust column widths in the reporting tree worksheet and to control the appearance of the graphical reporting tree Format Menu Description Command Column Width Opens the Column Width dialog box Use this box to specify the width of a column as well as to hide or unhide columns as fol
162. ar type Operating Expenses 4 Click the Fmt Code column and select DES from the list FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 35 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format 5 Review your formatted Operating Expenses row D Related z A Link to Rates Rows Unit General Ledger B Description Operating Expenses Modifying the Expenses Report Rows You can accept expense rows as they are or apply modifications with features that you used in the previous sections The Expenses Row Codes 280 to 555 in Figure 2 3 on page 35 were modified based on the following instructions To modify the expenses report rows 1 Go to the expense rows in your sample row format A B f X a E F G H Row Description Fmt R fee nil Norm Print Column Link to Code Code steed ome Urata eet TE General Ledger Operating Expenses Salary Expense Officers Comp Depreciation Expense Office Expense Supplies Expense Service Maintainence Expense Service Rent Expense Travel Expense Advertising Expense Commissions Expense 2 Leave the following rows as they are Salary Expense Officers Comp Depreciation Expense Office Expense Supplies Expense Service Maintenance Expense Rent Expense Travel Expense and Advertising Expense 3 Inthe Commissions Expense row click the Link to General Ledger column 4 Then in the edit bar change 5400 to 54 to include all natural accounts beginning with
163. aracters in length Caution FRx does not recognize the following symbols as valid Catalog ID characters lt gt 3 Inthe Catalog ID Description box type a catalog description which can be up to 50 characters in length 4 Inthe Company box use your default company or select a different company from the drop down list and click OK Note If you choose the ANY Company the report runs for the default company or the companies identified in the associated reporting tree The Company Description box automatically displays a description based on your company selection FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 231 levels To Create a high level summary report Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog Identification 6 From the Detail Level drop down list box select one of the following report detail Select Financial Report Create a report that contains only account detail balances Account Only Create a report that contains a high level summary as well as account details Financial amp Account Create a report that contains only transaction details Transaction Only Create a report that contains a high level summary as well as transaction details Financial amp Transaction Accounts with a zero balance and no period activity are typically suppressed in transaction detail reports To view and drill into the Account detail information Account Only or
164. are available if you choose Account Only Financial amp Account Transaction Only or Financial amp Transaction as the Detail Level for the report Subtotal on Segment To subtotal on an account segment in your account detail report select this check box and then type or select the account segment number in the box below this check box Subtotaling affects only the account detail section of a report When you use subtotaling from the Catalog of Reports you can print the subtotaled account detail or export this information without using the FRx DrillDown Viewer Use Account Filter To use an account filter subtotal select this check box and then enter the account filter in the box below this check box This filter applies to every row column and tree intersection and lets you run a report for specific units using a filter without changing the tree Or without creating a tree you can run a report for a specific unit When you retrieve the account detail the application finds all children and grandchildren and then retrieves the accounts for all these related units When subtotaling from the catalog with a tree the financial reports are exported for each level of the tree however instead of displaying the account detail for the lowest unit the account detail prints or exports from the summary level Note If you generate a report with an account filter when you view the report in the DrillDown Viewer the subtotal Use Account
165. ased companies this will be the US Dollar but European companies will probably use the EURO Many companies may want to maintain two rate tables if they use the EURO as the basis for all European conversions and the US Dollar for non European conversions For information about maintaining currency exchange rates see Chapter 3 Administering Currency Translation in your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator 5 Guide You need to set up the FRx system before you can use the currency translation function to build reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 300 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation FRx Currency Translation Overview Once you have prepared the system settings you can activate DAX Currency Translation and then use the currency translation codes in your row formats and column layouts to build FRx reports In the Catalog of Reports you select these row formats and column layouts as building blocks for currency translation reports select which DAX tables to use and set the method for calculating currency rate averages For more information on calculating exchange rate averages see Selecting the Method of Average Rate Calculation in Chapter 3 of your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 301 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Setting Up the FRx System for Currency Translation Setting Up the FRx System for Currency Translation Your FRx Syste
166. ast we used the Segment Range boxes to limit the account segment ranges and departments Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts ae HH AHL In this example we used the Split icon to separate the Location Division code and add a new segment Figure 6 15 Splitting off the Location and Limiting Segments The resulting functional reporting tree sorted by location is shown in Figure 6 16 SUMMARY 100 1 B Retail Fw SUMMARY Summary of All Units B Wholesale Fw 100 2 Fw H i B Retail FW Retail Retail amp 848 1100 001 E Wholesale 200 Fw Wholesale Wholesale amp 8 amp 4 1100 002 FW 2 E Lab FW Retail Retail amp 8 amp 4 2100 001 B Studio FW Wholesale Wholesale amp 8 amp 4 2100 002 2 FW 200 Lab FW 1 1B Studio FW Lab Lab amp amp amp amp 1200 003 FW Studio Studio amp 844 1200 004 FW 2 FW Lab Lab amp amp amp amp 2200 003 FW Studio Studio amp B84 2200 004 Figure 6 16 Functional Reporting Tree by Location Account masks can be included in building a tree automatically To learn more about account masks and symbols review the following topics Including an Account Mask when Building a Tree Automatically The account mask is built with the following segments the natural account code followed by the location the divisions and the departments The number of positions within a segment varies with the actual number of characters or digits in the general ledg
167. at for a report that you output as an frd file DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML The XBRL_TAG is not passed from the column layout to the XBRL instance document FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 149 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail e Transaction Detail Codes Use the transaction detail codes for presenting appropriate detail in a transaction detail report By specifying a value in the column TYPE cell you can create a column layout for a transaction detail report that contains a separate column for each type of transaction information These codes are always used in conjunction with GL columns You can include both a current and year to date GL column to create transaction detail reports Figure 5 9 shows examples of Transaction Detail Codes erie ae eel Type GL Cac etc DESC ACCT TAPL TDOC Book Code Attribute Category ACTUAL ACTUAL si BASE BASE BASE 1 BASE CUR CUR Figure 5 9 Transaction Detail in Column Layout Window Note The codes that display in the TYPE selection window do not necessarily apply to all accounting systems Your FRx Report Designer Getting Started Guide contains information about types specific to your accounting system If you select a type that is not valid with your accounting system the column appears blank in the report For more information about creating transaction detail reports see Customizing Transaction Detail Reports on page 173 To specif
168. at used for the open catalog ID Column Layout Opens the column layout used for the open catalog ID Reporting Tree Opens the reporting tree used for the open catalog ID Zoom Displays the Select Catalog for Display dialog box and a list F3 of Catalog IDs to select from Table 7 2 Catalog of Reports Edit Menu Commands Catalog Menu The Catalog menu as shown in Figure 7 4 corresponds to the tab options in the Catalog of Reports window that you use to build and format your reports Figure 7 4 Catalog of Reports Catalog Menu FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 226 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog of Reports Menu Bar The Catalog menu allows you to display and access the following tabs and menu selections in the Catalog of Reports window Catalog Menu Command Description Building Blocks Displays the Building Block tab Output and then click Output Options Displays the commands e Output Options to display options for the report output e E mail to display the E mail Options tab e Web Publishing to display the Web Publishing tab Schedules Displays the Schedule dialog box This command is only available if the FRx Report Server is available and running Page Options Displays the commands e Page Setup to display the Page Setup tab e Headers Footers to display the Headers Footers tab Report Options Displays the commands e Formattin
169. ating Row Formats Row Format Menu Functions Row Format Menu Functions The menu functions described in this chapter are specific to the Row Format window For information about menus that appear in all FRx main windows see Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus on page 18 This section contains information and instructions on the e File Menu Edit Menu Format Menu Link Menu File Menu The following are File menu commands and are specific to the row format building block Figure 3 1 Row Format File Menu File Menu Commands Description Rename Renames the row and description Delete Deletes a row column tree or catalog Print Row Format Prints the row format Table 3 1 File Menu Options for Row Format FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 58 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Row Format Menu Functions Edit Menu The Edit menu provides you with the standard Windows functions such as copy and paste as well as specific Report Designer functions Figure 3 2 Row Format Edit Menu File Menu Commands Description Cut Ctrl X Removes the selection from the current location and moves it to the Microsoft Windows clipboard Copy Ctrl C Copies the current selection to the Windows clipboard Paste Ctrl V Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard to the cursor position If the clipboard is empty this command is unavailable and appears dimmed
170. bilities 10 400 420 430 450 460 490 520 Common Stock Film Works 1150 TO 1199 240 Additional Paid In Capital 1200 TO 1249 542 Retained Earnings 1100 TO 1149 545 Year to Date Income NP 1300 TO 1349 547 548 YTD Income TOT 20 TO 546 550 Treasury Stock Film Works 1250 TO 1299 560 EQUITY Total Equity TOT 548 550 563 566 Total Liabilities and Equity TOT LIABILITIES EQUITY cs 567 573 PI 575 INCOME STATEMENT DES S7 DES 580 Net Sales NP 1300 TO 1349 595 NP 1350 TO 1449 610 Net Sales TOT 580 595 cs 640 Cost of Goods Sold 1450 TO 1499 Figure 3 15 Standard Totaling in Row Format Window You can pull in rows from anywhere in the current row format regardless of their location or inclusion in another total Total rows or detail rows can be used in any combination All TOT rows that fall within the range are automatically excluded This allows you to create a grand total by specifying the entire range of rows regardless of any intermediate subtotals The exception to this is if the TOT is in the first row of the range Formula Totaling CAL Whereas the TOT format code is oriented toward traditional financial reporting the calculation CAL format code is similar to a spreadsheet formula Using CAL you can perform calculations that involve individual cells multiplication and division or absolute amounts actual numbers included in the formula FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guid
171. box type 2200 Segment Ranges in the second row FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide In the From Acct edit box type 001 In the To Acct edit box type 004 47 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Working with Reporting Trees 4 Click OK to build a new reporting tree from the Chart of Accounts and display it in the worksheet FRx Desktop Tree Untitled 1 EJ File Edit Format Company Tree Options Admin Window Help Fabrikam Works Denver Branch Summary of All Units B Corporate Fabrikam Works Inc E ie nee ales g Corporate 4 amp amp 8 amp 0000 000 B Wholesale i e ae ranch Wholesale IC H corporate e gt Denver Service _Denver Sales _Denver Sales B Lab Retail Retail 8888 1100 001 B Studio Wholesale Wholesale amp amp 88 1100 002 Z gt San Francisco Br 9 Wholesale IC Wholesale IC RebRE 1 100 012 zs LE Corporate _Denver Service _Denver Service San Francisco Sa espa B Retail Lab Lab amp amp amp 8 amp 1200 003 E Wholesale F Studio Studio amp amp amp amp 1200 004 G gt San Francisco Se San Francisco Br San Francisco Branch GB Lab Corporate Corporate amp amp amp amp 2000 000 B Studio 5 San Francisco Sa San Francisco Sales Jl Retail Retail amp amp amp 8 amp 21 00 001 Wholesale Wholesale a amp amp amp amp 21 00 002 Francisco Se San Francisco Service Reporting Tree FRxDemo 6 Inthe
172. catalog ID A unique code that identifies a report in the catalog of reports The catalog ID can be up to 16 characters The following characters are not allowed Catalog of Reports The FRx component in which row formats column layouts and reporting trees are combined to create a financial report Report elements such as headers footers presentation of amounts output formats and so forth are defined in the Catalog of Reports CBR Change Base Row The format code CBR tells FRx what row you want to use as the base row for any percent calculations This base row remains in effect until another CBR format code is used within the same row format chain reports A process that allows you to run several reports together When you chain reports they run one after another Glossary check box A control that allows you to select an option A check box that is selected indicates the option is active A check box that is not selected indicates the option is not active A group of check boxes is not mutually exclusive meaning you can check more than one See also radio button child unit A unit in an FRx reporting tree that is a subsidiary to a higher level unit called a parent FRx can roll up data from child units to parent units to create summary reports code A unique name or identifier that is defined by the user and attached to a record of information for use in database management A code is often a record key
173. ccounting ledgers You might think of a database as similar to a filing cabinet that holds all the information for a company database management system An application program that supports the definition manipulation and control of a database date mask A format that standardizes how dates appear in the module Date masks often vary from country to country default Information that the system automatically enters in a box For boxes that can be edited the system enters the most common information For boxes that cannot be edited the system enters required information default company The company currently selected for processing The company code displays in the status bar You can change companies from the Company menu default printer The printer chosen through the Printer Setup dialog box as the default When no other printer is specified the system sends print jobs to the default printer Glossary detail level A selection in the Catalog of Reports that refers to the level of detail in a report The choices are financial report typically a high level summary based on the row format account detail report displays the account detail balances that make up the financial report and transaction detail report provides the most detail down to the transaction level detail unit A reporting unit that draws information directly from the general ledger See also child unit reporting unit summary unit
174. ccounts to display the Add 3 Rows From Chart of Accounts dialog box Add Rows from Chart of Accounts T Mask Overview O Description Natural Location Division Department Hitt Hatt AM RSE All RHH Starting row code 1100 Increment each row by fo crost The Description boxes contain descriptions for the segments of your account code These descriptions vary according to how the account code was set up in the general ledger The Account Mask determines which account segments are stored in the row format If you use a reporting tree the account mask also determines which account segments are pulled from the reporting tree e The symbol tells FRx to not include that character in the row build process e The amp hook symbol tells FRx to include that character in the row format Note The and amp symbols work on a character by character basis although you typically use the same symbol within a segment The default mask defined from your general ledger has amp symbols in the natural segment and symbols in the responsibility segments To create a master format accept the default mask by clicking OK Note Keep in mind that if you plan to use the same format for more than one department you don t need to repeat this procedure for each department Defining the Account Segments in a Row Format To define the account segments in a row format 1 On the File menu point to New and the
175. characters to use for the width of this column on the printed report Column width is particularly important for Amount CALC WKS and GL Desc and Fill type columns If the column width isn t specified here Report Designer uses the default widths of 30 characters for the description columns 14 characters including cents commas and parentheses for Amount columns and 10 characters for a Fill type column Extra Spaces Before Column You can use this option to separate groups of columns or to add a few spaces before the description so the description column is indented from the left justified titles in the report The default number of spaces between each column is two as defined in the Formatting tab in the Report Options tab in the Catalog of Reports To change the default enter the number of extra spaces to be placed in front of a given column Special Format Mask Use a special format mask to assign decimal currency and percentage formatting to your column amounts FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 157 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail To assign a special format mask to your column amounts 1 Inthe column you want to assign the mask double click the Special Format Mask cell in the Column Detail section to display the Select a Format dialog box HHH HHO HHH HHO SH HHH AHO GH HHH HHO it AHH HEO OO LHE HHH HHO ODO SH AHH AHO O0 H HHH HH0 00 0 0 00 2 Select a format an
176. chased or installed the Report Server application component Table 7 4 Window Menu Commands FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 228 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog of Reports Toolbar Catalog of Reports Toolbar The Catalog of Reports window displays some additional buttons not located on the main toolbar For main toolbar button descriptions see The Toolbar on page 12 of this guide Toolbar Button Description E Opens the row format that is associated with the currently displayed Catalog ID For more information see Edit Menu on page 226 TT El Opens the column layout that is associated with the currently displayed Catalog ID For more information see Edit Menu on page 226 Opens the reporting tree that is associated with the currently displayed Catalog ID For more information see Edit Menu on page 226 Opens the row format column layout and reporting tree that are associated with the currently displayed Catalog ID BE Opens FRx DrillDown Viewer if a report has already been generated to DrillDown Viewer for the currently displayed Catalog ID H Opens Report Schedule only if you installed Report Server Note Schedule is a Report Server feature This option is unavailable dimmed if you have not purchased or installed the Report Server software component Generate Report Generates the selected report If you installed
177. cludes spaces as part of the account structure FRx inserts an underscore _ character in place of the space by default If you want to substitute another character for the underscore you need to change it in the FRx System Preferences dialog box For more information see the FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide A row format built from the chart of accounts provides a base to which you can add e Totals e Calculations e Formatting Opening a Row Format To open a new Row Format 1 From the FRx Control Panel select the Row Formats building block 2 Select one of the following options e Select a row format from the Open Row dialog box and click OK e Click New to create a new row format Modifying Row Formats Each column in the row format contains specific codes links text general ledger data or other infomation that can be modified to control the way the row generates output in the resulting FRx report The topics in this section describe the functions features and available options for each column in the row format FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 70 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats This section contains information and instructions on the e Row Code Column e Description Column e Fmt Code Column e Related Rates Rows Unit Column e Normal Balance Column e Print Control Column e GColumn e Link Column Row Code Column The numbers or labels in the Row Code column ident
178. column layout 1 From the Report Designer Control Panel click the Column Layouts icon A list of available column layouts appears in the Open Column dialog box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 307 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports 2 Double click a column layout to display the selected column layout in the Column Layout window a Col CURR amp YTD Column Headers S _ eae a E ae ES z EUROALL Column Detail a ESI Month EUR EUR EUR EUROALL EUROALL 3 From the Column Layout Currency Translation menu select Activate DAX Currency Translation Note You must activate currency translation from the Column Layout window menu so that FRx will recognize currency codes in the column layout and row format 4 Select from the following options To Do this Use currency rate 1 Double click the cell in the Currency subtype ID ina GL type Display detail row of the GL type column column and select the currency code from the displayed list 2 Type the currency rate subtype ID in the Currency Rate Subtype ID row Note The code identifies which currency rate subtype ID to read from the general ledger Use the currency rate 1 Double click the cell in the Currency subtype ID ina TCURX Display detail row of the TCURX type transaction detail code column and select the currency code column from the displayed list 2 Type the currency rate sub
179. count segment of your general ledger to filter the displayed list in the From Account range or Individual Account or Account Set cell Combining Accounts with Ranges Specific accounts ranges of accounts and wildcards can be combined in a row The following example assumes a four character natural code 6210 6220 6420 TO 7999 7177 GL Account Links Formula 6210 6220 6240 717 From Account range or th oy Za pa et Individual Account or To Account range segn Account Set Natural Natural Natural Natural Natural Account Code CO Account Type Account Sets Row Modifier Save As Let E E Lox Cancel Clear Figure 3 26 GL Account Links Dialog Box Combining Accounts and Wildcards Linking to Account Types Account types are category or group names defined in your general ledger that combine or relate various account codes For example the account type Assets might include all the cash accounts as well as accounts receivable Using account types helps reduce report maintenance and shows a big picture perspective To link to an account type 1 From the row that you want to link double click the Link to General Ledger cell 2 Inthe GL Account Links dialog box the Account Code option is selected by default select Account Type Note When you select Account Type the GL Account Links dialog box displays specific account type fields 3 Double click an Account Type cell FRx Report D
180. counts Payable 84 253 00 Accrued Liabilities 137 867 00 Total Current Liabilities 222 120 00 Leases Payable 10 100 00 Notes Payable 142 794 00 Long Term Liabilities 152 894 00 Total Liabilities 375 014 00 Capital Stock 50 000 00 Additional Paid In Capital 500 269 00 Year to Date Income 377 152 13 Retained Earnings 197 100 00 Shareholders Equity 1 124 521 13 Liabilities and Equity 1 499 535 13 Figure 3 14 Tabular Balance Sheet Link Column This column identifies the sources for the numbers that make up the row The amounts in this column contain general ledger account codes Normally the amounts in this column contain general ledger account codes but you can also link to e Other row formats e XBRL taxonomy e Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1 2 3 worksheet When this link type The description on the Link column changes is selected to GL all years Link to General Ledger Table 3 4 Link Types and Descriptions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 84 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats When this link type The description on the Link column changes is selected to GL specific year Link to General Ledger Year GL Year Row Format Link to Row Format External Worksheet Link to Worksheet GL Worksheet Link to GL Worksheet XBRL Taxonomy XBRL Taxonomy us gaap ci 2003 07 07 xsd Table 3 4 Link Types and Descriptions The column description changes depending on
181. criptions of the menu commands for each of these reporting tree menus are listed in the tables that follow File Menu The File menu is shown in the following figure Figure 6 8 Reporting Tree File Menu FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 190 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar Icon Menu commands for the File menu include common functions within the reporting tree such as renaming deleting printing and so on File Menu Command Description Rename Opens the Rename Tree dialog box that allows you to rename the tree Delete Deletes a row column tree or catalog Print Reporting Tree Opens the Print Tree dialog box where you can then select either Worksheet View to print the worksheet or Tree Listing to print the tree Table 6 2 Reporting Tree File Menu Commands Edit Menu The Edit menu is shown in the following figure Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Clear Find Ctrl F Replace Ctri R Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accts Description Ctrl D Delete Unit Insert Unit Row Format Column Layout Reporting Tree Zoom F3 Figure 6 9 Reporting Trees Edit Menu You can use the following Edit menu commands to perform edits within the reporting tree Edit Menu Command Description Cut Removes the selection from the current location and moves it Ctrl X to the Microsoft Windows clipboard Copy Copies the current select
182. cted output method and send it directly to your default printer select this check box This box appears dimmed if you select Printer from the Output box Chain to Catalog ID To automatically run another report whenever the current report is generated select the catalog ID here To do this click the Chain to Catalog ID arrow In the Select Catalog for Display dialog box select the catalog ID to run after this one and click OK You can chain many reports together using this feature For more information on chaining reports see Chaining Your Reports on page 280 Restart Page Numbering To use individual report page numbering for each chained report select this check box For example if Report A has page numbers 1 through 5 and Report B has page numbers 1 through 8 this option retains each report s page numbering If you do not select this option the page numbers would be through 5 for Report A and pages 6 through 13 for Report B Printing Reports If the Report Server application is installed this release of Report Designer lets you select a local printer or a server printer from the Catalog of Reports This feature gives you more flexibility when you print reports Local printer selections apply to the current Report Designer session Valid server printer settings remain in effect until you change the settings to another valid server printer When Report Server is installed and you select Printer as the output option from
183. cy Code allows you to restrict a column to a specific currency The Currency Display allows you to specify whether the originating currency amount or a converted functional amount displays in the report Using the NAT Currency Display in combination with the Currency Code prints the natural originating currency amount The FUNCT Currency Display prints the amount converted to the functional currency or home currency for that company Note When DAX Currency Translation is active both the Currency Code and the Currency Display selection lists display the three letter ISO Currency codes If your accounting system supports more than one exchange rate per currency the Currency Rate Subtype ID code allows Report Designer to read the appropriate information from the general ledger This code can be used in conjunction with a currency display code in GL columns or in columns with transaction code TCURX Currency Code To restrict the column to transactions originating in a specific currency 1 Double click the Currency Code cell to open the Currency Key dialog box 2 Select a currency from the list as defined in your general ledger 3 Click OK to return to the Column Layout window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 167 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Currency Display To show the selected currency in its original form or a converted amount 1 Double click the Currency Display cell to display the
184. d New Clone Save Frere OOOO O d Use Posted Balances Ony Output Er a E js al nosis awa Acuse ende C Elese Dae Liked BI C CONSOLIDATED ConsoidatedB 5 8 2 From the Catalog of Reports window select the Use Row Format from Reporting Tree check box in the Row Format section This tells Report Designer to pull the row formats and worksheet file names from the reporting tree 3 Generate your report Note e If you do not specify a row format for each reporting unit in the tree then Report Designer uses the identified row format that appears dimmed in the Row Format box for those units by default FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 136 FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Creating Column Layouts Opening the Column Layout Window 138 Column Layout Menu Functions 140 Adding Column Headers 143 Adding Column Detail 147 Customizing Transaction Detail Reports173 Creating Tabular Reports 177 Chapter 5 In the column layout you define the contents of your report columns any calculations specific to your columns and column headings within your report The information in a column layout is combined with the information in a row format and optionally with reporting tree information that you specify and store in the catalog of reports Each column layout that you create can be combined with one or more row formats
185. d CEN rows in the worksheet file If you do not select this option only amount rows export to the worksheet Print Underscore Rows To include underscore and double underscore rows in the worksheet files Export Formulas Use this option only with worksheets to export formulas from the row format TOT and column layout to the worksheet Table 7 9 Worksheet Format Options e ASCII Options The following ASCII output options are available from the Output Options tab e Export to ASCII Comma Delimited to export your report to a comma delimited ASCII text file e Export to ASCII Formatted Text to export your report to an ASCII formatted text file This output type displays your data in aligned columns separated by FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 246 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab spaces Use this option to display reports on non Windows computers and terminals When you select one of these ASCII options the following output options display on the Output Options tab ASCII Formatted Text E BSRATIO TXT E Int and otne ASCII Options Description Maximum Lines per Page Use only with the ASCII Formatted Text to determine the number of report lines to print per page The ASCII Comma Delimited option creates a continuous report without page breaks and this option becomes unavailable or dimmed Print Headings Use to include your defined column and report h
186. d Taxes 1180 Accrued Liabilities 1180 Suspense Account DES ASSETS TAL ATO B A130 10 8130 C TO D A1030 T0 81030 CAL ATOB A160T0 B160 C TO D A1060 TO B1060 Cash Checking CAL ATOB A190 TO B190 C TO D A1090 TO B1090 Cash Money Market CAL ATO B A220T0 B220 C TO D A1120T0 81120 227 2200 2209 2350 2500 CAL ATO B A4250T0 B250 C TO D A1150 TO B1150 Total Cash CAL ATO B A280 TO B280 C TO D A1180 TO B1180 These rows use the CAL format code to pull the information from the non printing rows into the side by side report Figure 3 19 Row Format Windows for Side by Side Balance Sheet Using CAL Codes CAL codes must be on rows that do not include links to general ledger However you can place CAL codes on consecutive rows suppress printing of those rows and use the TOT command to combine them for report purposes Refer to rows 340 to 400 in the following figure as an example Cash at Beginning of Period Cash at Beginning of Year CAL E C340 Cash at Beginning of Period TOT 340 370 Figure 3 20 CAL Codes in Row Format Window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 89 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Totaling and Calculations Special Amount Formatting You can specify the exact print format for a CAL result by adding special amount formatting at the end of a formula This amount formatting is used regardless of what is entere
187. d Values in Calculations and Totals In Table 7 20 rounding is performed after totaling in each report By doing this report totals may appear to be incorrect In the example 3 USA report 1413 287 112 does not equal 1813 In example 4 the reports do not foot or cross foot to the parent This last example results in a report that appears to be wildly incorrect yet the final combined summary number 3315 the Total Current Assets Combined value is the only summary number of the four rounding examples that is precise when compared with the original non rounded number 3314 97 3315 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 266 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab Acct Tran Detail Tab The Acct Tran Detail tab contains a variety of options for formatting detail reports as shown in Figure 7 17 Acct Tran Detail tab Building Blacks Formatting A aa pHoris for account detail reports W Display GL account code IV Display account description from chart W Display row code IV Combine posted and unposted amounts Display underscore before totals IV Mark unposted accounts with Header label IV Include detail for non printing rows Options for transaction detail reports T Sort GL accounts by natural code I Subtotal by period T Suppress CBR calculation I7 Transaction rounding Figure 7 17 Catalog of Reports Window Acct Tran Detail Tab Options for Account Detail Re
188. d Viewing a Report ccccceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeseeetaeeeeeeeeneeeeesenaes 53 Completing Your Setup ccccecceeeceeeececceeeeeee cece eeeeccaeaecaeeeeeeeeeeeseeseceecneecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 55 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats seeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeneeeees 57 Row Format Menu Functions secerneren i E T 58 File Mentunar a a a aa a a a aaa a a 58 Edit Menu as icecicsaseavedecssanted cece deaneusaceda teapawatensteynpuaanneatednus dccapsnaadacagedaas cleavednadecenpaneaye 59 Format MN icisicsenciieti cist EEA 63 Link MON 2 22 0ecccce cece cece eee ee cece aaa a a aA Aa RAA E aE AEA a ai EAEE Aa 65 Row Format TOODA karpie a a 65 Account Code Segments aksis sisirin aa eN AA A E AASE 66 Building a Row Fom esnea O ihe 67 Building a Row Format From the Chart of Accounts esseeeeeeeeeeeeesseererssseerrssseeees 67 Defining the Account Segments in a Row Format ssseeesseeeeeesseeerrsssreerrsssrerrrsssrrens 68 Opening a Row Format e cceccarieniiiiiinn eia E ei ii 70 Moding Row Formats ksr E a E dieaedlan 70 Row Code ColuM cercei ieelata eddieetl aad pdaniinteespevdlesieesieien 71 Description COMMING aissard naa a aaa aa tenededhexvanddaneinesanagedss 71 Fmt Code Column 00 0 eeecccceeeeeenee ects iinei neeee ee eaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeiaeeeeeseaas 73 Related Rates Rows Unit Column cccccccceeeeeeeceeeeeetcneeeeeeecneeeeeesaaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaas
189. d click OK 3 Make any modifications to the special format mask in the Edit Bar Note For example a mask of will round to thousands When you generate your report this format is used for this column If no format is entered the default format identified in the Amount amp Date Format of the Company Information dialog box is used If you defined special formats in a row calculation and in the column the row formatting overrides the column formatting For more information about format masking see Amount Formatting in Chapter 2 of your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide Print Control Codes The Print Control codes allow you the option of adjusting the display or printing characteristics of the column To select a print option use the following dialog box Col is Balance Sheet Column in Mixed 1S BS Report Change Sign in Col if Normal Balance of Row CR Suppress Column if All Zeros Blanks Suppress Rounding Conditional Column Column is Printed only if Selected Condition is TRUE Period is LESS than Base Period Period is GREATER than Base Per Period is EQUAL to Base Per Period is LESS or EQUAL to Base Per Period is GREATER or EQUAL to Base Per Figure 5 15 Special Print Control Options FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 158 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail The following table describes each regular print control code Print Control 070o NP Descrip
190. d in the Catalog of Reports window or the International Formats dialog box In the following figure Row 160 shows how to divide the amount in B100 by the amount in C130 and print the result with three decimal places A B c D F G H Row Description Fmt R eae e Print Column Link to Code Code Hates Hows Unit Ctl General Ledger Salary Expense Officers Comp Formatted Results CAL B100 0130 0 000 Figure 3 21 Amount Formatting in Row Format Window If a format is specified it overrides any rounding selected for the report For more Note information about formats see Formatting Tab on page 261 and Entering International Amount and Date Formats in your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator 5 Guide Entering IF THEN ELSE Statements IF THEN ELSE statements can be added to any calculation that is valid for use with the CAL format Enter IF THEN ELSE calculation formulas in the Related Rates Rows Unit cell using the following format IF lt true false statement gt THEN lt formula gt ELSE lt formula gt The ELSE lt formula gt is optional IF Statements The statement following IF can be any statement that can be evaluated as true or false This can be a simple evaluation IF A200 gt 0 It can be a complex statement containing multiple expressions IF A200 gt 10000 OR A340 B1200 2 lt 1200 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 90 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Totaling and Calculations THE
191. d relationships in the Reporting Units dialog box on page 212 for instructions For more information on defining parent units see Defining Parent Child Relationships on page 211 After you defined the parent child relationship you can verify the parent unit for a specific reporting unit See To verify a unit s parent unit on page 212 for instructions This section contains information and instructions on e Promoting and Demoting Reporting Units with Drag and Drop e Promoting and Demoting Reporting Units with the Tree Menu e Assigning Parent Child Relationships in the Reporting Units Dialog Box Promoting and Demoting Reporting Units with Drag and Drop To promote and demote reporting units with drag and drop You can rearrange the organizational structure of the reporting tree by dragging and dropping a reporting unit into a new position When you drag a reporting unit the pointer s graphic icon changes to indicate the current position of the reporting unit The different graphic icons of the tree pointer are shown in the following table Reporting Description tree pointer Use this pointer to make the selected unit a child of the targeted unit a Use this pointer to make the selected unit a child of the targeted unit Table 6 9 Reporting Tree Pointer 1 Inthe Reporting Tree window on the graphical tree click a reporting unit 2 Drag and drop the unit to a new position FRx Report Designer 6 7
192. data and sample reports for two fictional companies Fabrikam Works Inc FW and Fabrikam Works Canada Inc FWC For more information on how to use this demonstration data open the READSAMP PDF file located on the FRx installation CD ROM Starting Report Designer Report Designer must always be started from Windows To start Report Designer from Windows 1 Click Start point to Programs then point to FRx 6 7 and click the Report Designer icon to display the Select a Company to Work With dialog box 2 Select one of the FRx sample companies FW or FWC and click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 5 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Understanding Report Designer An Overview Understanding Report Designer An Overview In Report Designer you keep the design of your reports completely separate from your general ledger As a result you can easily change a report without modifying your accounting system s general ledger As you use Report Designer you will see that every part of the system has been designed with flexibility in mind There are many options available and many different ways of achieving the desired results You can use the Report Designer default settings to quickly generate reports or you can customize your reports and change the settings throughout Report Designer This section contains information and instructions on e Building Blocks e User Security e Report Specification Sets e Presentat
193. default If you select the Combine Posted and Unposted Amounts option an asterisk appears at the transaction detail level for every unposted transaction If you do not select the Combine Posted and Unposted Amounts option an asterisk appears FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 267 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab at the account detail level for the unposted account balance as well as the transaction detail level for all unposted transactions Include Detail for Non Printing Rows To include non printing rows that you defined in the row format NP Print Ctrl select this check box the default Sort GL Accounts by Natural Code To sort accounts by their natural account code segments select this check box Suppress CBR Calculation If you include a BASE row calculation in the column layout you must specify a CBR row in the row format With these in place FRx attempts to perform the appropriate calculation on each row of the financial statement regardless of detail level The Suppress CBR Calculation option determines whether the calculation is performed if you select an account or transaction detail level report This option is selected by default because a report with many accounts can take longer to process Options for Subtotal Filtering Account Detail If you choose Financial Report under Detail Level Subtotal Filtering Account Detail options are unavailable The following list of options
194. detailed code descriptions Click the Font Styles arrow and then double click the font style to use for the column header To apply font styles across columns for example columns B to G do the following e Select the header rows for the columns e Then on the Column Layout window toolbar click the Font Styles drop down box on the toolbar e Select the style In the Spread from box type the beginning column letter and in the To box type the ending column letter Report Designer centers the text over this range of columns To use multiple header codes 1 2 3 4 Click Insert Code Select a code from the list Click OK Click Insert Code again and select another code from the list FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 145 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Headers You also can mix codes with text For example if you enter Period PER YR from SDATE to EDATE it results in a printed heading that looks like this Period 1 02 from 01 01 02 to 01 31 02 Creating Dynamic Conditional Headers You can create a report in which the column header changes dynamically For example if you use the conditional options P gt B P lt B and so forth you can design header options to reflect these changes by using the base period column as a starting or ending point for a header For example enter A TO BASE to center column A s header over the column that corresponds to the base period at report genera
195. dialog box Column Layout Specification Set FRxDemo C Cancel Descriptor o ooa In the Column Layout dialog box do the following e Inthe Name box type a unique name for the new column layout e Inthe Description box type a description for the column layout Click OK to save the file and return to the Column Layout window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 45 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Working with Reporting Trees Working with Reporting Trees The reporting tree is a visual representation of departments branch offices and profit centers within your company You can automatically build a reporting tree from information in your chart of accounts For additional information on reporting trees including how to add additional text or e mail addresses see Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Note e Although the reporting tree offers a great deal of power and flexibility you can also create a report without one This section contains information and instructions on e Viewing an Existing Tree e Creating a New Reporting Tree Viewing an Existing Tree To view an existing tree 1 On the FRx Control Panel click Reporting Trees to display the Open Tree dialog box Open Tree Consolidated Fabrikam Summary Departments by Region with Divisions in the Row Regional Fabrikam Tree Regional Fabrikam Tree Regional Fabrikam Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrika
196. dialog box select the starting reporting unit and click OK Note Leave this box blank to generate the entire reporting tree For more information on the Tree Options tab see Tree Options Tab on page 269 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 242 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab Output Tab Use the Output tab to change your report output Within the Output tab are three subtabs the Output Options tab the E mail Options tab and the Web Publishing tab Use these tabs to change your report output to specify e mail options or to publish a report to a Web repository Output tab The Output Options tab in the Catalog of Reports window is active by default Cashflow Figure 7 9 Output Options Tab in the Catalog of Reports This section contains information and instructions on e Selecting Report Output Options e E mailing Reports e Publishing Reports to the Web FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 243 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab Selecting Report Output Options Use the Output Options tab to select the following specific report output options and settings Report Output Options Use to select a report output method To select your report output method use the Output drop down list shown in Figure 7 10 Printer b DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML HTML via Excel 2000 XML XBRL Excel 5 or above via OLE Lotus WK1 Excel
197. displays sample current and year to date periods FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 154 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Adding Calculation Formulas When the amounts in a column are the result of a calculation you must enter CALC in the TYPE cell and type the formula in the Cale Formula cell on the Column Layout window You can add subtract multiply or divide columns You can also perform any type of complex calculation including IF THEN ELSE statements within the formula Add Subtract To add or subtract amounts in the columns specify the column letter and the plus and or minus sign For example A B or A B C You can also use the TO separator to add a range of consecutive columns for example A TOD The following Column Layout window displays a Calculation column and formula SAE a a ee Ee Se ae ee Annual Sa Actual 1 O 3 Month Momh Monh Month Month Month Forecast Te Sa ees E GL GL WKS CALC ate actual This adds all the iE use column amounts 1 12 ae CUR CUR that print within the range of 0 10 column B to column Y and places the total in the column Z Figure 5 14 Calculating Amounts in Column Layout Window Column calculations can refer to any other column including subsequent columns Report Designer resolves the dependent columns first If a column refers to another column that in turn refers back to the current column a circular reference error result
198. ditional text in the report header or footer 1 From the Catalog of Reports window click the Page Options tab 2 Click the Headers Footers tab Balance Sheet _ TXTDATE BLANK Defaut x _Sles Select either the Page Headers or Pages Footers option Click the Left Center or Right cell to select the text alignment Click the Codes arrow and select Text from Reporting Tree UNITT Note Select the actual unit text entry number indicated by the symbol For example UNITT4 specifies the fourth additional text entry for the reporting unit Click Save Click Close FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 283 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Scheduling Reports for Processing Scheduling Reports for Processing If you installed the Report Server you can use the scheduling function to schedule reports to process once or on an hourly daily weekly monthly or yearly basis The Schedule icon is available on the toolbars for all Report Designer windows For complete details on using the scheduling function refer to Chapter 2 of the FRx Report Server 6 7 User s Guide The Report Server also discussed in detail in the FRx Report Server 6 7 User s Guide is a separate product that serves as a high performance report processor After installing the Report Server you can use the it to generate reports As a result you can continue working on your local workstation while the reports run on the
199. e and Security FRx Report Server F Rx Report Server 6 7 User s Guide DrillDown Viewer FRx DrillDown Viewer and FRx Report Launcher 6 7 and Report Launcher User s Guide FRx Report Manager FRx Report Manager 6 7 User s Guide FRx WebPort F Rx WebPort 6 7 User and Administrator s Guide Table 2 1 FRx Related Chapters and Guides FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 55 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Completing Your Setup FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 56 FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Creating Row Formats Chapter 3 Row Format Menu Functions 58 A row format is a template that specifies the structure of each line in an FRx report For Row Format Toolbar 65 example row formats specify Descripti lines i fi Account Code Segments 66 DAON tow sor Ines am a Oeo example Cash and Total Revenue Building a Row Format 67 e All totaling and inter row calculations e The general ledger codes or links to row Modifying Row Formats 70 formats or external spreadsheets Totaling and Calculations 86 This chapter explaing how bao mne i General Ledger Account Codes 94 ane an the one a Report Designer building block Assigning Currency Codes 111 Automatic Rounding for Balance Sheets112 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 57 Chapter 3 Cre
200. e See row 130 e Enter the company and unit code to restrict the calculation to SALES units in the ACME company only See row 160 e Enter the full hierarchy code from the reporting tree to restrict the calculation to a specific unit See row 190 D A B E H Row Description Fmt Related Link to j O im i GeKcel eens F100 Net Sales 4272 130 Any Sales Unit CAL IF UNIT SALES THEN 100 2 y 160 Any Sales Unit for ACME CAL IF UNIT ACME SALES THEN 100 2 E 190 Uses H Code CAL IF UNIT SUMMARY ACME WEST COAST SALES THEN 100 2 J220 Figure 3 23 UNIT in Row Format Window You can double click the Related Rates Rows Unit cell to access a list of reporting trees Once you select a reporting tree you will see a list of reporting units from that tree Select the reporting unit you want then complete the calculation formula Point and Click Totaling for TOT and CAL rows With point and click totaling you can select a consecutive or non consecutive number of rows and have FRx automatically insert the range of rows in a TOT or CAL row for you You use the arrow keys or your mouse to highlight the rows that you want to include in your formulas To create a formula using point and click totaling 1 From the TOT or CAL row click the Related Rates Rows Unit column 2 Click the sum button from the toolbar By default FRx selects the group of cells immediately above the selected TOT or CAL row to the preceding TOT or CA
201. e originating amount or a converted amount displays on the report e In TCURX type columns use Currency Display detail row to show the exchange rate for a selected currency on the report Note The Currency Display detail row functions differently when DAX Currency Translation is not active For normal FRx multicurrency reporting see Formatting Multicurrency Reports on page 167 The example in Figure 9 4 shows the code for euros EUR in the TCURX type Column C The resulting report displays the exchange rate for euros in that column The example uses the code for euros in the GL type Column D The resulting report displays amounts in euros in that column wal Col BalSheet_CT O 7 ee Exchange Rate Column Detail Type GL Calc etc Book Code Attribute Category Figure 9 4 Currency Codes in the Column Layout Window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 306 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports Note Activate DAX Currency Translation from the Column Layout menu before you use currency translation functions in the column layout You must also activate DAX before you run a report that includes the currency translation function To select the display currency in the column layout 1 From the Report Designer Control Panel click the Column Layouts icon A list of available column layouts appears in the Open Column dialog box 2 Double click a column layout to di
202. e 63 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Row Format Menu Functions 3 Choose from the following options To Do this Apply a font font style 1 Click Font or size 2 Make your selections and click OK Apply shading to the 1 Click Shading style 2 Select or define the background color that you want to use and click OK 4 Click Save 5 Click Close Column Width This command opens the Column Width dialog box Use this box to specify the width of a column on screen as well as to hide or unhide it Column Width R Column Width 20 Hide Unhide Cancel Figure 3 6 Column Width Dialog Box You can also change the width of FRx columns with the mouse using the same technique as in Windows based spreadsheets like Microsoft Excel Drag the column edge until the column is the size you want it to be To modify the column width when printing the report you need to adjust it in the column layout For more information see Column Width on page 157 To change the width of a column in the row format 1 Type a new number in the Column Width box 2 Click OK You may wish to hide one or more columns so that they are not visible on the worksheet To hide one or more columns 1 Select the columns 2 On the Format menu click Column Width to display the Column Width dialog box 3 Click Hide 4 Click OK To unhide all hidden columns Click Unhide in the Column Width dialog box FRx Report Design
203. e 86 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Totaling and Calculations To use the CAL format code enter CAL as the Fmt Code and place a formula in the Related Rates Rows Unit column The formula can include numbers and operators and and parentheses in any combination Note You can only export TOT formulas to a Lotus or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet CAL formulas will not export Indicating All or Specific Columns When you enter a row code you must also enter either a column letter for example A120 for column A row code 120 or use the character to indicate all columns for example 120 for all columns row 120 Any number that doesn t have a column letter or character is assumed to be a real number See the following figure for examples of these rules e Inarow the number of row codes and parentheses is limited to 256 characters For example the formula in row 480 is a valid formula e Ifyou reference a row with a label row code you must separate the column letter from the label with a period See row 680 e The character does not require the period separator See row 720 D a me a eee Code Code General Ledger f2 Salary Expense 5000 160 Officers Compensation 5050 200 Depreciation Expense 5100 240 Office Expense 5200 _ 220 Supplies Expense 5225 _ 320 Maintenance Expense 5240 360 Rent Expense 5250 440 J480 Complex Calculation CAL A120 160 TO 240 C240 D360 A
204. e Display Reports With No Active Rows Select this check box to generate a report for every unit of a reporting tree even if there are no amounts displayed Empty reports may still display if title rows or other format rows are present To prevent extraneous titles from printing on a report without amounts relate each descriptive row to an amount row For more information on relating rows see Relating a Format Row to an Amount Row on page 81 e Allow Column Text Overflow To allow text to overflow to the next empty column select this check box the default e Extra Lines Between Rows To change the number of lines that print between your report rows enter a number here e Spaces Between Columns To change the default number of spaces that print between your report columns enter that number here You can also enter the number of spaces before a column in the Extra Spaces Before Col cell in the column layout FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 262 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab Rounding options Rounding of Amounts M M Vv lv TL Figure 7 16 Rounding Options in Formatting Tab The options in this section of the screen allow you to select the level of rounding used in your report to round row values before totalling a report and to round the reporting unit values before rolling up into a summary unit Rounding This box displays the type of rounding used in your
205. e Expense Service Rent Expense Travel Expense Advertising Expense Commission Expense In our example this is Row Code 560 Click the Description column Then in the edit bar type Total Operating Expenses Click the Fmt Code column and select TOT from the list Click the Related Rates Rows Unit column O a A O N In the edit bar use the formula row code range lt Salary Expense row code gt TO lt Commissions Expense row code gt In our example row format the total operating expense formula is 280 TO 550 7 Inthe next row click the Fmt Code column and select Fmt Code from the list This places an underline beneath the Total Operating Expenses row in your report FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format 8 Review your formatted Total Operating Expenses rows D Row Sean Fit eerie Nom Pive Cob Linkto Code Code Bal Ctrl n General Ledger 266 Operating Expenses DES 273 DES 280 Salary Expense 5000 310 Officers Compensation 5050 340 Depreciation Expense 5100 370 Office Expense 5200 400 Supplies Expense 5225 430 Maintenance Expense 5240 460 Rent Expense 5250 490 Travel Expense 5300 520 Advertising Expense 5350 550 Commission Expense 547 555 560 Total Operating Expenses TOT 280 T0 550 565 aa Income Rows After modifying the revenue and operating expenses rows in your sample row format you can compl
206. e allows you to both browse reports and drill down into specific reports to the detail available There are two ways to add reports to the WebPort First authorized FRx users can send report output to the WebPort from Report Designer and from FRx Report Launcher Second FRx Administrators can use the WebPort Administrator function to add change or delete reports folders and users For information about using the WebPort Administrator functions see the FRx WebPort 6 7 User and Administrator s Guide FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 255 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab If you are authorized to do so in FRx Security you can send report output to the WebPort from Report Designer Catalog of Reports or from Report Launcher Catalog Run Properties The Publish to Web option is available only for XML and Enhanced XML output types Web Publishing tab Figure 7 12 Catalog of Reports Window Web Publishing Tab Select the Web Publishing tab to publish your report to the Web Use the following options to specify a Web location folder name and report name e Web Location To specify the Web location on your server type the path of the WebPort in this box or click the arrow and browse to select the WebPort repository file repository xml e Folder Name To select the folder in the WebPort to which you want to save the report type the name of the folder in this box If you type the name of a folder
207. e arrow to display the Periods and Dates dialog box Periods and Dates Base Period This information is not saved with the catalog record Base Year 2004 Rebuild FRx GL indexes Period Covered For the Seven Months Ending Report Date uy 31 2004 Default Base Period z W This information is saved with the catalog record In the Base Period box enter the period that you want the report to use e Inthe Base Year box enter the report fiscal year e The Period Covered and Report Date descriptions change based on your previous selections you can click in the boxes and edit the text as needed This text appears in your report header e Ifyou want to save a base period with this report click the Default Base Period arrow and select or edit the available options For more information see Specifying Report Periods and Dates on page 233 Click OK to return to the Catalog of Reports Window On the Building Blocks tab do the following e Inthe Row Format list box select a row format and click OK e Inthe Column Layout list box select a column layout and click OK To generate the report with a reporting tree select a reporting tree from the Reporting Tree list box and click OK On the File menu click Save FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 276 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports Generating a Report You can generate a report in two ways on the Report Server or locally on a workstation
208. e document You must select No Rounding in the Catalog of Reports Report Options Formatting tab XBRL instance documents are generated differently for reports with and without trees as described in the following scenarios e Ifareport without a tree yields data then one instance document is created using the filename found in the File Name field of the Catalog of Reports e Ifareport with a tree yields data then a separate instance document is created for each unit selected for reporting The filenames for the instance documents will use the name in the File Name field of the Catalog of Reports plus the unit title description from the tree If there is more than one unit with the same unit title description in a tree the name will be appended with a number and increased by one for every occurrence to create unique filenames For example Denver Sales Denver Sales1 Denver Sales2 and so forth e Ifareport with a tree is generated and at least one selected unit in the tree yields data then an instance document is created for every selected unit whether the unit yields data or not The instance documents for the units that yield no data are generated with zero amounts written to the item tags e Ifareport with or without a tree is generated and yields no data then no instance document will be created and FRx displays the message This report yielded no data No Instance Document will be created e Ifareport with or without a
209. e following list describes each column type e GL Select the GL code to display data from the general ledger A GL column can also display external worksheet data when you use a Link to GL Worksheet or Link to Worksheet column in the row format When you select GL this places four default settings in the next four cells Figure 5 8 Column Detail for TYPE GL You can change these default settings as needed FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 148 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail e CALC Select this code to display the result of a simple or complex calculation See Adding Calculation Formulas on page 155 e DESC Select this code to place the row description you entered in the row format Although this column is frequently the first one on the report it can be placed anywhere e ROW Select this code to display the individual row codes from the Row Code column in the row format e ACCT Select this code to display the general ledger account codes that apply to each row For account and transaction detail reports the full account code prints For financial reports and high level reports that may be a combination of several accounts the GL link from the row format for example 1100 TO 1200 prints e FILL Select this code to fill the cell with a character that is enclosed in single quotes If you don t enter a character Report Designer leaves the column blank For example to fill a
210. e general ledger e The higher level summary units simply roll up summarize information from the department detail units Multiple Reporting Trees Since you may have more than one way of looking at your company FRx allows you to create an unlimited number of different reporting trees Each tree is completely independent so it can contain any combination of departments and summary units By simply rearranging the structure among the reporting units you can create immensely different trees This allows you to use the same row format and column layout with each reporting tree and print a totally different financial report layout within minutes For example the following figure is basically the same reporting tree as the one shown previously but with the reporting structure changed to develop an organizational structure by business function instead of by location These two trees demonstrate different perspectives of company operations FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 182 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Reporting Trees If you create several such trees you can print a series of financial statements each month that analyze and present your company s operations in a wide variety of useful ways Summary of All Units Sales Division Service Division SN r Retail Sales m Wholesale Sales m Lab Services m Studio Services _
211. e in the Related Rates Rows Unit column of a CAL row add the symbol before each row code Otherwise FRx interprets the row codes as real numbers When you are finished review your formula and choose from the following options e Ifyou want to accept the formula press Enter e Ifyou want to revert to the original formula press Esc Note While the formula cell remains bordered you can press the Esc key and revert to the previous formula FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 93 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes General Ledger Account Codes The Link to General Ledger column is where you specify the general ledger account codes to include in each row of a report This section includes information and instructions on e Zero Balance Accounts e Defining an Account Code e Defining Only the Natural Code e Defining the Full Account Code e Entering General Ledger Codes e Using Wildcards and Ranges e Linking to Account Types e Account Sets e Using Account Modifiers e Restricting Rows with Book Codes e Using Account Attributes and Transaction Attributes in Rows Zero Balance Accounts By default FRx suppresses the printing of any row that does not have a corresponding general ledger balance This allows you to define all natural account code segments in your report row format and then use that one row format with any of your departments Defining an Account Code In the Link to Gener
212. e reporting unit To accomplish this you specify the restriction in a row containing a Calculation CAL format code The resulting amount is not rolled up to a higher level unit The calculation row can also refer to a general ledger row as described in the following example The calculation is recorded in the Related Rates Rows Unit cell of the row format as with the general ledger type restriction It requires the use of a conditional calculation beginning with IF UNIT such as IF UNIT SALES THEN 100 ELSE 0 This calculation places the amount from Row 100 in each column of the report but only for the Sales unit If there were multiple units named sales the amount displays in each of those units Additionally row 100 could be a general ledger row with a full account code and further be defined as non printing This prevents that amount from appearing in all units in the tree You could also limit the amount to a single column of the report by using a column letter reference rather than the sign in front of the row code number FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 91 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Totaling and Calculations You can specify a unit in a calculation type restriction in one of three ways See the examples in Figure 3 23 e Enter a unit code to include those units that match For example IF UNIT SALES allows the calculation for any unit named SALES even if there were several SALES units within the tre
213. e result in column C of that row The result is that each amount in column C is the amount in column B expressed as a percentage of net sales Similarly each amount in column E is the amount in column D expressed as a percentage of net sales FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 74 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats The format code CBR row 45 calculates a percentage of the base row for each row in the report The base row is identified in the Related Row Description Related Ea Com Link to eee ees Bal General Ledger Rates Rows Unit column Revenue row 140 the Net Sales row in this example The Net Sales 410 4103 Sales row is used for percent Sales Returns 4110 calculations until another Gules Discounts 4250 CBR row is defined See the following column layout Net Sales 190 220 250 COGS 450 4509 Gross Margin TOT 310 370 of of Month Net Sales Net Sales B BASE tells FRx to divide the amount in column B by the SE base row row 140 in the above row format and to put F the result in column C of that row D BASE This is the special format mask using this format the numbers pe ormat Mask O 0 0 0 H0 0 0 0 in this report display as a o percentage with one decimal point and negative numbers are in parentheses Figure 3 8 Using Base Rowi in Column Layouts Window For more information refer to your FRx DrillDown Viewer and FRx Rep
214. e spreadsheet requires a separate Link column because it has a different layout Identifying the Worksheet in the Reporting Tree Once you have created a Link to Worksheet column in the row format and specified the cells that are included in the report you must identify the linked column and external worksheet in a reporting tree An external worksheet can be imported into any unit in the tree To identify the worksheet link in the reporting tree 1 Inthe FRx Control Panel click the Reporting Trees icon to display the Open Tree dialog box Open Tree Consolidated Tree Summary Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrikam Work Tree using Sub Levels Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels Functional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels Consolidated Tree using Row Linking Sub Accounts with Departments in the Row 2 Inthe Open Tree dialog box select the reporting tree to edit FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 133 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets 3 Click the reporting unit that imports your worksheet data and then press F8 or click Tree Form on the toolbar to open the Reporting Units dialog box a Sfemnwors O B Fabrikam Works Summary ee 4 Under Optional Row Formats and Links click the Row Format Name arrow to display the Choose a Row Format dialog box Choose a Row Format Asset
215. eW eccceecceeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeetiateeeesenaaes 300 Setting Up the FRx System for Currency Translation c cceecseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaaes 302 Designing Currency Translation Reports cceceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeennneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaas 303 Activating DAX Currency Translation ecccccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeneaaes 303 Using Currency Translation Codes in a Row Format 0 ee ee eee eee eens 303 Using Currency Translation in the Column Layout c ceceeeeeeeeetereeeetenteeeeeeees 306 Using Currency Rate Subtype ID in Column Layouts ccceeeeeeeeeetteeeeees 307 Setting Currency Options in the Catalog of Reports eeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeees 309 Appendix A Answers to Common User Questions cccccsccssssssseseeeeeeeseeeeeeees 313 Frequently Asked Questions FAQS ecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaes 314 Incomplete Report Output ccccccceeee eee ceeeceeceee iaaa aaa iaaa 314 Reports Using Reporting Tree with Overstated NUMbETS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 315 External Worksheet Data Not Displaying 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetaeeeeeetneeeeeeees 316 Changing Report Descriptions ssessrssrssitrireidireiiiini aneian a 317 Specific Headings for Specific Column Layouts ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeees 317 Balance Sheet Totalling
216. eaaeee eee eaaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeenaeeeeeeeaas 3 Note and Warning Messages uu ceccccncececeeecceeeeeeeecnenseeeenneeseqsennseeeneneneteseeeeeenaneeseeenes 4 System REQuireMentS seess aaia Aa AAEE AADA NATAAN 5 Installing and Starting Report Designer eessseeessssesesrrnsssesnnnessssnnaaarnnnnestnannnaatennnenenennnaanee 5 Starting Report Designer c2icccaceteectnictievisladteaesdnnets edencaeeieenneiestoidia A 5 Understanding Report Designer An Overview sssssessisssesrisssteerrssetrrrssstrrrrssterrnssterenns 6 Building BIOCKS sscesesdcsscetet tas etencnadeeeee hte ceseel a 6 USErSOCUNILY descenso enndardniedeaae a iedeiei a vebiaeeeen anaes 8 Report Specification Sets oo ececcccececeeeeeeeceeeenceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseceaecaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseneasaaeees 8 Presentation Quality Reports ooo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeene eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 8 FRX DrilIDOWN Viewer wooo eee ceeceeeeeenee eee ee eee ee cette aaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeenennaees 9 ACCOUNT CodeS jexiiictienheheniaedienndiaes terion A 9 Getting Around in Report Designer eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeaas 11 The Report Designer Control Panel ccecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeseeenaeeees 11 The 1 Kore ol aereeerrrerrreerr err rere rerteerrr eri terercerr Treen reer treeevercerrerrer ceri A creer 12 Basic Report Designer Techniques and Keyboard Commands eeeeeee
217. eadings in the worksheet file Print Format Rows Use to include your defined format rows DES LFT RGT and CEN rows in the worksheet file If you do not select this option only amount rows export to the worksheet Print Underscore Rows To include underscore and double underscore rows in the worksheet files Table 7 10 ASCII Format Options e FRx instant OLAP Microsoft Server Cube Options Note o Only Administrators users who are included in the OLAP Administrator group in the NT server are authorized to select the FRx instant OLAP Microsoft Server Cube option FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 247 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab When you select this option the following selections display under the Output Options tab on the right side of the screen ations FRx instant OLAP Microsoft Server Cube CUBEOO1 E A description of these OLAP cube selections are listed in the following table Microsoft Server Description Cube Options Cube Name Type the name of the FRx instant OLAP cube file on the server Cube Description Displays the OLAP cube description Use integrated NT Use this option to use your NT network User ID and Security password If you use the Integrated NT Security option you do not need to use the User ID and Password boxes in the FRx instant OLAP Microsoft Server Cube Settings UserID
218. ear box 123 Generate Report dialog box 229 Generate Report icon 53 Generate command 225 GL Account Links dialog box 96 GL Column option 148 169 H Header Label option 268 Header Options dialog box 43 145 headers creating dynamic columns 146 entering column 145 using multiple codes 145 Headers Footers tab 236 258 headings combining codes in column 143 Help opening 13 historical rate source 274 hooks amp using in a reporting tree 185 using in a row format 68 97 using in an account mask 183 346 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide How to Add XBRL Element tags to the row format 291 Create a link to the XBRL taxonomy 289 Include XBRL_TAG column type in the col umn layout 293 Select a printer from the Catalog of Reports output options 252 Select a printer from the Print Immediately op tion 253 Select XBRL output type from the Catalog of Reports 296 Use a currency rate subtype ID in the column layout 307 HTML Via Excel 2000 option 244 IF THEN ELSE statements using in column layouts 157 using in row formats 90 Import WKS Format command 58 Import Export Path box 23 importing external worksheet creating a GL and WKS link 128 creating a link 130 Include All Units check box 269 281 Include Amounts in Future Periods option 272 Include Detail for Non Printing Rows option 268 Include Specific Number of Levels option 269 Include Unposted Accounts Only option 233 Include Unposted Activity Only option 50 Inc
219. ects and so on as the lowest detail level Add to these as many boxes as you need to show higher level divisions or regions Remember that each box represents a potential reporting unit in any of your reporting trees This master organizational chart will help you visually to create reporting tree flowcharts that group together various boxes reporting units to create a reporting tree You also will need to consider the best way to build your trees With FRx you can create trees using an automated build process or you can create them manually It is important to understand both methods before designing your trees This section contains information and instructions on e Understanding Building Reporting Trees Automatically e Understanding Building Reporting Trees Manually Understanding Building Reporting Trees Automatically FRx can assist you in building your reporting tree with its automated build capabilities Before you begin you will need to understand how to use the Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts dialog box We will look at some examples to show you how to complete the boxes and use the icons Additionally we will take a close look at the account masks entered in this window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 197 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Building Reporting Trees The following figure provides descriptions of each section in the Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts dialog box T
220. ed Values for Calculations and Totals Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree Accounts USA Canada Combined USA Canada Combined Cash 1413 1201 2614 1413 1201 2615 Accounts 287 100 387 287 100 388 Receivable Prepaid Expenses 112 200 312 112 200 313 Total Current 1812 1501 3313 1812 1501 3316 Assets Table 7 19 Using Rounded Values in Calculations and Totals In Table 7 19 row totaling is performed after rounding so each individual report foots correctly If you select Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree each row in the child unit USA and Canada also cross foots to the parent Combined unit If you clear the Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree option the child units do not cross foot to the parent 1812 1501 does not equal 3316 The following table contains two examples that do not use rounded values in calculations and totals Example 3 rolls up rounded values in the reporting tree Example 4 does not round before rolling up Example 3 Example 4 Use Rounded Values for Calculations and Totals X Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree Use Rounded Values for Calculations and Totals Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree Accounts USA Canada Combined USA Canada Combined Cash 1413 1201 2614 1413 1201 2615 Accounts 287 100 387 287 100 388 Receivable Prepaid Expenses 112 200 312 112 200 313 Total Current 1813 1502 3313 1813 1502 3315 Assets Table 7 20 Without Using Rounde
221. edger For more information about actual and budget amounts available from your general ledger see the FRx Report Designer Getting Started Guide To specify a Book Code Attribute Category 1 On the Column Layout window double click the Book Code Attribute Category cell for the column to display the Select a Book Code dialog box 2 Select a book code 3 Click OK to return to the Column Layout window Fiscal Year Use the Fiscal Year column detail to specify a fiscal year Type BASE to use the base year specified at report generation time To use other years specify the number of years relative to the base year using or Report Designer supports up to 10 years of historical data For example to specify e the prior year type BASE 1 or 1 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 151 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail e the seventh prior year type BASE 7 e the year after the base year type BASE 1 You can also double click the Fiscal Year cell and select from a list of options as shown in Figure 5 12 but you may need to edit the resulting entry Select the Fiscal Year for This Column Figure 5 12 Fiscal Year Options Thus if you select BASE you must change the to the appropriate number of years before the base year Although not recommended you can hard code a fiscal year by entering the four digit year Period Code Use a base period code to indicate the fiscal periods to incl
222. eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneneees 146 Adding Column Detail 0 cceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeenneee ee eecneeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeesesaaeeeeeeenaeeeeesenaees 147 Specifying Column Types iis scee sie neeteiei eet de eden eared dees Aer edenavies 148 Defining General Ledger Columns cccceeecccccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeseenaeeeeeeeeneeeeeesenaees 150 Adding Calculation Formulas seresa EENES 155 Adding Special Formatting Options c cece eeeenneeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeaas 157 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide iii Contents Adding Column Restrictlons ccisita iccecseseaccevesandsccecteseidacudetvenddcteavidesccucusdetsaceauvuadeces 164 Selecting a Reporting UNIE sci ieccceccescecgeaecpunetencs qpacgences ANEAN EESE EANES 165 Formatting Multicurrency Reports ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeesenaaes 167 ACCOUNT Filters ooo eeeeeceeeeceee eee eeete eee eee t eee sete antes eee eaae esses naaeeeeeeeaeeeseeeecaeeeeeeenaaees 169 Attribute Filters 2 2 ence ciaiedshicnadi nica eieieht A 170 Restricting Columns to Specific Dates 2 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 171 JUSCO efecto hotbed pectesat oh jececite pect ced ceeeeeeth ohjvedeuad Sasweoeretcavncdetiaayeeieaatieccueeees nnn 172 Adding the OLAP Description to the Column Layout 0 ec cceeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 173 Customizing Transaction Detail Reports 2 2 ecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaaes 173
223. elect Attribute Value dialog box From the Select Attribute Value dialog box select the ending attribute value in the range then click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 109 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes 11 From the Row Modifier dialog box click OK The GL Account Links dialog box appears with the account or transaction attributes in the Row Modifier box and displayed in the Formula box GL Account Links Natural Natural 12 From the GL Account Links dialog box click OK to return your selections to the Row Format window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 110 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Assigning Currency Codes Assigning Currency Codes For international reporting you can assign currencies in the row format and the column layout For the best performance we recommend that you assign the currency codes in the column layout Currency codes in the row format override the column layout currency code selections These currency overrides provide additional flexibility but may decrease the performance of FRx For more information on assigning currency codes in the column layout see Formatting Multicurrency Reports on page 167 To assign currencies in the row format 1 2 On the File menu point to Open and then click Row In the Open Row dialog box double click the row format that you want to assign currencies to Find the row tha
224. elect Replace to display the Replace dialog box Replace Use these options to modify your search In the Find what box type the text you want to find 4 Inthe Replace with box enter the text you want to replace it with 5 Click Replace to replace a single occurrence of the text or Replace All to replace all occurrences of the text Display only Boxes Display only boxes show information that may be useful to you in the function you re performing The information in these boxes is for viewing only BalSheet_Tab z This is an example of a display only box It displays a description of the selected row format Figure 1 7 Display only Box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 17 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus Record Control Boxes Some windows in FRx contain record control boxes A record control box looks like the following picture KIKI Catalog Records P gt i Find New Clone Save Delete Figure 1 8 Record Control Box Record Control Description Arrow Buttons Click the far right or left arrow buttons to move to the first or last alphabetically sorted record in the series for example the last catalog Click the inside arrow button to move to the previous or next record Find Click Find to display a selection dialog box that lists all related records in alphabetical order As you begin to type a record name into the Search box
225. elected period XR Suppresses rollup of amounts from a child to the parent unit Note You can use several codes in the same row To do so separate the codes with commas or select them with the mouse SR Suppresses a column from being rounded G Column Use this column to create a tabular balance sheet see Figure 3 14 or to restrict a row to certain report columns You can designate a particular report column to contain a row amount by entering the column letter for example A B C in the Column This code applies only to the selected row You also use this column with the SORT or ASORT FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 83 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats format codes For more information on sorting column values see SORT and ASORT on page 77 Fabrikam Works Inc Tabular Balance Sheet For the Five Months Ending May 31 2004 ASSETS Cash Checking 134 111 13 Cash Money Market 46 751 00 Total Cash 180 862 13 Accounts Receivable 166 164 00 Allowance For Bad Debts 2 184 00 Intl Corp Receivable 271 213 00 Net Accounts Receivable 435 193 00 Total Inventories 779 026 00 Prepaid Assets 3 289 00 Current Assets 1 398 370 13 Leasehold Improvements 69 600 00 Office Furniture And Fixtures 34 500 00 Office Equipment 37 700 00 Less Accumulated Depreciation 40 635 00 Net Fixed Assets 101 165 00 Total Assets 1 499 535 13 LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS EQUITY Ac
226. ent conversion rate at approximately 100 yen per dollar FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 168 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail FUNCT Currency Display with Blank Currency Code displays the sum of transactions originated in USD and YEN shown in US Currency Rate Subtype ID If your accounting system supports more than one exchange rate per currency the Currency Rate Subtype ID code allows Report Designer to read the appropriate information from the general ledger This code can be used in conjunction with a currency display code in GL columns or in columns with transaction code TCURX To use a currency rate subtype ID in a GL or TCURX column layout 1 Double click the Currency Display cell in a GL or TCURX column to display the Currency Type to Display dialog box 2 Select a currency code from the list and click OK 3 Inthe Currency Rate Subtype ID cell type the ID 4 Click Save Account Filters For columns whose TYPE is GL the Account Filter cell can restrict a column to specific general ledger accounts The account filter may contain one or more accounts that are the exact length of the full account code of the current company The filter is applied regardless of whether a tree is used You can use wildcard characters in any or all positions When you specify multiple accounts place a comma between accounts Note To enter an account filter double click to open the GL Account Links
227. enu click Edit Bar edit bar Table 1 4 Report Designer Standard Menus FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 19 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus To Select this menu and command Display the Report On the Window menu click Control Panel or press F6 Designer Control Panel Display all open On the Window menu click Tile Horizontal windows above and below one another Display all open On the Window menu click Tile Vertical windows next to one another Display all open On the Window menu click Cascade windows over one another Get help on Report On the Help menu click Contents Designer Get help on a box in On the Help menu click Context Sensitive Report Designer Find out the Report On the Help menu click About Designer release number and available windows system resources Table 1 4 Report Designer Standard Menus Continued FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 20 FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Creating Basic Reports with FRx Creating a Company 22 Creating a Sample Report 25 Building a Row Format from the Chart of ACCOUMS oa c0pel theta ee inaa s 26 Modifying a Row Format 28 Saving Your Row Format File 42 Creating a Column Layout 43 Working with Reporting Trees 46 Creating a New Catalog ID 49 Generati
228. eport Designer 6 7 User s Guide 252 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab 7 8 From the Printer Selections dialog box select one of the following options e To select a local printer for the current session click the Local Printer Selection arrow and select a valid installed local printer from the list e To select a server printer as the default for the report click the Server Printer Selection arrow and select a printer from the list Note The Server Printer Selection is saved to the catalog and affects all printer output until a different server printer is selected Click OK to accept the printer selection and close the Printer Selections dialog box Click Save to save the report record in the Catalog of Reports Selecting a Printer from the Print Immediately Option To select a printer from the Print Immediately option 1 2 3 4 Display the report record in the Catalog of Reports Select the Output tab From the Output tab select the Output Options tab Click the Print Immediately check box Note If you are generating reports locally the report prints on the default local printer for the workstation If FRx Report Server is installed the Select Printer button appears on the Output Options tab Click Select Printer to display the Printer Selections dialog box 8 Printer Selections r Local printer selection serverman 6LJ5West z This setting will only affect the cur
229. eport for in the Catalog of Reports The base period in the Catalog of Reports usually defaults to the current period So when you design column layouts think of base period and year as the current period and year Then when you start printing reports you can generate the same report with different base periods or years FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 10 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Getting Around in Report Designer Getting Around in Report Designer FRx is a Microsoft Windows application that takes full advantage of the Microsoft Windows 9x and Microsoft Windows XP environments If you are not familiar with Windows menus windows buttons multiple windows and other Windows features refer to your Windows documentation This section contains information and instructions on e The Report Designer Control Panel e The Toolbar e Basic Report Designer Techniques and Keyboard Commands e Record Control Boxes The Report Designer Control Panel When you start the Report Designer and select a default company its Control Panel appears on your screen 1 FRx Desktop Control Panel Hj File Company Options Admin Window Help Catalog of Reports Zoom for Selections Figure 1 5 Report Designer Control Panel This is the main Report Designer window The three building blocks Row Formats Column Layouts and Reporting Trees are at the top level Below these building blocks is the Catalog of
230. er FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 200 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Building Reporting Trees The symbols amp in the account mask tell FRx the amount of information to be drawn from the general ledger as detailed in the row format versus the information to be drawn from the reporting tree For information on specific account masks that are applied to reporting units when you create the reporting tree see Account Mask Structure and Segments on page 183 Account Mask Symbols Before you can create an account mask you must understand the symbols used and what each symbol tells FRx when creating a reporting tree e Plus signs tell FRx to create units in the reporting tree based on the detail for that particular segment Another way to think of this is that a indicates that you would like the option of displaying or viewing separate financial statements for each unit in this segment For example plus signs in the Location Division tell FRx to create a unit in the tree for each location division in the general ledger By default FRx places a in all responsibility or non natural account segments e Hooks amp tell FRx to go to the row format for this segment Hooks are typically used for the natural account segment of the account mask although hook symbols can be used anywhere in the account mask Note O You must enter the same number of hooks as the number of charact
231. er To chain reports together 1 From the FRx Control Panel click Catalog of Reports to display the Select Catalog for Display dialog box 2 Inthe Select Catalog for Display dialog box select the first Catalog ID that you want to generate and click OK 3 Click the Output tab 4 Click the Chain to Catalog ID arrow FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 280 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports In this example the CashFlow report is generated immediately after Tran_Dept In the Select Catalog for Display dialog box select the Catalog ID that you want to run after the current report and click OK The Catalog ID that you selected appears in the Chain to Catalog ID box Whenever you run the current Catalog ID this report runs immediately after it DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML ha BALANCE_SHEET_RATIOS FRD TashFlow 6 From the Output tab clear the Prompt for Output Type at Run Time box This allows the reports to process without interruption 7 Click the Building Blocks tab and choose from the following options If The current Catalog ID does not include a reporting tree Then do this Go to step 8 The Catalog ID includes a reporting tree 8 Click Save 1 Click the Report Options tab Click the Tree Options tab In the Reporting Unit Selection section choose from the following options e To process all units in the reporting tree click the Include All
232. er 3 Creating Row Formats Account Code Segments Account Code Segments The full account code refers to all the segments that exist within the chart of accounts structure The full account code can be broken down into the natural or main account code segment and the responsibility account code segments The natural or main account code segment is the most fundamental element of the full account code in your general ledger The natural account segment represents the primary purpose of the account such as sales travel expense and cash Most organizations create their full account codes with multiple responsibility segments that build on the same natural account segment The responsibility account code segments typically represent responsibilities such as location division department area task project product and other categories within the overall structure of the organization Responsibility account segments include all of the general ledger segments except the natural account segment Although a row format can contain any portion of the full account code the most flexible row format contains only the natural account segment With this type of row format you can use many different column layouts and reporting trees A row format used without a reporting tree when generating the report requires the row format to contain the natural account segment or the full account code When you define a report that includes a row format conta
233. er 6 7 User s Guide 64 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Row Format Toolbar Link Menu Although most row formats contain only general ledger account codes as the source of information any row format can also contain links to other FRx row formats to other fiscal years to XBRL taxonomy files or to Lotus 1 2 3 or Microsoft Excel spreadsheets Any format can contain links to several different sources The Open Link Window command opens the Links dialog box For more information about linking see Chapter 4 Row Format Toolbar The Row Format window has a set of toolbar buttons that display below the menus Common toolbar buttons are explained in Getting Around in Report Designer on page 11 in Chapter 1 The following toolbar buttons are exclusive to the Row Format window Toolbar Button Description Oy Opens the Links dialog box This has the same effect as selecting Open Link Window from the Links menu For more information see Link Menu on page 65 Applies a font style to one or more consecutive rows 1 Select the Description cell column B 2 Click the Font Style box to see a list of font styles To edit or add a new font style open the Font Styles dialog box by selecting Font Styles from the Format menu For detailed information about creating and editing font styles see Font Styles on page 63 Table 3 3 Row Format Toolbar Buttons FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 65 Chapt
234. er here applies to each row of the row format before it is added to the parent report For example if a child unit is to be divided evenly between two departments the amounts in each row would be multiplied by 50 before being added to the department report Note A reporting unit cannot have two parents To do this you would need to create another reporting unit with the same account mask to roll up the additional 50 In the Company box select one of the following To create a reporting tree for Do this One particular company Select the company code from the list Multiple companies with Select ANY from the list so that this tree can similar account coding be used for all companies Note If you use ANY FRx pulls the company information from the Catalog of Reports Typically the ANY company is set for the top summary level of the tree only All child branches have a company assigned to them Consolidated reporting Select the appropriate company code for each unit from the list to include in the reporting tree This directs FRx to the appropriate location and format of general ledger data for that company Note This information is defined in the Company Information dialog box available from the Company menu In the Title Desc box type an appropriate title for this reporting unit to display in selection windows for reporting units Note The reporting unit title also displays in the report header or
235. er row Using Account Attributes and Transaction Attributes in Rows Some accounting systems support account attributes and transaction attributes in the general ledger These attributes function like a virtual account segment and can carry additional information about the account or transaction such as account ID batch ID postal codes or other attributes of the account or transaction If your accounting system supports attributes you can use account attributes or transaction attributes as row modifiers in the Link to General Ledger detail of the row format For information about using account attributes and transaction attributes in the column layout see the column types A_LATTR and T_ATTR under Specifying Column Types on page 148 For information about using attribute filters in the column layout see Attribute Filters on page 170 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 107 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes To add account or transaction attributes using the GL Account Links dialog box 1 Double click the Link to General Ledger column to display the GL Account Links dialog box GL Account Links Natural No Natural Wo Natural No Natural No Natural No 2 From the GL Account Links dialog box click the Row Modifier arrow to display the Row Modifier dialog box Row Modifier es B 3 From the Attributes section of the Row Modif
236. er the information for each reporting unit on a separate row and in the appropriate column Starting with step 3 use the steps and information listed in the To build a reporting tree using the Reporting Units dialog box section to help you complete the worksheet The boxes in the Reporting Tree worksheet are essentially the same as the boxes in the Reporting Units dialog box shown in the instructions When the labels that identify these boxes differ between the worksheet and the Reporting Units dialog box the worksheet label is in parentheses after the dialog box label Note To speed the entry of information that is the same for some or all units you can use Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 205 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Manually After you build a new reporting tree or make changes to an existing one in the worksheet you will need to define parent units See Defining Parent Child Relationships on page 211 Building a Reporting Tree with the Reporting Units Dialog Box Before you begin make sure that you have reviewed the entire Understanding Building Reporting Trees topic including the information on building trees automatically and the information on building a tree manually See Understanding Building Reporting Trees on page 197 The following instructions guide you through the process of manually building a repor
237. eriod select this option When the report is generated FRx selects the reporting tree using the Report Date information Starting Unit The Starting Unit option for reporting trees allows you to select the levels down from the starting unit in the Tree Options tab Note Selecting the Starting Unit limits which branches of the tree appear when you generate the report To run the report for the entire tree click None in the Units for Tree selection box to remove this Starting Unit To select a reporting tree 1 2 Select the Use Reporting Tree check box Click the Reporting Tree arrow to display the Choose a Reporting Tree dialog box Choose a Reporting Tree Consolidated Tree Summary Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrikam Work Tree using Sub Levels Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels Regional Fabrikam Work Tree using Sub Levels Functional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels Consolidated Tree using Row Linking SubAccounts Sub Accounts with Departments in the Row In the Choose a Reporting Tree dialog box select a reporting tree and click OK The Reporting Tree list box automatically displays a description Then select the Effective Dates check box located on the right side of the Reporting Tree Description box to display the Effective Dates dialog box Effective Dates FormatName DatePeriod_ Use Period Numbers C Use Dates C
238. ernal Worksheets Figure 4 14 shows the row format that links the San Francisco Denver and Corporate Headquarters worksheets a E E R E H Link to Row Description Fmt n Norm Link to 3 Code Code Fates Rows Unit Bal General Ledger okies 100 Gross Sales C410 4109 AB CPO 130 Retums c m0 AG CPO J160 Discounts c 4250 A7 CPO 190 220 Sales TOT 100 130 160 _ 250 Cost of Goods Sold 450 4509 A10 CPO 280 310 310 Gross Profit TOT 220 250 340 DES 310 370 Compensation Expense 5000 5050 5400 A15 CPO A5 CPO 400 DES 370 430 Other G amp A Expense DES 730 480 Depreciation 5100 A17 CPO 430 Office Expense 5200 A18 CPO 520 Supplies 5225 A19 CPO 550 Maintenance 5240 A20 CPO 580 Rent 5250 A21 CPO 610 Travel 5300 A22 CPO 640 Advertising 5350 A23 CP0 670 Other G amp A A7 CPO 700 730 ___ Total Other G amp A Expense TOT 46070670 Figure 4 14 Row Format Linked with San Francisco Denver and Corporate Worksheets In this row format column I links with both the San Francisco and Denver worksheets and column J links with the Corporate worksheet In the previous figures row 370 Compensation Expense in the row format links to row 15 Total Comp in the San Francisco and Denver worksheets and row 5 Officers Comp in the Corporate worksheet The San Francisco and Denver spreadsheets each require only one link since they have identical layouts The Corporat
239. ers or digits in the row format The position of the hooks in the account segment need not be identical to the character or digit position in the row format For example the row format might have digits in the natural account segment and the first position of the third segment location In the row format the digits are entered sequentially e Wildcards instruct FRx to avoid building the details into the tree for that segment Unlike the plus sign a wildcard indicates that you would not like the option of displaying or viewing separate financial statements for this segment The following table illustrates the effect that plus signs hooks amp and wildcards have when reporting trees are built for Fabrikam Works Inc When you use this For these reporting units FRx creates these specific account mask account masks amp amp amp amp Corporate amp amp amp amp 0000 000 Denver Corporate amp amp amp amp 1000 000 Denver Sales Retail amp amp amp amp 1100 001 Denver Sales Wholesale amp amp amp amp 1100 002 Denver Sales Inter Company amp amp amp amp 1100 012 Denver Service Lab amp amp amp amp 1200 003 Table 6 8 Original Account Masks and Specific Account Masks FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 201 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Building Reporting Trees When you use this account mask For these reporting
240. es and then roll up the results into the summary unit To first roll up actual values and then round the results clear this check box When you use this option every report in your tree totals correctly foots However your summary report totals may not be the same as a similar summary report that does not use a reporting tree When you clear this option every report in your tree foots and there are no rounding differences in the summary unit However the individual reporting units may not add up cross foot to the summary total Note Selecting both the Use Rounded Values for Calculations and Totals and the Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree options may result in significant rounding differences FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 264 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab Examples of Combining Rounding Options When you round your reports you can choose to round the report values before or after totaling and you can choose to round the reporting units before or after rolling up to the parent unit The following table identifies the different rounding option combinations and the effect on rounding differences The term foot means to total down to the row calculation the term cross foot means to total across rolling up the child units to the parent unit Does this Does this report report foot cross foot Rounding Selections Significant X Use Rounded Values for Calculatio
241. esigner 6 7 User s Guide 100 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes 4 The Select General Ledger Account dialog box displays the available account types from your general ledger select an account type and click OK The account type displays in the Account Type cell and in the Formula GL Account Links Formula 130 1309 A 130 Account Code Account Type Account Sets Row Modifier Save As Edit E Cancel Clear 5 Inthe GL Account Links dialog box click OK The Link to General Ledger cell displays the new account type link FRx follows the account type link with the symbols A Account Sets You can create an Account Set by assigning a name to a group of accounts Then you can use this account set name in multiple row formats When a change to your general ledger requires the Account Set to change you can make changes to that set in one place only For example if you frequently indicate a range of accounts to link to your general ledger such as accounts 5100 to 5600 you might assign this range the Account Set name Travel and Entertainment After creating an Account Set you can select that set as your general ledger link You can also group existing account sets together into other account sets this is called nesting account sets For example after creating the Travel and Entertainment account set you might create a new account set called Selling Expenses Th
242. essing the spacebar shortcut keys A keystroke for example F3 or keystroke combination Alt H that provides a quick method for issuing a command without opening a menu specification set A database that stores row formats column layouts reporting trees and catalog IDs Each FRx company can have its own specification set or several FRx companies can share the same specification set spot rate The current daily currency exchange rate For reporting purposes a different current rate should be available for each balance sheet date summary unit A reporting unit that summarizes data from lower level units The lower level units can be either detail units or other summary units See also reporting unit detail unit suite Any report or group of reports that are defined using a reporting tree The suite can encompass from one to the total number of reporting units in the tree SYSDATA The SYSDATA button on the Organization Information dialog box accessed from the Admin menu defines the path and directory where you store FRx system files FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 340 table A database term for the structure that holds a collection of related records Tables consist of columns and rows of information taxonomy The XBRL taxonomy is a classification system for business and financial reporting data elements XBRL taxonomies can be regarded as extensions of XML Schema toggle An option that c
243. ete Deletes a row column or tree Print Column Layout Prints the column layout Table 5 1 Menu Options for Column Layout FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 140 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Column Layout Menu Functions Edit Menu Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl y Clear Find Ctrl F Replace Cirl R Description Ctrl D Delete Column Insert Column Row Format Column Layout Reporting Tree ZOOM er F3 Figure 5 2 Column Layout Edit Menu The options that are specific to column layouts are defined in the following table Edit Menu Command Description Description Use to edit a column layout description You can use upper and lower case letters numbers and spaces The Name and Specification Set boxes are display only boxes You cannot access or change them Note You must save the column layout in order to save the description change Delete Colu mn Deletes one or more columns as described in the steps following this table Insert Column Inserts one or more new columns as described in the steps following this table Zoom Opens a box specific dialog box of valid values To display a zoom list click the cell arrow or to use the keyboard move the pointer to the cell and press F3 Table 5 2 Edit Menu Options for Column Layout Delete Column To deletes one or more columns do the following 1 Click the gray box at the top of the column y
244. ete your row format with income categories Row Codes 570 640 shown in Figure 2 4 represent formatted income rows io Income from Operations Income From Operations TOT 238 560 mis Bs Interest Income 577 Interest Income Expense 5650 7000 578 3 Income Before Taxes 579 Income Before Income Taxes TOT 57010577 Income Tax Expense 580 Income Tax Expense 5500 610 Ea Figure 2 4 Accounts in Row Formats Window Row Codes 570 640 Note o The row codes in the sample report that you create could be different than those shown in this example Adding an Income from Operations Row using a Formula You can include a formula in the Related Rates Rows Unit column that calculates the income from operations The Income from Operations report row 570 in Figure 2 4 was added using the following instructions To add an income from operations row using a formula 1 Go to the row following the underline format row for Total Operating Expenses 560 Total Operating Expenses TOT 28070550 In our example this is Row Code 570 2 Click the Description column and in the edit bar type Income From Operations 3 Click the Fmt Code column and select TOT from the list 4 Click the Related Rates Rows Unit column FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 38 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format 5 7 Then in the edit bar use the formula lt Gross Margin row code gt minus lt
245. fier gt lt entity gt lt period gt lt startDate gt 2003 02 01 lt startDate gt lt endDate gt 2003 02 28 lt endDate gt lt period gt lt unit gt lt measure gt USD lt measure gt lt unit gt lt scenario gt ACTUAL lt scenario gt lt numericContext gt lt numericContext id P1M 2003 02 28 3 precision 18 cwa false gt lt entity gt lt identifier scheme gt Fabrikam Works Inc lt identifier gt lt entity gt lt period gt lt startDate gt 2003 02 01 lt startDate gt lt endDate gt 2003 02 28 lt endDate gt lt period gt lt unit gt lt measure gt USD lt measure gt lt unit gt lt scenario gt Budget_Best lt scenario gt lt numericContext gt lt numericContext id YTD 2003 02 28 4 precision 18 cwa false gt lt entity gt lt identifier scheme gt Fabrikam Works Inc lt identifier gt lt entity gt lt period gt lt instant gt 2003 02 28 lt instant gt lt period gt lt unit gt lt measure gt USD lt measure gt lt unit gt lt scenario gt ACTUAL lt scenario gt lt numericContext gt lt numericContext id YTD 2003 02 28 5 precision 18 cwa false gt lt entity gt lt identifier scheme gt Fabrikam Works Inc lt identifier gt lt entity gt lt period gt lt instant gt 2003 02 28 lt instant gt lt period gt lt unit gt FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 287 Chapter 8 Using Exten
246. g demoting 204 restricting columns 165 rows 80 Reporting Units dialog box 134 reports chaining 280 cloning 282 creating 274 generating exceptions 271 multiple 280 scheduling 284 responsibility account code Index combining with full account code 95 how FRx uses 10 segment 66 Restart Numbering with Every Unit option 270 Restart Page Numbering box 251 restricting rows with book codes 106 rolling up allocation percentage 207 Rollup Rounded Values in the Tree option 264 rounding automatic for balance sheets 112 CAL row format code 90 combining options 265 managing differences 263 reporting units 264 Rounding Adjustment row box row format 112 Rounding Adjustments dialog box 112 Rounding of Amounts options 113 row codes entering 71 renumbering 71 specifying in column layout 149 Row Format command 226 Row Format Description box 238 239 241 Row Format dialog box 62 Row Format Name box 134 row formats additional text 72 currency conversion codes 303 editing account codes 68 entering calculations 86 entering totals 86 linking another row format 116 combined GL and worksheet 124 external worksheet 124 general ledger 84 94 128 year to year 121 making a master 67 making flexible 66 menus Edit 59 File 58 Format 63 Link 65 opening 70 toolbar buttons 12 Row Period Offset option 128 rows deleting and inserting 60 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 349 renumbering 62 S Save button record control box 18 sav
247. g row formatting options The Separate Revenue from Expense Row Codes 252 to 259 in Figure 2 2 on page 28 are based on the following instructions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 33 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format To separate revenue rows from operating expenses rows 1 Go to the row following the underline format row for Gross Margin Revenue Sales 410 4109 Sales Returns 4110 Sales Discounts 4250 Net Sales 100 160 190 COGS 450 4509 Gross Margin 206 220 me In our example this is Row Code 252 2 Click the Fmt Code column and select DES from the list 3 Inthe next row repeat step 2 4 Review your formatting to separate revenue from operating expense rows 2 50 Revenue 75 Sales c 102 4109 Sales Returns fio Sales Discounts 4250 Net Sales 100 160 190 1 COGS i i 450 4509 Gross Margin FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 34 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format Operating Expenses Rows Now that the revenue portion of your income statement is formatted you are ready to modify the Operating Expenses rows in your sample row format Row Codes 226 565 shown below in Figure 2 3 represented formatted expense rows
248. g the Catalog of Reports sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 223 Catalog of Reports Window ccccccscccccesseecccceeseeecceeeeenseeceeeesseaceeeessacceceeeseeaaeceeennaaaes 224 Catalog of Reports Menu Bat sessista osae EEE OAA 225 File MON cai ctiecetesit feces ct eehdecect a E E en pebnddetes aades 225 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide iv Contents Edit MON nissin E A E veal 226 Catalog Memi sisson rea Oa a 226 Window Ment s2 cece decdeedt dtkiee ceveidacdeesiiaii R nica naede 227 Catalog of Reports Toolbar ccccececcecceeeeeeneeeeeeencneeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeneeneeeeeeeeaas 229 Catalog Identification ciic i cccecteeciscnuteessinceeeeesianneeeessssndicneessacecuetessaneeeeeesiacecenesaancetereeccs 230 Identifying a New Report eecccccceceseeccceeeeeeeceeeeeeneececeeenaaeceeenseaeaeceensneaeceeeeneaaees 230 Specifying Report Periods and Dates cc ccecccteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetneeeeeees 233 Tabs for Building and Formatting Reports cccecceceseeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeetineeeeeeetiaeeeeeenee 236 Building Blocks Tab ecccceceeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeseeenaeeeeeneeneeeeeeeaes 237 selecting Row Formats occci saccid aeeieiilies atest eared eet aet ented 237 Selecting Column Layouts 2 20 00 ceceeeeee eee ceeee teeter ee eee taeee eee eaeeeeeeteeeeseesneeeeeees 239 Selecting a Reporting TIOE siressa aneian EEEE ENEA EE EEEN 240 Output Tabir se
249. g to display the Formatting tab e Account Transaction Detail to display the Acct Trans tab e Tree Options to display the Tree Options tab e Advanced to display the Advanced tab e Currency Translation to display the Currency Translation tab Use Defaults Replaces the settings with the catalog ID s default settings Table 7 3 Catalog Menu Commands Window Menu The Catalog of Reports Window menu as shown in Figure 7 5 allows you to access the Report Server and Schedule Control Panel F6 Report Server Status Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical Cascade v 1Catalog Figure 7 5 Catalog of Reports Window Menu FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 227 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog of Reports Menu Bar The Window menu includes the following commands in the Catalog of Reports Window Menu Description Command Report Server Status Displays the Report Server Status dialog box where you can check the status of a report For additional information on this dialog box see your FRx Report Server 6 7 User s Guide Note This option is unavailable dimmed if you have not purchased or installed this software component Schedule Displays the Schedule dialog box where you can check the status of a report s schedule For more information on this command see your FRx Report Server 6 7 User s Guide Note This option is unavailable dimmed if you have not pur
250. g to them B This symbol indicates detail units Pictures and Text Shows the tree with names of reporting units indentations and symbols but with no connecting lines Plus Minus Picture and Text Shows the tree with names of reporting units indentations and symbols but with no connecting lines Additionally it identifies each branch with a plus or minus sign The plus sign indicates that there are levels that can be expanded below this branch the minus sign indicates that any levels that exist below this branch have been expanded Table 6 4 Reporting Tree Format Menu Commands Continued Tree Menu Use the Tree menu shown in the following figure to make changes to the graphical tree and display reporting unit information from the graphical tree You can also use the Tree menu to freeze or unfreeze the Description column in the reporting tree worksheet View Form F8 Promote Unit Demote Unit Expand All Expand Branch Collapse Branch Freeze at Description Figure 6 11 Reporting Tree Tree Menu FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 194 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar Icon On the graphical tree or worksheet select a reporting unit or branch if applicable and click one of the following Tree menu commands Tree Menu Command View Form Description Opens the Reporting Units dialog box displaying the selected rep
251. g tree use general ledger account masks this can cause a duplication of data Use account masks only in detail units The higher units should not use a mask these are used for summarization purposes only However using account masks in the summary units may be appropriate to represent corporate level expenses going directly into a summary unit Whenever you have problems with a report that includes a reporting tree run the report again without the tree If the numbers are correct you know that the problem is in the tree design FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 315 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions FAQs External Worksheet Data Not Displaying Q When I link a row format to both the general ledger and an external worksheet only the general ledger information pulls into the report Why doesn t the data from the worksheet display The data path defined in the reporting tree or row format could be incorrect or the catalog ID may not be pulling the information from the correct resource Report Designer must have the correct worksheet path to pull data from the external worksheet file The correct worksheet path depends on whether you have one or two Link columns Two Link Columns Link to Worksheet and Link to General Ledger If you have two Link columns Link to Worksheet and Link to General Ledger you must define the worksheet cells in the row format and the worksheet path in the reporting tree To check the wo
252. gn multiple column layouts to the report tied to an effective date or report period select this option When the report is generated FRx selects the column layout using the Report Date information To select a column layout 1 2 Click the arrow to the right of the Column Layout box to display the Choose a Column Layout dialog box Choose a Column Layout Sean o 3 Month Current and YTD YTD Balances Only YTD Balances Only Side by Side Tabular Balance Sheet Cash Flow Statement Consolidated Last 3 Months and YTD Act Bud Variance Consolidated Fabrikam Works and Canada Consolidated Fabrikam Works and Canada and ELIM Current And YTD Actuals v In the Choose a Column Layout dialog box select a column layout and click OK The Column Layout list box automatically displays a description FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 239 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Building Blocks Tab 3 Then select the Effective Dates check box located on the right side of the Column Layout Description to display the Effective Dates dialog box Effective Dates FormatName Date Period Use Period Numbers C Use Dates Cancel Clear 4 Inthe Effective Dates dialog box select one of the following e Use Period Numbers to make a row format effective as of a selected period e Use Dates to make a row format effective as of a selected date 5 Double click the Format Name box to display the Choose a Colu
253. gner Basic Report Designer Techniques and Keyboard Commands You can use many the following keys and techniques throughout Report Designer e Accessing Help From Within Report Designer e Using the Menus e Navigating Through the Report Designer Windows e Navigating Without a Mouse or Other Pointing Device e Editing a Box F2 e Selecting Rows or Columns e Displaying a List of Available Entries F3 e Using the Right Mouse Button Accessing Help From Within Report Designer e Press F1 for help related to the current task e Or on the Help menu click Contents e Click the toolbar Help button Using the Menus To display a menu e Select one of the menus with the mouse pointer and click e Press the Alt key and the keyboard key that corresponds to its underlined letter For example to select the File menu press Alt F To select a command from the menu e Click on the command e Press the keyboard key that corresponds to its underlined letter For example to select the New command from the File menu press N To exit the menu without making a selection e Press Esc twice or click in the main window outside the menu Note Menus that are the same for all Report Designer windows are described in Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus on page 18 Menus used in specific Report Designer building blocks Row Formats Column Layouts Reporting Trees or the Catalog of Reports are described in the chapter for that build
254. he Links dialog box c frx 6 7Sio_data us gaap ci 2000 07 31 xsd EB FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 291 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Including XBRL Elements in the Row 10 11 In the Links record control box click Find and locate the current XBRL link in the Find Link dialog box In the Link Name box accept the name assigned by FRx or enter another name to identify the link Click the XBRL Taxonomy Files arrow and select the XBRL version 2 0 taxonomy file us gaap ci 2003 07 07 xsd Note XBRL taxonomy files have xsd as the file extension and the IO_Data Taxonomy Files directory contains a set of related taxonomy files Be certain you select the master taxonomy file us gaap ci 2003 07 07 xsd Refer to the service pack release notes to determine the most current file name if the taxonomy file has been updated since this manual was created In the Links record control box click Save Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each taxonomy you want to include in your row format Each XBRL Link column corresponds to one taxonomy file In the row format window double click the cell in the Link to XBRL Taxonomy column to display the XBRL Element Tag zoom XBRL c frx 6 7 io_data taxonomy files us gaap ci 2003 XBRL Element Tag usft ge_GeneralConcepts Statements Document and Entity Information E Income Statement E Balance Sheet StatementStockholdersE quity 1 Stateme
255. he Output File Name dialog box you can select a different drive directory and file name for the report If you do not select a path the file saves to the Import Export Path that you selected in the Company Information dialog box The File Name box is dimmed if you select Printer from the Output box Note When you select the Send as Link to File option from the E mail tab you must specify a shared network directory or use Uniform Naming Conventions UNC for example computer name share name directory name file name FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 250 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab Replace File Without Warning When you save a new report with the same name as an existing file a warning message appears informing you that the file already exists To disable this warning message and have FRx automatically overwrite the existing file select this option Prompt for Output Type at Run Time If you want to receive a prompt to select the report output method before generating the report select this check box Delete File After Printing Viewing Sending To automatically delete the FRx report file after printing viewing or sending it select this check box This option is helpful if security or disk space is a concern If you do not select this option the output file remains on the disk for subsequent viewing printing or sending Print Immediately To generate your report using the sele
256. he code to reflect the desired case For example if you generate a report for the fiscal period ending in February and you use MON as the column header the header displays as FEB if you use Mon the header displays as Feb Table 5 3 Column Header Codes FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 144 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Headers Font styles Use this box to apply a different font style to your column header For more information about formatting font styles see Font Styles on page 260 of Chapter 7 Format options Use this option for underlining text or adding a box around the header text Spread from To Use these boxes to define the columns over which you want to center the text Enter the beginning column letter in the Spread From box and the ending column letter in the To box Report Designer centers the text over this range of columns Justification Use these options to align your headers in the column or spread To create column headers 1 Double click the cell over the column that you want to describe to display the Header Options dialog box Header Options Cell text Insert Code Eont styles z Cancel Format options Underline z ustification C Left Spread from Ja To Ja Center C Bight In the Cell text box do one of the following e Type the appropriate text e Click Insert Code and select the appropriate the code See Table 5 3 on page 144 for
257. he link Report Designer assigns names sequentially for example GL1 ROW1 GL2 ROW2 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 122 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Establishing Links 5 Then use one the following options 6 7 10 Linking Rows to a Summary Report If You selected General Ledger in the Link Type box Then Go to step 6 You selected Row Format in the Link Type box Click the Source Row Format arrow and select a row format for the link You selected External Worksheet in the Link Type box Go to step 6 You selected GL Worksheet in the Link Type box Click the Worksheet File Name arrow and type or select the worksheet name You selected XBRL in the Link Type box To Create a year to year general ledger link Click the XBRL Taxonomy Files arrow and type or select the XBRL file For more information see Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL on page 285 In the Optional Description box as needed type a description of the link This information appears in the Link column header description If you selected a general ledger link use one of the following options Do this In the General Ledger Year box type a year Use the same account codes for all years To link rows to a summary report 1 Leave the General Ledger Year box blank Click Save to save the new link information As needed yo
258. he reporting tree worksheet Only those users and groups who have been granted access can view the report detail for the secured reporting units in the resulting FRx reports To secure reporting tree units 1 Open a reporting tree in Report Designer 2 Select the reporting unit to secure in the graphical reporting tree or select the reporting unit row in the worksheet The selected reporting unit row is highlighted This helps you follow the row as you scroll right to display column P 3 Double click the Security E Mail cell column P in the selected row to open the Tree Security and E mail dialog box Tree Security and E mail amp Vv FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 221 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Securing Reporting Tree Units 4 Select from the following options To grant access to Specific FRx users Do this 1 Click FRx Users to open the Select a User dialog box Select the user ID and user name row from the list Click OK to add the selected user to the Access Granted list Repeat steps 1 to 4 to add other users Members of FRx groups Click FRx Groups to open the Select Group dialog box Select the group ID and group name row from the list Click OK to add the selected group to the Access Granted list Repeat steps 1 to 4 to add other groups Note You may grant access to both users and groups in the same reporting unit Security E Mail cell 5 To re
259. heck box to suppress missing element tag warnings from displaying when you run the XBRL report Click the Report Options tab On the Report Options tab click the Formatting tab Under Rounding of Amounts select No Rounding On the File menu click Save FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 296 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Selecting XBRL Output Type in the Selecting FRD Output Type For XBRL Reports Instance documents cannot be displayed in the DrillDown Viewer however you can display the XBRL element tags from the row format in a report that you output as an frd file DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML The row format and column layout must satisfy the following requirements to successfully display the XBRL element tags in the DrillDown Viewer e The row format must contain GL Link CAL or TOT rows with XBRL element tags e The column layout must contain the XBRL_TAG column type When you select DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML as the output type from the Catalog of Reports FRx creates a file with an frd extension that can be displayed in the DrillDown Viewer Show me an Example The following example Figure 8 1 based on the column layout on page 294 shows Descriptions GL amounts and XBRL element tags as they might appear in the frd file displayed in the DrillDown Viewer This frd output corresponds to the XBRL instance document output example on page 287 Fabrikam Works inc For
260. hese boxes define how The Combine icon The Split icon to build your reporting tree changes the size of Cleaver can split the by making changes to the any of the displayed segment characters account mask segments Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts eet Foor Ff i E Department The Segment Hierarchy box The Segment Ranges displays the segments graphically boxes can be used to You can move the segments to specify a range of codes change their reporting order within each segment Figure 6 12 Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts Dialog Box The appearance of this dialog box changes when you make different modifications to its options and boxes You can make the following modifications e Limitthe location or division e Limit the department e Reverse the segment hierarchy of the tree e Split the segments into more functional components e Combine different segments To understand these modifications more thoroughly take a look at some of the following examples FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 198 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Building Reporting Trees Example 1 Limited Account Ranges by Location and Department In the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 13 we have limited the account ranges by location and department Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts In this example we have specified a range of codes for location and department segments ome Rg
261. his command deletes one or more rows Insert Row This command inserts one or more new rows Zoom F3 Opens a box specific window of valid values Same as double clicking on a cell Table 3 2 Row Format Edit Menu Commands For more details and instructions on the commands outlined in the above table review the following topics Cut Ctrl X Find Ctrl F Replace Ctrl R Renumber Rows Description Ctrl D Delete Row Insert Row FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 60 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Row Format Menu Functions Cut Ctri X Removes the selection from the current location and moves it to the Microsoft Windows clipboard 1 Select the cell you want to cut 2 On the Edit menu click Cut The text disappears from the cell 3 Paste the selection from the Microsoft Windows clipboard to another cell in FRx or to another Windows application Find Ctrl F To find text 1 Click Find to open the Find dialog box In the Find What box enter the text you want to locate Click Find Next To conduct a more specific search select one or more options from the Search Options section of the dialog box Replace Ctri R To replace text 1 In the Find what box enter the text you want to find 2 Click Replace to open the Replace dialog box In the Replace with box enter the text you want to replace it with Click Replace to replace a single occurrence of the text or Replace All
262. hly average calculations check box e To use the number of days as the denominator for calculating averages clear the Use Sum of Rates Number of Rates Entered Balance for monthly average calculations check box For a detailed explanation of methods for calculating average rates and the calculation results see Chapter 3 Administering Currency Translation in the FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide Note O You must activate DAX from the Column Layout menu to accurately convert international currencies to the base currency used in your general ledger Be sure to activate DAX before you run a report that includes currency translation Suppressing Rounding Adjustments When amounts are rounded to whole dollars thousands or millions grand totals may be out of balance However currency exchange reports should not use rounding because currency exchange rates are typically calculated to the fourth or fifth decimal place Rounding would invalidate those calculations To turn off the rounding feature select the option No Rounding in the Rounding of Amounts box on the Report Options tab Formatting sub tab in the Catalog of Reports window To turn off rounding of amounts 1 From the FRx Control Panel click Catalog of Reports The Select Catalog for Display dialog box appears 2 Selecta catalog ID from the displayed list and click OK The Catalog of Reports dialog box appears 3 Select the Report Options tab 4
263. ier dialog box double click the cell in the Type column to display the Select Attribute Type dialog box Account Attributes 4 From the Select Attribute Type dialog box select an attribute type then click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 108 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes 5 10 From the Row Modifier dialog box double click the cell in the Category column to display the Select Attribute Category dialog box Note The attribute categories displayed in the list will depend on your accounting system and the attribute type you selected in the previous step From the Select Attribute Category dialog box select an attribute category then click OK From the Row Modifier dialog box double click the cell in the From column to display the Select Attribute Value dialog box Select Attribute Value Search SHWOYONWEWhN Cancel More Note The attribute values displayed in the list will depend on your accounting system and the attribute category you selected in the previous step Some attribute categories such as date or amount may not display a list of values You can type the date or amount values in the From and To cells to define the range of attribute values From the Select Attribute Value dialog box select the beginning attribute value in the range then click OK From the Row Modifier dialog box double click the cell in the To column to display the S
264. if you are building a new reporting tree If you are working with an existing reporting tree the information for the reporting unit you selected in step 1 displays in the dialog box 3 Do one of the following If you are Do this Building a new reporting tree Complete steps 4 21 Refining or editing an existing 1 Complete the following steps as needed to reporting tree refine or edit your reporting tree 2 Click OK to save the changes in the reporting tree 4 Inthe Unit Code box enter a code maximum 16 characters to identify this reporting unit in the graphical reporting tree For ease of use establish a coding system that is consistent and easily understood by users Note You can select the RUNIT code in report headers and footers to display the unit code in the report See Reporting Unit Selection on page 269 5 Inthe Allocation to Parent box enter a percentage of this unit to be allocated rolled up to its parent unit You can type the percentage with or without a decimal point For example type either 25 or 25 for a 25 rollup to the parent Note If you use a percentage that is less than 1 you must select the Allow Rollup lt 1 option in the Catalog of Reports The Allow Rollup lt 1 option is located under Report Options on the Tree Options tab FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 207 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Manually 6 The percentage you ent
265. ify each row in the worksheet You use the row code in calculations and totals when formatting and to link to other row formats A row code is required for rows that are referred to by other rows such as totals You can mix numeric alphanumeric and blank row codes within a row format The row code can be any number or a descriptive label that identifies that row A label e Can be any combination of numbers and letters up to 16 characters e Must begin with an alphabetic character a to z e Can use the underscore _ character but no other special characters can be used These are examples of valid row codes 320 TL_NET_INCOME and TL_NET_94 To renumber your row codes select the Edit menu and click Renumber Rows to renumber numeric codes You can renumber in row formats that combine row code numbers with row code labels FRx renumbers row codes that begin with numbers for example 130 246 and skips renumbering of any row codes that begin with letters for example INCOME 93 TP0693 When you renumber row codes FRx automatically updates TOT and CAL references For example if the range of rows in a TOT row is 100 to 160 and you renumber starting with 90 the starting TOT range changes to 90 instead of 100 Description Column Enter the description exactly as it should print on a report You define the width of the description column in the column layout particularly important when entering a long description which might be
266. il reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 7 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Understanding Report Designer An Overview e Any combination of these report types You can report on a summary company wide basis or on selected units from a reporting tree The resulting report is customized in accordance with the row format and column layout you use User Security When the optional FRx security is activated a system administrator can limit individual users and or groups of users to specific items within FRx The FRx security system works in addition to security in the underlying accounting system Report Specification Sets All FRx report specifications row formats column layouts reporting trees and catalogs are stored in relational databases called specification sets In client server environments it is helpful to store the report specification sets on the network so multiple users can access each company s reports For more information see Creating Specification Sets in Chapter 2 of the FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide Presentation Quality Reports Using the powerful print controls and formatting in FRx you can produce presentation quality reports Using FRx s built in print controls and formatting you can e Use fonts colors shading boxes and lines in your reports e Format individual rows and columns independently e Format individual column headers page headers and footers
267. iles arrow and select the us gaap ci 2003 07 07 xsd taxonomy file to use the standard taxonomy FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 289 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Including XBRL Elements in the Row 6 Click Open Note XBRL taxonomy files have xsd as the file extension and the IO_Data Taxonomy Files directory contains a set of related taxonomy files Be certain you select the master taxonomy file us gaap ci 2003 07 07 xsd or an XBRL version 2 0 compliant custom taxonomy Refer to the service pack release notes to determine the most current file name if the taxonomy file has been updated since this manual was created 7 Inthe Links record control box click Save 8 Click Close to close the Links record control box and return to the Row Format window The new Link column showing the link name and taxonomy name appears in the row format window 9 Repeat steps 1 to 8 for each taxonomy you want to include in your row format Each XBRL Link column corresponds to one taxonomy file Note In addition to the standard us gaap ci taxonomy you can include one or more custom taxonomies in a row format You can only link to one taxonomy from a particular row 10 When you have finished adding your XBRL links click Close Adding XBRL Element Tags to the Row Format Once the necessary taxonomies are selected you can add XBRL element tags to the rows XBRL element tags can be applied to GL Link C
268. in numerous windows at the same time or numerous instances of the same window at the same time natural segment A typical general ledger account code contains at least one account code segment that describes the type of account for example cash or sales This segment of the general ledger code is referred to as the natural account code segment in the FRx system Glossary numeric mask characters Mask characters define the masks FRx uses for amounts e 0 A zero mask character inserts a zero 0 into the amount if the digit is not used See the following example Mask 000 00 Amount 010 53 e A pound sign mask character does not insert a zero 0 into the amount if the digit is not used See the following example Mask 0 00 Amount 10 53 OLAP On Line Analytical Processing A system for presenting summarized financial data in a business model format that facilitates online business analysis Financial data is presented in a multidimensional structure called a cube OLAP cube A three dimensional data model composed of cells that represent the intersection of a report row a report column and a reporting unit OLAP cubes derived from FRx reports are restricted to financial level information and do not contain account or transactional details OLE Object Linking and Embedding A Windows feature that allows FRx to link directly to a Microsoft Excel 2000 or later spreadsheet originating currency The currenc
269. in the column to period adjustment amounts if available Restricts the amounts in the column to exclude the period adjustment amounts if available PT Restricts the amounts in the column to include posted transactions only UPT Restricts the amounts in the column to include unposted transactions only if available Table 5 5 Column Restriction Codes FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 164 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail To add Column Restrictions 1 Double click the Column Restrictions cell 2 Select a code for special printing characteristics You can use multiple codes within a single column if necessary Note A Column Restriction code overrides any conflicting setting assigned in the Row Format 3 Click OK to return to the Column Layout window Selecting a Reporting Unit If the column type is GL select a tree and reporting unit code in this cell to restrict a column to a specific reporting unit Make your selections using the Select Tree for Lookup dialog box shown in Figure 5 22 Select Tree for Lookup Consol Consolidated Tree Summary FabrkConsol Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using WKS Links Regional Fabrikam Work Tree using Sub Levels FabrkwitkA_Reorg Regional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels FabrkwtkA1 Regional Fabrikam Work Tree using Sub Levels FabrkwtkB Functional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels L
270. in the tree for each location division in the general ledger including the Sales Denver reporting unit FRx then assigns a specific account mask to each reporting unit and replaces the plus signs with the location division codes from the general ledger For more information illustrating the effect that plus signs hooks amp and wildcards have on specific account masks see Table 6 8 Original Account Masks and Specific Account Masks on page 201 The first segment of the account mask for the Sales Denver reporting unit amp amp amp amp 1100 is the natural account code The natural account code is depicted by four hooks represented by the ampersand amp character These hooks correspond to the four digits in the Link to General Ledger column of the row format shown in Figure 6 5 A B E 6 p EJF H Row Description Fmt R j te Uni Norm Print Colum Link to Cod Code Mates Rows Unit Bal ctl n General Ledger fico CBR 310 1130 Revenue DES DES Sales C 410 4109 Sales Returns 4110 Sales Discounts 4750 Net Sales TOT 190 220 250 DES COGS 450 4509 Gross Margin TOT 310 370 The four hooks amp amp amp amp in the account mask for Sales Denver reporting unit relate to these four digits Figure 6 5 Row Format with GL Link The second segment of the Sales Denver reporting unit mask amp amp amp amp 1100 is 1100 This segment represents the location and the divisio
271. ing S1 El 9 Inthe Base Year box type 2003 10 Click OK to confirm and return to the Catalog of Reports window Note For more information about the Report Date see Specifying Report Periods and Dates on page 233 11 Click the Building Blocks tab ig FRx Enterprise Catalog cemar emer ie Ce KIKI Catalog Records E E eaor r E Asset Detail for Transaction Detail Reports Balance Sheet Balance Sheet Balance Sheet Side by Side Tabular Balance Sheet Balance Sheet With Ratios Cash Flow Statement Cash Detail Report Consolidated Balance Sheet and Inc Stmnt 13 Select the row format you created or the sample row format IncStmt and click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 51 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a New Catalog ID 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 In the Column Layout box click the arrow to display the Choose a Column Layout box Choose a Column Layout ee 3 Month Current and YTD YTD Balances Only YTD Balances Only Side by Side Tabular Balance Sheet Cash Flow Statement Consolidated Last 3 Months and YTD Act Bud Variance Consolidated Fabrikam Works and Canada Consolidated Fabrikam Works and Canada and ELIM Current And YTD Actuals Then do one of the following e Select the column layout that you created e Select Curr_YTD The sample column layout Click OK Under Reporting Tree select the Use Reporting
272. ing column layout 45 48 reporting tree 215 220 222 reports 276 Schedule command 228 Search Options section 61 security user 8 Segment Hierarchy section 214 Select a Company for this Record dialog box 275 282 Select a Company to Work With dialog box 5 Select Catalog for Display dialog box 49 274 280 281 Select Column Heading dialog box 43 Select Font Style dialog box 63 260 Select General Ledger Account dialog box 96 97 101 Select Import File dialog box 135 Select Reporting Unit s to Print dialog box 53 278 Select Units at Run Time check box 281 Select Units at Run Time option 269 Selecting a local printer from the Catalog of Re ports 251 Send as Link to File option 250 Shading options 260 Sort GL Accounts by Natural Code option 268 Source Row Format box 123 Spaces Between Columns option 262 special formatting options column layout 157 Split button Cleaver 214 Split icon 200 spot rate source 274 Starting Date cell 239 240 242 Starting Row Code box 69 statistical data including in column layout 151 style creating and editing font styles 63 Subject box 255 Subtotal By Period option 269 Subtotal on Segment option 268 summary reporting unit overview 181 Suppress CBR Calculation option 268 suppressing Index account transaction detail 82 details in columns 164 row printing 82 totals in columns 164 system requirements for installing FRx 5 System Specific Information tab 24 T tabular report creating 17
273. ing block FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 13 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Getting Around in Report Designer Navigating Through the Report Designer Windows e To open a building block without closing the current one on the File menu point to New and click Column Note o You can have up to four worksheets of each building block open at one time e To close an open building block on the File menu click Close e Ifyou re in a window click Cancel to return to the main window Or to execute your selections click OK e To exit Report Designer on the File menu click Exit Navigating Without a Mouse or Other Pointing Device Every window has a Control menu box to the left of the title bar e To access the Control menu box for a window that has the focus that is a window from which you cannot access the main window press and hold the Alt key and then press the spacebar e To access the Control menu box for a child window that is a window from which you can access the main window activate the window by selecting the title bar press and hold the Alt key and then press the Hyphen key Editing a Box F2 You can use the F2 key to edit boxes in the Row Format Column Layout or Reporting Tree building blocks e Press F2 to edit the contents of a box e When you are editing the system defaults to insert mode if you type characters they are inserted at the cursor position To switch to t
274. ing tree detail FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 46 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Working with Reporting Trees 4 Repeat step 2 for other reporting trees to familiarize yourself with the manner in which trees display in Report Designer 5 When you are finished reviewing the tree on the File menu click Close Creating a New Reporting Tree Now that you have seen a sample reporting tree you can create a new reporting tree based on the Fabrikam Works Inc sample database To create a new reporting tree 1 From the FRx Control Panel window on the File menu point to New and then click Tree to display a blank Reporting Tree window 2 On the Edit menu click Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accts to display the Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts dialog box Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts J Se The account segment uses hooks for its Natural Segment B Location Division E Department Tip You can use the Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts dialog box to define the account segments that you want FRx to include from your chart of accounts Each account segment is presented in an edit box By default the natural segment contains hook characters amp 3 Inthe Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts dialog box do the following Under Segment Ranges in the first TOW Do In the From Acct box type 1100 In the To Acct edit
275. ining just the natural account segment and a column layout FRx creates a financial report that defines natural account segment information summarized for the entire organization However you may at times want to generate multiple financial reports one for each of your responsibility segment values such as locations divisions and departments By having your reporting tree focus on the responsibility segments of the full account code you get more flexibility when pulling information from the general ledger The reporting tree identifies not only each of the responsibility segments values that you would like to report on but also the relationship of each responsibility segment to the other responsibility segments within your organization Reports that use a reporting tree combine the general ledger account code information in the row format with the account code information contained in the tree to create multiple financial reports For more detailed information on reporting trees see Creating a Reporting Tree on page 179 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 66 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Building a Row Format Building a Row Format Although FRx supports up to 8000 general ledger rows we suggest designing your row format as a high level summary 500 rows or less using the techniques outlined in the following sections This makes creating and maintaining your row formats easy and lets you produce detailed reports that
276. inked Consolidated Tree using Row Linking SubAccounts Sub Accounts with Departments in the Row Figure 5 22 Select Tree for Lookup Dialog Box This feature is useful when information is applicable only to a certain unit or when you want to display reporting units side by side such as in departmental side by side comparison reporting To select a Reporting Unit from a list 1 Double click the Reporting Unit cell to display a list of trees 2 Selecta tree to use in conjunction with this column layout 3 When the list of reporting units appears select a unit from the list FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 165 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail 4 Return to the Column Layout window a e ee faa ee en P Consolidated CONSOLIDATED FABRIKAM_WORKS CONSOLIDATED FABRIKAM_WORKS_CAN Your column layout displays the use of reporting units and restrictions Note If you enter a reporting unit in the column layout be sure to use the same tree when this column layout is used in a report If you do not the units from the tree may not match and the columns will be blank on the report FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 166 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Formatting Multicurrency Reports When creating multiple currency reports you can use three functions in your column layout e Currency Code e Currency Display e Currency Rate Subtype ID The Curren
277. instructions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 28 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format To add revenue description report rows 1 Look at the top of the sample row format Row Code 100 you created in the previous section Faw een file wie to Code ey General Ledger E 100 Sales 130 Sales Elimination 160 Sales Returns 2 From row 100 select three rows 4100 4109 4110 3 On the Edit menu click Insert Row to add three new rows 4 Do the following In The first new row Do this 1 Click the Fmt Code column select DES from the list 2 Click OK to return to the Row Format window The second new row Click the Description column and in the edit bar type Revenue The third new row 1 Click the Fmt Code column and select DES from the list 2 Click OK to return to the Row Format window A B c D F H Row Description Fmt poe Norm Print Link to Code Code Rates Rows Unit Bal cul General Ledger 50 Revenue Fi You have now added a Revenue heading and spacing around your heading using the DES Description format code Modifying Sales Report Rows You can make changes to column values change row codes and add or delete rows The Sales Row Codes 100 199 in Figure 2 2 on page 28 were modified using the following instructions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 29 Chapter 2 Creating Basic
278. iod in text form with the Period Description or Plural Description used for multiple periods from the Company Information dialog box For more information on the Company Information settings see your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide You can manually edit this text as needed however your changes are not saved when you save your report The description in this box appears in the report headers by default Use the TXTPER and TXTP D codes in the Headers Footers tab to include the Period Covered description in your report For more information about using period descriptions in the headers and footers see the Headers Footers Tab on page 258 Report Date This description changes based on your previous report date selections This description appears in the report headers by default This description is used in the TXTDATE and TXTP D codes in the Headers Footers tab For more information about using report dates in the headers and footers see the Headers Footers Tab on page 258 Default Base Period This setting determines the initial settings for the Base Year and Base Period This is the only setting that is saved with the catalog ID To change a setting click the Default Base Period box and select one of the following from the list Default Use Period List Sys Defines the base period as the current system period FRx uses the computer s Regional Settings to determine the current system date and then
279. ion Quality Reports e FRx DrillDown ViewerTM e Account Codes Building Blocks The design philosophy behind Report Designer is simple break everything down to the smallest possible component and then mix and match components as needed With this building block approach you can easily combine text amounts calculations and summarization in an unlimited fashion This approach increases your ability to produce the reports you need Equally important it encourages creativity by making it easy to look at your operations in different ways The individual building blocks of a report work something like a three dimensional spreadsheet but with more power e Row formats These are the descriptive lines for example salaries or sales on a report Row Formats e Column layouts These are the actual monetary amounts and calculations plus reporting periods and book codes Column Layouts FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 6 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Understanding Report Designer An Overview e Reporting trees These are similar to an organizational chart It contains individual reporting units that represent each box in the chart These units can be either individual departments from the general ledger or higher level units that summarize data from other reporting units Reporting Trees The following sample report illustrates how the building blocks are combined to create a report
280. ion dialog box An external worksheet can be imported into any unit in the reporting tree Click OK to add the reporting unit to the tree and return to the Reporting Tree window Repeat steps 2 19 for each unit record until you have added all of the detail units for your reporting tree Continue to the next section Defining Parent Child Relationships on page 211 to define the parent child relationships in this reporting tree FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 210 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Manually Defining Parent Child Relationships Follow these instructions only if you build a reporting tree manually The parent child relationships are already defined for you if you build a reporting tree using the procedures described in Building Reporting Trees Automatically on page 213 After you build a reporting tree manually you must define the parent child relationship of the reporting unit You can do this by promoting and demoting reporting units on the graphical reporting tree using one of the following methods e The drag and drop operation See To promote and demote reporting units with drag and drop on page 211 e The Tree menu See To promote and demote reporting units with the Tree menu on page 212 You can also use the Reporting Units dialog box to assign a child unit to a parent unit or designate a unit as the parent unit See To assign parent chil
281. ion to the Windows clipboard Ctrl C Paste Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard to the cursor Ctrl V position If the clipboard is empty this command is unavailable dimmed You can use the Paste function to paste information copied from other Windows applications or from other FRx worksheets into this worksheet Clear Clears makes blank all selected cells Table 6 3 Reporting Tree Edit Menu Commands FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 191 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar Icon Edit Menu Command Description Find Opens the Find dialog box so that you can locate information Ctrl F contained in the worksheet Replace Opens the Replace dialog box so that you can locate and Ctri R replace information contained in the worksheet Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accts Opens the Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts dialog box Use this to create a new reporting tree using current chart of accounts data For more information about this command see Understanding Building Reporting Trees Automatically on page 197 Description Ctrl D Opens a dialog box where you can edit a reporting tree description In the Description box type the text you want to describe the reporting tree You can use upper and lower case letters numbers and spaces The Specification Set and Name boxes are display only boxes You cannot access or ch
282. iption box 68 descriptions assigning in the row 74 assigning multiple 88 defining in column layout 149 entering 71 suppressing 74 76 Detail Level box 50 details suppressing in column 164 suppressing in row 82 direct column placement 126 direct reference column placement 125 Display Account Description from Chart option 267 Display Blanks for Zero Amounts option 262 Display Commas in Amounts option 262 Display GL Account Code option 267 Display Report Processing Status option 273 Display Reports With No Active Rows option 262 Display Row Code option 267 Display Rows With No Amounts option 262 Display Underscore before Totals option 267 DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML option 244 DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML output for XBRL reports 297 E Edit menu commands catalog of reports 226 column layout 141 reporting tree 191 row format 59 editing column layout 143 reporting tree 203 reporting unit 207 row format 70 Element Names XBRL 298 e mail reporting tree addresses 217 sending 254 E mail Options tab 236 243 254 Enable E mail box 254 exception reports generating 271 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 345 Exclude Inactive Accounts If Available option 273 Expand All command 195 196 Expand Branch command 189 195 Extra Lines Between Rows option 262 F File menu commands catalog of reports 225 column layout 140 reporting tree 190 row format 58 File Name box 250 Financial amp Account option 50 2
283. irectory and all subdirectories Web Administrator Users Users require Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for the WebPort Data directory on the Web server as well as Read and Read amp Execute permissions for the SysData directory In most cases users also require Read and Read amp Execute permissions for the IO_Data directory to publish previously generated reports If you use directories other than the IO_Data directory for report output users must have Read and Read amp Execute permissions for these additional directories If users are restricted to specific companies you can grant them permissions only for the company directories they use Maintaining FRx Data Files and Preventing Corruption To prevent corruption in FRx data files we recommend Running and keeping regular backups FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 329 Appendix A FRx System Information Frequently compacting the FRx System and Specification Set Databases Always saving the Report Catalog after making changes and before generation Excluding the FRx SysData directory from network virus scans Running and Keeping Regular Backups This is the most important procedure you can follow for software applications such as FRx that store data You should run backups nightly if FRx is used daily Otherwise you should run backups at least once a week We recommend frequent backups of the entire FRx SysData directory If you do
284. is code to force a page break in any report All columns from the column layout print in an income statement including any columns that use a BS Balance Sheet column print control code This code places a single line under all amount columns You can also suppress the line for certain columns if required for example percent columns For more information see Adding Column Restrictions on page 164 Note e If a report contains title rows and underscore rows where all detail rows have been suppressed because of zero balances for example you can suppress the printing of format rows using the Related Rates Rows Unit column For more information see Relating a Format Row to an Amount Row on page 81 This code places a double line under all amount columns LNE This code prints a line across the entire page After choosing this Fmt Code option you can also enter one of the following line descriptions in the Description column e Type 1 thin line default e Type 2 thick line e Type 3 dotted line e Type 4 two lines thick line followed by thin line e Type 5 two lines thin line followed by thick line Note Because of the way that lines are defined in HTML only single line types 1 2 and 3 are supported for reports that are output in HTML formats including DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML frd and Standard XML xml files when viewed in FRx WebPort FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 76 Cha
285. is set could contain the Travel and Entertainment set and other associated accounts This section contains information and instructions on e Creating an Account Set from the Link to General Ledger Column e Creating an Account Set Using the Edit Menu e Linking an Account Set to Your General Ledger e Editing an Account Set Creating an Account Set from the Link to General Ledger Column To create an account set from the Link to General Ledger column 1 Double click the General Ledger column to open the GL Account Links dialog box 2 Create a link to your general ledger For step by step instructions please refer to Entering General Ledger Codes on page 96 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 101 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes 3 Click the Save As button under the Account Sets options to display the Save As Account Set dialog box Save As Account Set 4 Type a name and description for the account set and then click OK When you return to the GL Account Links dialog box you see the word SET followed by the account set name in parentheses For example SET Expense GL Account Links Natural Natural Natural Creating an Account Set Using the Edit Menu To create an account set using the Edit menu or right click 1 On the Edit menu click Account Sets or right click and select Account Sets to display the Account Sets dialog box Account Sets
286. isan teina a a a ea a aa aada aa aa 243 Selecting Report Output Options ececeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeceeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 244 PRINTING Repos osesneneorerdni ta na AAE A 251 E mailing Reports ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeennaeeeeseeeiaeeeeseeeaas 254 Publishing Reports to the WeD sser 255 Page Options Taberei siii a T 257 Fage Setup TaD riero R O T S 257 Headers Footers TaDoreeia a aa e de delat tiie 258 Report Options Tab 2 0 0 0 cccceeceeeecceecee case cece eee ee ee cece eaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseesececnaecaeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 261 Formatting Tab s cciieticnedia cena EEA EA 261 Acct Tran Detail Tab 0 ccc eeceeree eee etne eee ee ernie eee eeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeiaeeeseeeiaeeeeenenaees 267 Tree Options Tab saci sccuncdsdiccccdceushacscedtiaasencdecs seacaccasasenanetanatae daddstaaacduedens daeeuacexstaeecs 269 Advanced TaD ceticeseissuadetedssatcccedssaederdevassaadeteds E E a EAO 270 Currency Translation Tabee vader eestasitvee ni pueeeeeseaeeee endl deeeeinden setae 273 PREP OMS snrnid a sala sha dee ch dane es aes daca dae te adden need See 274 Creating a REPOrt 00 ccc eceeeee eee eenee eee ee etne eee eee eaeeeeeetaeeeeeesaeeeeeetaeeeeeesieeeeeees 274 Generating a Repo encerran EA A A 277 Printing Catalog Information ssrresiiaenii iea aAA AANER 279 Chaining Your Repons sessirnir nnn T 280 Cloning Your Repone sennerisereiar a R 282 Including Additional Text in a Report 00
287. isions projects tasks and so forth row code A code either a word or a number which identifies a row in the first column of a row format row format One of the three FRx building blocks Row formats contain links to the general ledger and or external worksheets and other row formats They also contain report row descriptions and calculations See also column layout reporting tree row modifier See account modifier row period offset A switch used in row formats when linking to external worksheets Use the RPO switch if the worksheet to which you are linking has multiple rows that represent different periods When this code is used FRx matches the accounting periods in the column layout with the appropriate rows in the worksheet You can use this technique with either combined or separate worksheet links scroll bar A window component that informs users that more of the window can be viewed You manipulate the scroll bar to view more of the window contents Glossary segment code A section of an account code that represents a type of entity for which you are accounting For example you may have segmented your account codes into natural accounts divisions and departments In this example you would define a segment code for each natural account division and department select To choose an option or choice Selecting is most often accomplished either by clicking on the option or highlighting the option and pr
288. l restricts data in the GL columns to specific values or ranges that apply to Account Attribute or Transaction Attribute categories When you select A_ATTR or T_ATTR as the column type and assign an attribute category in the Attribute Category row you can use the Attribute Filter row in GL columns to restrict accounts that will be included in the report FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 170 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Figure 5 24shows the Account Attribute with the category Zipcode in column F The Attribute Filter in the GL type column F specifies the range of values to include in the report Column Headers TA e TT E F E GL Acct Apply Date Doc ID Activity Region as Column Detail aS k JJDESC ACCT _TAPL ACTUAL zipcode BASE Period Code 1 TO BASE CUR F 80155 to 80605 Figure 5 24 Attribute Filters in Column Layout Window Restricting Columns to Specific Dates The Start Date and End Date cells restrict data in GL columns to specific dates This technique is useful for daily or weekly sales reporting cash analysis needs and other date sensitive reports You can type a date using the day of the month or a full date Day of Month You can enter either a day number or a range of days The day number refers to the number of days after the start of the fiscal period not the actual calendar date For a period beginning on May 15 day 1 May 15 day 2 May 1
289. lect a currency conversion format code FRx uses this code for all subsequent rows until a different format code is encountered For example if you have 10 asset accounts that are all going to be converted using the spot rate you only need to select CCSPOT in the first row and all subsequent rows will apply the CCSPOT format code The following currency conversion row format codes are available if your FRx license includes the currency translation function CCHIST This code tells FRx to perform currency conversion using the historic rate from the currency translation table The historic rate is commonly used for rows that show non monetary assets such as fixed assets inventory or capital stock When you use the CCHIST format code you must also specify the Historic Rate ID as the related rate in Column D of the row format The name of the Historic Rate folder in the FRx Currency Translation Maintenance window is the Historic Rate ID When you use historic exchange rates in the row format FRx matches sums in the Historic Conversion tables to the corresponding general ledger data for the GL account and displays an Out of Balance error if the amounts do not match Note e Because individual rows in the row format can support only one related historic rate source but could link to multiple GL accounts FRx cannot determine which historic rate and amount belong to which account in the row format Therefore historic rates are applied only at the
290. lick OK In the Catalog Records record control box click Clone This clears two boxes the Catalog ID and the File Name in the Output tab All other original report settings remain In the Catalog ID box type a new Catalog ID name When you enter a new catalog ID the File Name in the Output tab automatically uses the first eight characters of your new catalog ID name for the default file name In the Catalog ID description box you can replace the existing description with a new one Check the company code displayed in the Company box this is the default company If Then The displayed code is for your Go to step 7 report company The displayed code is not the 1 Click the Company arrow report company 2 Inthe Select a Company for this Record dialog box select the correct company code and click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 282 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports 7 Review your report selections and make changes as needed 8 Click Save To generate your report see Generating a Report on page 277 Including Additional Text in a Report The Additional Text feature lets you add additional text entries from the Additional Text column in the Reporting Trees window to the header footer section in reports For information about creating Additional Text entries in the reporting trees see Adding Text to the Reporting Units in a Tree on page 216 To include ad
291. line Help FRx WebPort Online Help FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide x Preface Conventions Used in this Guide The following conventions are used through this guide Convention Description Bold Used in procedures to indicate an on screen item such as a button name Italics Used to indicate emphasis Command Used to indicate a command file name or path Used to indicate information that supplements Note the main text Used to indicate information about how to use UU the application in a different way Used to indicate that a specific action or lack of a specific action could result in the loss of data Caution Used to indicate that a specific action or lack of a specific action could result in physical harm to your computer or the server How to Contact Us Mailing Address Software Support Telephone FRx Software Corporation 1 800 FRx SOLV 4700 South Syracuse Parkway Suite 150 1 800 379 7658 Toll Free Denver Colorado 80237 1 303 741 8000 Main Web Site http www frxsoftware com Email Documentation docu frxsoft com Training training frxsoft com General information info frxsoft com Product suggestions productsuggestions frxsoft com Software Licensing FRx software is licensed to our customers with specific configurations and capabilities for each installation The software license controls the number of licensed concurrent users expiration dates and ver
292. lled up in the tree To avoid duplication restrict the row to a reporting unit Restricting a Row to a Reporting Unit To restrict a row to a reporting unit 1 Inthe Related Rates Rows Unit column double click to open the Select Tree for Lookup dialog box 2 Double click the reporting tree you want to use FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 80 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats 3 When the Select a Reporting Unit for Restriction dialog box appears double click the reporting unit to which the row is to be restricted The reporting unit that you select appears in the Related Rates Rows Unit column FRx uses the following rules to roll up amounts to parent units in a reporting tree e Reporting units that use an account mask in the reporting tree corresponds with the row amount in the reporting unit report The units do not duplicate that amount in the parent unit report e Reporting units that do not use an account mask in the reporting tree that is parent units corresponds with the row amount in the child unit report and roll up the amount to the specified parent unit If the parent unit has five child units the row appears five times once for each child unit in the parent report e Reporting units that include the full account code restrict based on the preceding rule Therefore when you restrict rows that include a full account code to a unit containing an account mask FRx includes the row amoun
293. llowing e On the graphical tree double click a parent unit Parent units are identified by yellow folders in the graphical tree display e On the Tree menu select Expand Branch or Collapse Branch Note Branches are collapsed or expanded for viewing purposes only These branches or units will still appear in the final generated report On the worksheet tree to the right view the reporting units and account masks On the File menu click Close to close the reporting tree window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 189 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar Icon Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar Icon FRx provides you with menus and a toolbar icon to help you get around in the Reporting Tree window and give you easy access to reporting tree commands The menus and toolbar icon described in this are specific to the Reporting Tree window For information about menus that appear in all FRx main windows see Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus on page 18 Common toolbar buttons are explained in The Toolbar on page 12 This section contains information and instructions on e Reporting Tree Menus e Reporting Tree Toolbar Icon Reporting Tree Menus The Reporting Tree window includes the following menus with specific reporting tree functions that you will find helpful when working with reporting trees e File Menu e Edit Menu e Format Menu e Tree Menu Des
294. lmworks and Canada and ELIM Cur YTD Curent nd YTD Actuals 2 Click New to display a blank Column Layout window 3 Inthe first Column Headers row in column B double click to display the Header Options dialog box Header Options A OOo lUndetine xl G L Fiscal Period Description G L Fiscal Year i e 1996 G L Column Ending Date i e 08 31 91 G L Column Starting Date i e 01 01 90 umn i 5 Select Month 6 Click OK to accept and return to the Headers Options dialog box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 43 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a Column Layout 7 Inthe Headers Options dialog box click OK to return to the Column Layout window 8 Inthe Column Headers first row in column C type YTD 9 Inthe Column Detail Type row double click column A to display the Zoom Select the Type of Column box Calculated Row Codes from Row Format G L Account Codes from Row Format Fill Column w Character in Quotes Amounts from External Worksheet Account Type Attribute Transaction Type Attribute XBRL Element Tag from Row Format Transaction Detail Codes These codes only appear on Transaction Detail Reports Tran Desc Note don t use this code if description should appear in DESC column shown above Journal or batch header Description Transaction Apply Dat ox Cance 10 Select DESC f
295. lows e To change the column s width type a new number in the Column Width box e To hide one or more columns so that they are not visible on the worksheet select the columns and click Hide e To unhide all hidden columns click Unhide Note You can also change the width of FRx columns with the mouse using the same technique as in Windows based spreadsheets like Microsoft Excel Click and drag the column edge until the column is the size you want it to be Outline Style Controls the appearance of the graphical tree on the left side of the Reporting Tree window When you point to this Format menu command you can select from one of the following outline styles e Tree Lines and Text e Tree Lines Picture and Text e Pictures and Text e Plus Minus Picture and Text The selected command has a check mark in front of it Tree Lines and Text Shows the tree with the names of reporting units Connecting lines show the relationships among the units child units are indented from the left Table 6 4 Reporting Tree Format Menu Commands FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 193 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar Icon Format Menu Command Tree Lines Picture and Text Description Shows the tree with the names of reporting units indentations connecting lines and a descriptive symbol in front of each unit E This symbol indicates parent units that have units reportin
296. lt F N is the keyboard shortcut to open the File menu and then choose New Sometimes a key exists in more than one place on the keyboard As a rule it s a good habit to use the keys to the left of the numeric keypad because you might want to turn on NumLock to enter numbers Mouse Commands The mouse commands used in this guide include click double click right click and select Click means to click the left mouse button In this User s Guide you click buttons check boxes and boxes within windows and dialog boxes Double click means to quickly click the mouse button twice without moving the mouse Right click means to click the right mouse button Select means to mark menus and submenu options highlight text and choose items from drop down list boxes Typographical Conventions Within steps bold type represents onscreen items such as menus boxes and buttons and information you type For example In the Description box type Tabular Balance Sheet Italic type indicates emphasis For example FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 3 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Using This Guide This code defines the base row for columns that calculate a percentage of the base row Note and Warning Messages Notes and warnings indicate additional information They are indicated by the following formats Note This note indicates additional information in overview sections that may be important for you
297. luding e General ledger accounts e Other row formats e External worksheets like Lotus 1 2 3 or Microsoft Excel e Year to year changes in account codes This chapter includes complete instructions for creating these links FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 115 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Creating Summary Reports Using Row Links You can create a row format that pulls information from another row format and that format in turn uses general ledger accounts to draw data from your accounting system When used in conjunction with a reporting tree linking allows each unit in the tree to use a different row format This means that each unit can pull in different account code structures or data sources general ledger or external worksheet as well as different report presentations summary versus detail or unique fonts Reports can be summarized and displayed in unlimited ways Using the reporting tree you can stack reports up to nine levels deep In addition to linking to other row formats and external worksheets you can also define links to other fiscal years This is particularly useful for generating comparative reports when your general ledger coding conventions have changed from year to year This section contains information and instructions on e Creating Summary Reports Using Row Links e Establishing Links e Linking to External Worksheets Creating Summary Reports Using Row Links One
298. m Administrator will need to set up some system parameters for the currency translation function Ensure that the following preparations are in place before you use Currency Translation to build FRx reports e Set the Functional Currency in the Company Information dialog box e Set the path to the DAX Currency Translation file in the Company Information dialog box e Set the path to the DAX Currency Translation file in the System Preferences dialog box e Enter currency exchange rates in the FRx Currency Translation Maintenance window Note o If your FRx license includes the currency translation function both the Company Information dialog box and the System Preferences dialog box have additional fields for selecting the path to the DAX Currency Translation file For detailed instructions on setting up Report Designer for currency translation see Chapter 3 of your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator 5 Guide FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 302 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports Designing Currency Translation Reports You incorporate currency translation into FRx reports by e Selecting currency conversion format codes in the row format window e Identifying the currencies to display in the column layout window e Specifying the currency exchange rate source from the Currency Translation tab in the Catalog of Reports window This section explains how to use currency transla
299. m Tree using Sub Levels Regional Fabrikam Tree after reorganization Functional Fabrikam Works Tree using Sub Levels Regional Fabrikam Tree w Additional Text 2 Select any sample reporting tree 3 Click OK to display the reporting tree in the Reporting Tree window FRx Desktop Tree Untitled 1 Wer Edit Format EN Tree ma Admin Window Help He Fabrikam Works I LE Corporate H Denver Branch Summary of All Units LE Corporate Fabrikam Works Fabrikam Works Ine gt Denver Sales 3 Corporate Corporate amp amp amp 8 0000 000 IB fae Denver Branch Denver Branch B Wholesale IC Corporate Corporate amp 884 1000 000 Lee DenverService 6 Denver Sales Denver Sales 2 Lab Retail Retail amp amp k amp 1100 001 A Studio 8 Wholesale Wholesale amp amp k amp 1100 002 H San Francisco Br g Wholesale IC Wholesale IC 888 amp 1100 012 LE Corporate Denver Service Denver Service p San Francisco Sa i Lab Lab e8 1200 003 Al liren Studio Studio amp amp amp t 1200 004 Les San Francisco Se SanFranciscoBr San Francisco Branch B Lab 4 Corporate Corporate amp amp amp amp 2000 000 B Studio San FranciscoSa San Francisco Sales Retail Retail 2488 2100 2001 Wholesale Wholesale amp amp amp amp 2100 002 SanFranciscoSe San Francisco Service The tree structure displays graphically to the left of the window with the worksheet to the right This design makes the reporting tree hierarchy easy to see while working on the report
300. m of Rates Number of Rates Entered Balance Leave this check box blank to calculate averages Sum Rates No of Days Amount When you create a new report some of the boxes check boxes and options in the Catalog of Reports window are completed by default When you generate a report using the default settings it displays only summary information for the posted balances of the system date minus one period S 1 By default the report is generated as a DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML file to view in the DrillDown Viewer This section contains information and instructions on Creating a Report Generating a Report Printing Catalog Information Chaining Your Reports Cloning Your Reports Including Additional Text in a Report Creating a Report To create a report 1 From the FRx Control Panel click Catalog of Reports to display the Select Catalog for Display dialog box Select Catalog for Display SUE Ee o Balance Sheet Tabular Balance Sheet Balance Sheet Side by Side Balance Sheet With Ratios Cash Flow Statement Balance Sheet Consolidated Balance Sheet And Income Stmnt Consolidated FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 274 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports 2 Click New to display a new Catalog of Reports window 1 FRx Desktop Catalog al Po RF cation Records E Financial Repot x Use Posted Balances Only 3 Inthe Catalog ID box type the report name 4
301. mats column layouts reporting trees and catalog IDs 9 Inthe Import and export path box do one of the following e Leave the default IO Data subdirectory e Type anew path for imported or exported files This path identifies where FRx stores and searches for the FRx DrillDown Viewer frd frb and frz XML Microsoft Excel xls and Lotus 1 2 3 wk1 files 10 Inthe Amount and date format box do one of the following e Select an international format from the list e Leave this box blank to have FRx default to your computer s setting This setting applies only to this company and the reports associated with this company You can override this setting for columns in the column layout window or for individual reporting units in a reporting tree 11 Inthe Functional currency box select a currency code from the list Normally you should set the functional currency to be the same as the base currency for your general ledger This is the currency that is the starting point for all currency conversions 12 The Rates database path box is used in conjunction with the FRx Currency Translation function See Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation for more information 13 In the Period description box do one of the following Are full months Leave the default Month Ending Are not full months Type Period Ending Note This description is used on report headings FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 23
302. ment A taxonomy document can be either an XBRL taxonomy e g US GAAP CI or a custom taxonomy created in conformance with XBRL specifications Custom taxonomies are used to extend the XBRL taxonomies to address company and or industry specific items not addressed in the XBRL taxonomies XML eXtensible Markup Language XML provides a generalized markup scheme for representing the logical structure of documents in a system independent and platform independent manner XML files can be published on the World Wide Web or a server based Web repository and can be displayed in a Web browser FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 341 Glossary FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 342 FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Symbols Allocation to Parent box 207 amp character reporting trees 201 using hooks 185 character in reporting trees 201 A code 101 functions CPO 127 account modifiers 103 character reporting trees 201 using wildcards 169 character UNIT code 71 UNITT code 72 283 using 87 A account code including in report 149 mask building a row format 95 defining in tree 183 natural segment defining 94 using in reporting tree 215 using full account 95 using in FRx 9 account detail suppressing 82 account filters using 169 account mask defining 183 Account Mask box 68 account modifiers entering 104 linking to worksheets 127 128 Account Only option 50 232 Acco
303. ment tags to the row format 1 Inthe Row Format window double click the cell in the Link to XBRL Taxonomy column to display the XBRL Element Tag zoom XBRL c frx 6 7 io_data taxonomy files us gaap ci 2003 3 Document and Entity Information Income Statement Balance Sheet StatementStockholdersE quity Statement of Cash Flows NotesManagementsDiscussionAnalysis AccountantsReport ManagementReport OfficersCettificationFinancialS atements k 8 j ki kz amp amp 2 Click the expansion symbol at the XBRL element label to expand the node of the tree 3 Select the XBRL element tag for the row and click OK 4 Repeat steps to 3 for each row that requires an XBRL element tag Note The row format allows only one XBRL element tag per row If you attempt to add a second tag the system displays the message This row already contains an XBRL tag Would you like to overwrite this tag Click Yes to overwrite the old tag with a new tag Click No or Cancel to leave the previous tag unchanged Updating Existing Row Formats for XBRL 2 0 Any row formats you created in F Rx Financial Reporter 6 5 with links to the XBRL version 1 0 taxonomy need to be updated to use the new taxonomy file element tags and data scheme for XBRL 2 0 To update XBRL links in existing row formats 1 Inthe Row Format window open an existing row format that contains XBRL links 2 On the Row Format Link menu click Open Link Window to display t
304. mn Layout dialog box 6 Select a column layout and click OK 7 Double click the Date Period or Starting Date box and enter the period number or date for the selected row format The row format goes into effect as of the date or period you select 8 Repeat steps 5 7 for each column layout that you want to include Note If you run the report for a period or date that is not covered in the Effective Dates list the report will run using the row format that was originally selected displayed as dimmed in the Row Format box 9 Click OK to return the Catalog of Reports window Selecting a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Options Use the Reporting Tree options to include a reporting tree in your report However you do not need a reporting tree to create a report If you decide not to use a reporting tree the row format of your report must use natural account segments full account codes or some combination thereof Use the following options for the reporting tree e Reporting Tree Select to include a reporting tree in your report For more information on reporting trees see Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 240 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Building Blocks Tab Effective Dates Use the Effective Dates option to change the report presentation based on a specific point in time To assign multiple reporting trees to the report tied to an effective date or report p
305. mn detail to display period or year to date amounts FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 153 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail To Specify a Current Period YTD Amount 1 On the Column Layout window double click the Current Per YTD cell for the column to display the Select the Amount to Use dialog box Current Period Activit Year To Date Amounts Beginning of Period Balance Beginning of Year Balance 2 Select one of the following options e CUR to cause the column to reflect current period activity This type of column does not include beginning balances e YTD to cause the column to reflect year to date amounts This type of column includes beginning balances Caution If you run a report to the Transaction level with two YTD columns you will get an Out of Balance message Running two YTD columns in not supported in Report Designer e CUR BB to reflect the beginning balance for the specified period e YTD BB to reflect the beginning balance for the specified year 3 Click OK to return to the Column Layout window Month Jan 1 Balance ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE _ CUR __YTD BB YTD The CUR code causes this The YTD BB code causes this The YTD code causes this column to reflect current column to reflect the beginning column to reflect year to period activity balance for the base year date amounts The Column Layout window
306. move a user or group from the Access Granted list do the following To remove Specific users or group Do this 1 2 In the Access Granted list box select the user e mail address to remove Click Remove All users and clear the entire list 6 Click OK Click Remove All 7 On the Reporting Tree File menu click Save to save the tree FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 222 FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog of Reports Window 224 Catalog of Reports Menu Bar 229 Catalog of Reports Toolbar 229 Catalog Identification 230 Tabs for Building and Formatting Reports 236 Building Blocks Tab 237 Output Tab co cheek aaa aaua 243 Page Options Tab 257 Report Options Tab aaan aa aaa 261 REDONS 0 2 naa aaa adaa h des 274 Scheduling Reports for Processing 284 Chapter 7 From the Catalog of Reports window you combine your row format column layout and reporting tree building blocks to create a report In this window you give the new report a catalog ID name fine tune its formatting and then view print or export it as a file that can be read by Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1 2 3 This chapter explains e Fach option and tab in the Catalog of Reports window e How to create generate chain and clone reports FRx Report De
307. n where 1 Denver location and 100 Sales division FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 185 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Reporting Trees Finally in the third department segment of the account mask amp amp amp amp 1100 7 wildcards are listed for the Sales and Service department reporting units Wildcards in this segment instruct FRx to avoid building details into the tree from the row format The hooks amp in the natural segment already point to general ledger links in the row format that will pull in detailed information from the account s listed in the Link to General Ledger column If you do not restrict the row with these wildcards the tree pulls in the same data for every unit This results in summary units that contain duplicate and incorrect totals Note e If you used a full account code in your row format you may also need to use a reporting unit restriction in the same row to prevent pulling duplicate date for reporting units FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 186 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Window Reporting Tree Window When you open a reporting tree it displays in the Reporting Tree window as a graphical tree on the window s left side and as a worksheet on the right side When you point to a reporting unit on one side of the window it is also selected on the other side Use the Reporting Tree window to view the hierarchy of parent child
308. n click Row to open an untitled Row Format window On the Edit menu Add Rows from Chart of Accounts to display the Add Rows From Chart of Accounts dialog box Select amp symbols for every account position that is to be transferred to the row format You can also click the All amp amp amp button to change all the symbols within a segment to amp amp amp FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 68 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Building a Row Format 4 Ifyou want to include a specific range of accounts enter the beginning account number in the Account Range Start and the ending account number in the Account Range End boxes If you want to include all the general ledger codes for the selected segment leave these boxes blank Note You do not need to enter the entire account in the Account Range Start and Account Range End boxes For example if you want to limit a format to natural codes 4100 to 5400 enter these codes under the Natural account code box Add Rows from Chart of Accounts Mask Overview eel ar Desetiption Natural Location Division Department Beeb HHRH Hat 4100 Account Range End 5500 4 All ekk All HHH Starting row code fi oo Increment each row by fao 5 Enter values in the Starting row code and Increment each row by boxes This tells FRx the row code for the first row in the new row format and the spacing between numbers By accepting the default settings the first row c
309. n which a record is entered The entry date defaults to the system date and cannot be edited See also apply date document date extranet A type of intranet that is partially accessible to authorized outsiders Whereas an intranet resides behind a firewall and is accessible only to people who are members of the same company or organization an extranet provides various levels of accessibility to outsiders You can access an extranet only if you have a valid user ID and password and your identity determines which parts of the extranet you can view field A column of a database table or a cell of a spreadsheet in where data is entered or stored focus The visual cue of a selected box or control The focus takes many forms such as a solid outline box around an entry box or the dotted outline box around the label of a pushbutton check box or radio button form A secondary window displayed in the client area of the application window which emulates a written document or data entry form You enter and review most information through module specific forms format code Format codes control the appearance of a row Every row is interpreted as a general ledger detail row unless a code is present in the Fmt Code column of the row format Double click the Fmt Code column to display the list of available codes FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 336 format mask A group of codes used in row formats calculations and so forth
310. n window displays a toolbar below its menu bar The following toolbar buttons are common to all main windows Toolbar buttons specific to certain windows are explained in their appropriate chapters Toolbar Button Description Creates a new row format column layout catalog or reporting tree Or on the File menu click New m Opens an existing row format column layout catalog or reporting tree Or on the File menu click Open E Saves the current row format column layout reporting tree or catalog record Or on the File menu click Save E Prints the current row format column layout catalog or reporting tree Or on the File menu click Print Cuts the selected text to the Windows clipboard Or on the Edit menu click Cut E Copies the selected text to the Windows clipboard Or on the Edit menu click Copy Pastes the contents of the Windows clipboard to the cursor location Or on the Edit menu click Paste D Locks any Report Designer component Row Format Column Layout Reporting Tree or Catalog ID against accidental changes Opens the Catalog of Reports building block When you select this toolbar button the Catalog of Reports window opens When you close this window you return to the Report Designer Control Panel Table 1 1 Toolbar Buttons FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 12 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Getting Around in Report Desi
311. nce sheets when you select report rounding in the Catalog of Reports window Using the rounding adjustment feature you identify specific row codes in the Rounding Adjustment dialog box that FRx uses to adjust the report balance These row codes must be linked directly to your general ledger In other words the row must have an account code in its Link to General Ledger column Do not reference a description calculated or totaled row To adjust rounding in balance sheet reports 1 Open the row format you want to adjust 2 On the Edit menu click Rounding Adjustments to display the Rounding Adjustments dialog box Rounding Adjustments Rounding adjustment row aes podassi Cancel Total liabilities and equity row Adjustment amount limit 10 3 Inthe Rounding Adjustment row box enter the row code that you want adjusted to balance the balance sheet Note You can enter descriptive for example TOTAL_ASSETS or numeric for example 110 row codes in this dialog box However the row codes that you enter must be valid row codes in order for the rounding adjustment to work 4 Inthe Total Assets row box enter the Total Assets row code 5 In the Total Liabilities amp Equity row box enter the Total Liabilities and Equity row code FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 112 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Automatic Rounding for Balance Sheets 6 Inthe Adjustment Amount Limit box enter the limit expressed as a p
312. neral ledger Note Ifa missing account is higher or lower than all the accounts in the row format it is not included in the exception report Report Duplicate Accounts To generate an exception report that shows any accounts that were included more than once in the original report select this check box FRx determines the duplicate accounts from the account codes used in the row format Rollup Basis Use the following rollup options Period Numbers To roll up accounts by period numbers in multi company reporting trees select this option the default Period Dates To roll up accounts by period dates in multi company reporting trees select this option The Rollup Basis options are especially useful for companies with different start and end period dates and fiscal year dates FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 271 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab Report Queue Priority Level To change the report processing priority level on the Report Server click the Priority Level arrow and select High Medium or Low Note e This is a Report Server feature and is not available in the Desktop edition Calculation Priority The following calculation options are available e Calculate Columns First To perform the column calculations before the row calculations select this option This option might be necessary when a column calculation CALC intersects a total TOT or calculation CAL
313. nfreezes the Description column at the left of Description the reporting tree worksheet When the worksheet is frozen the Description column remains at the left side regardless of how many columns you scroll through to the right This command is a toggle When Freeze at Description is active the menu item displays a V next to it To clear it click Freeze at Description again until the V disappears Table 6 6 Reporting Tree Tree Menu Commands Options Reporting Tree Toolbar Icon The Reporting Tree window has a toolbar icon Tree Form specific to the reporting trees Other common tool bar icons are explained in Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus on page 18 Toolbar Icon Description The Tree Form icon opens the Reporting Units dialog box This has the same effect as pressing F8 or selecting View Form from the Tree menu Table 6 7 Reporting Tree Toolbar Icon FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 196 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Building Reporting Trees Understanding Building Reporting Trees Before you build any reporting trees you will first need to determine the various reporting structures your company will require The best approach is to carefully consider how you have set up your general ledger account structure Once you have done that you need to draw an organizational chart of your company Use your current general ledger departments proj
314. ng a Multi segment Account Code When entering a range using a full account code the range comparison is done on a segment by segment basis For example the range 5000 1000 00 TO 6000 2000 00 includes only accounts that match each segment In this case the first segment must be between 5000 and 6000 the second segment must be between 1000 and 2000 and the last segment must be 00 For example the account 5100 1100 01 would not be included in the report because the last segment is out of range Using Operators in Accounts You can add or subtract accounts from other accounts using plus and minus signs To use operators in accounts 1 Double click the Link to General Ledger column 2 Inthe Op box of the GL Account Links dialog box click the box until the operator that you want to use appears 3 Inthe From Account range or Individual Account or Account Set box enter or select an account number The following table shows the acceptable formats to add and subtract general ledger codes To Use this format Add full account 1205 2000 000 1205 2100 000 codes Add partial account 1205 1210 codes Add wildcard 120 11 accounts Add a range of full 1205 1000 000 TO 1205 2000 000 account codes Add a range of partial 1200 TO 1205 account codes Table 3 5 Acceptable Formats for Adding and Subtracting Account Codes FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 98 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats
315. ng and Viewing a Report 53 Completing Your Setup 55 Report Designer Chapter 2 This chapter describes how to create a basic report in the FRx Report Designer In this chapter you learn step by step how to build save and view a report To get up to speed quickly read this chapter before using Report Designer For examples of many specific types of reports see FRx 6 7 Sample Reports Although there are many features and options available in Report Designer you do not need to understand all of them in order to produce excellent reports Many users can significantly improve their reporting capabilities using just the basic features that are described in this chapter As you become more familiar with Microsoft Business Solutions for Analytics FRx you can take advantage of some of its more advanced features At this point refer to the remaining chapters in this guide for more detailed explanations of all the FRx features The material that follows is much easier to understand when you display Report Designer on your screen So before you continue make sure that FRx is installed and ready to go FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 21 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a Company Creating a Company When you first begin to use FRx you must supply Report Designer with information that is specific to your individual company or companies To create a com
316. nit in the tree If you use the code ANY in the Company column of the tree Report Designer uses the Company Name specified in the Catalog of Reports as the Company entity in the XBRL report The Catalog of Reports includes XBRL Instance Document as an output type selection When XBRL is selected as the output type you have the option to enable or disable the Missing Element Tag Warning feature when the report generates When you select XBRL as the output type Report Designer generates instance documents that include XBRL elements and syntax FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 286 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Extensible Business Reporting Here is an example of XBRL instance document output lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt group xmlns http www xbrl org 2001 instance xmlns xbrli http www xbrl org xmlns link http www xbrl org 2001 XLink xbrllinkbase xmlns xbrll http www xbrl org 2001 XLink xbrllinkbase xmlns xsi http www xbrl org xmlns XBRL1 C Program Files FRx 6 7 IO_Data Taxonomy Files us gaap ci 2003 07 07 xsd XBRL1 xsi schemaLocation C Program Files FRx 6 7 IO_Data Taxonomy Files us gaap ci 2003 07 07 xsd XBRL1 C Program Files FRx 6 7 IO_Data Taxonomy Files us gaap ci 2003 07 O7 xsd gt lt numericContext id P1M 2003 02 28 2 precision 18 cwa false gt lt entity gt lt identifier scheme gt Fabrikam Works Inc lt identi
317. nits so they usually do not need a mask However any unit in the reporting tree can contain an account mask and draw data directly from the general ledger FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 183 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Reporting Trees For example the account mask for Fabrikam Works Inc is shown in the following figure Account Mask XXXX XXXX XXX Natural Account Code E Locations 0 Corporate HQ 1 Denver 2 San Francisco Divisions 000 Corporate 100 Sales 200 Service Departments 001 Retail 002 Wholesale 003 Lab 004 Studio 012 Intercompany Figure 6 3 Fabrikam Works Inc Account Mask Segment Structure In the previous example each position within a segment is depicted with an X symbol to help visualize the formatting structure of an account mask Account masks that you create will contain a plus sign a hook amp or a wildcard symbol in place of this X These symbols amp in the account mask tell FRx the amount of information to be drawn from the general ledger Note The number of symbols amp in the reporting tree must match the number of characters or digits in the row format For example a row format might have seven digits in the Link to General Ledger column representing the natural segment plus a responsibility segment In this case there would have to be seven hooks amp amp amp am
318. nk to file Recipients Use catalog Use tree Combine catalog and tree Figure 7 11 E mail Options Tab These E mail selections are described below Enable E mail Options To send a report via e mail select this check box Once you select this option use one of the following report attachment options Send as Attachment To attach the report to an e mail message select this option Sending a DrillDown Viewer report file as an attachment automatically selects the Compress XML File check box on the Output Options tab Send as Link to File When you select Send as Link to File the report is not attached to the message Instead a shortcut to the file is attached When the user clicks on the shortcut the DrillDown Viewer retrieves only the information the user specifically selects from the shared report file The result is on demand paging that minimizes network traffic This is especially useful for large reports with many transaction detail records When you select Send as Link to File you must enter a shared network directory in the File Name box or use the Uniform Naming Convention UNC for example computer name share name directory name file name FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 254 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab Recipients Options Select this option to designate that recipients receive certain reports or reporting units Once you select this option use one
319. ns To replace text later in this chapter Delete Row Column Unit Use the Delete command to delete an entire row column or reporting unit 1 Select the row column or unit that you want to delete and then right click 2 From the menu select Delete Row Delete Column or Delete Unit Insert Row Column Unit Use the Insert command to insert an entire row column or reporting unit 1 To insert a row or unit place your cursor in the cell directly below where you want to insert the row or unit 2 To insert a column select the column directly before where you want to insert the new column 3 Right click and select Insert Row Insert Column or Insert Unit Report Designer inserts the row column or unit above the highlighted row column or unit Table 1 2 Shortcut Edit Menu Selections Continued To find text 1 Right click in the building block you want to search FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 16 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Getting Around in Report Designer 2 Select Find to display the Find dialog box ets In the Find What box type the text you are trying to locate 4 Click Find Next 5 To conduct a more specific search select one or more options from the Search Options section of the dialog box After locating the text you can replace it with new text by clicking Replace To replace text 1 Right click in the building block you want to search 2 S
320. ns and Totals IX Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree i 2 Xx Use Rounded Values for Calculations and Totals Yes No D2 DX Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree co 5 Use Rounded Values for Calculations and Totals No Yes 5 g A Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree eo Use Rounded Values for Calculations and Totals No No Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree None No Rounding Yes Yes Table 7 17 Rounding Selections and Differences This section shows several examples of how totals and roll ups perform using the different rounding option combinations In all cases FRx consistently totals the parent unit rows after rolling up the child units The following table displays report values that are not rounded All reports USA and Canada foot and cross foot to the Combined report Accounts USA Canada Combined Cash 1413 48 1201 20 2614 68 Accounts Receivable 287 37 100 40 387 77 Prepaid Expenses 112 47 200 05 312 52 Total Current Assets 1813 32 1501 65 3314 97 Table 7 18 No Rounding The following two examples use rounded values in calculations and totals Example also rolls up rounded values in the reporting tree Example 2 does not round before rolling up FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 265 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab Example 1 Use Rounded Values for Calculations and Totals X Roll up Rounded Values in the Tree Example 2 Use Round
321. nt Column Rates Rows Unit Bal Cil i ee Eee 3 A c NP 410 4109 NP 4110 4250 220 250 c cs 450 4509 370 280 310 c 370 WKS B 47 C 46 D 410 E5A3 CPO 430 370 430 4 0 cs Figure 4 10 Column Period Offset in Row Format Window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 127 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets When you run a report for period 1 Report Designer uses the values in column B of the worksheet January for period 2 the values in column C of the worksheet February and so forth Notice that all cells referenced A7 A6 etc are one column to the left of the actual amounts you would like brought into your report Note e If more than one worksheet cell is referenced the CPO or RPO discussed on the following page is only displayed once at the end of the worksheet cell listing See row 430 in Figure 4 10 as an example Row Period Offset RPO If the worksheet you are linking to has multiple rows that represent different periods you can use the RPO Row Period Offset switch to match the column layout accounting periods with the appropriate worksheet rows You can use this technique with either worksheet link method To use the IRPO switch enter the cell address that points one row above the first period row in the worksheet for a given column then add the RPO switch at the end of the cell address Using Multiple WKS Columns
322. nt of Cash Flows E NotesManagementsDiscussionAnalysis AccountantsReport 4 ManagementReport H OfficersCertificationFinancialS atements Click the expansion symbol at the XBRL element label to expand the node of the tree Select the XBRL element tag for the row and click OK Repeat steps 8 to 10 for each row that requires an XBRL element tag Note The row format allows only one XBRL element tag per row If you attempt to add a second tag the system displays the message This row already contains an XBRL tag Would you like to overwrite this tag Click Yes to overwrite the old tag with a new tag FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 292 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Including XBRL Elements in the Including XBRL Elements in the Column Layout For XBRL reports you can build your column layouts as described in Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts on page 137 with the following constraints Only GL and FRx Forecaster Budget columns are supported for financial data in the column layout for XBRL reports Caution If you use Forecaster columns in an FRx report these columns will not have valid dates in XBRL output Currency settings in the Currency Code and Currency Display detail rows override the functional currency for the company you select in the Catalog of Reports If no currency is specified in the column layout and functional currency is not defined for the selec
323. nts 69 600 Additional Paid In Capital 500 269 Office Furniture And Fixtures 34 500 Year to Date Income 295 556 Office Equipment 37 700 Retained Earnings 197 100 Less Accumulated Depreciation 35 780 Treasury Stock Net Fixed Assets 106 020 Shareholders Equity 1 042 925 Total Assets 1 392 634 Liabilities and Equity 1 392 634 Figure 3 18 Side by Side Balance Sheet The following windows show portions of the row format used to create the side by side balance sheet Rows 130 to 280 and 1030 to 1180 pull information from the general ledger but the NP Print Control code prevents them from printing FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 88 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Totaling and Calculations Rows 1870 to 2020 demonstrate how to use the CAL format code to format the information from the non printing rows For example row 1930 is interpreted as follows e Place the results of columns A and B from row 190 Cash Checking into columns A and B of the current row e Place the results of columns A and B from row 1090 Accounts Payable into columns C and D of the current row EES Cash Checking Cash Money Market 1810 Total Cash 1900 250 These two sets of rows pull data from the general ledger The NP Print Control code keeps these rows from printing in the report 1000 pes 1030 LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS EQUITY DES 100 DES 1090 Accounts Payable 2100 1120 Accrue
324. o a pivot table for automatic graphing in Excel XBRL Remaining at the forefront of advances in Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL technology the support of the 1 0 taxonomy has been upgraded to the 2 0 standard FRx Software understands the need for users to transfer complex highly confidential corporate financial information to regulators banks investors and boards of directors using a trusted standard of financial communication Because of this we will continue to make advances in the XBRL compatibility of FRx ensuring functional compliance as XBRL is further adopted by corporations and consumers of sensitive financial data FRx Currency Translation The Currency Translation module has been enhanced to allow for greater flexibility in the calculation of translation rates There are now two ways to calculate monthly average rates Additionally annual average rates can be calculated thereby streamlining the maintenance necessary for Column Layouts when creating FRx reports Users can now translate individual layers that represent transactions while comparing the total amount in the historical rates table to the appropriate general ledger total This ensures that all transactions have been accounted for when converting data at the appropriate historic rates Finally we have addressed several software modification requests to improve the Currency Translation product module as a whole FRx WebPort FRx WebView has been c
325. o add any e mail links This section contains information and instructions on e Adding Text to the Reporting Units in a Tree e Adding E mail Addresses to a Reporting Tree Adding Text to the Reporting Units in a Tree You can create up to ten additional text entries for each reporting unit in a reporting tree Each additional text entry can have a maximum length of 255 characters Once you have created the additional text entries in the reporting tree you can add the additional text entries to the row format or to the header footer section in reports For more information about adding additional text to row formats see To use additional text in the row format on page 72 For information about adding additional text to the headers and footers in reports see Including Additional Text in a Report on page 283 To add additional text to the reporting units in a tree 1 Inthe Reporting Tree window select the Reporting Unit row to which you want to add text 2 Scroll to the right in the worksheet and then click in the Additional Text cell for the reporting unit SALES DENVER mE A WHOLESALE DENVER SERVICE DENVER LAB DENVER STUDIO DENVER SAN FRANCISCO SALES SF E RETAIL SF E WHOLESALE SF SERVICE SF 2 2 STUDIO SF SEBEELPEEEPEL 3 Click the Additional Text arrow to display the Additional Text dialog box Adjusted after Acquisition C Text2_ 7 s FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s
326. o automatically include all units of a reporting tree If you specify a Starting Unit from the Building Blocks tab FRx includes the starting unit and all child units This produces the same result as marking the starting units and those units below when you select the Select Units at Run Time option Include Specific Number of Levels Use to indicate the number of levels from the starting unit to process FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 269 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab Levels Down From Starting Unit Type the number of levels to include in your report One level represents a parent child relationship and two levels represent a parent child child relationship This box does not appear dimmed but is inaccessible unless you select the Include Specific Number of Levels option Page Breaks The following options are available for page breaks e Before Each Reporting Unit To begin a new report page with each reporting unit select this check box the default e No Page Breaks between Units To print the reporting units without any page breaks between units select this option e Use Reporting Tree To use the page breaks as defined in the reporting tree select this option e Restart Numbering with Every Unit To restart the page numbering of each reporting tree unit within a report select this option If you want to use sequential page numbering for all of the selected reporting units do
327. o the new SysData directory Launch Report Designer on one user computer or workstation From within Report Designer on the Admin menu select Organization Click the SYSDATA button to display the Change SYSDATA Directory dialog box In the New Directory box enter the new Sysdata path Do one of the following for each user to the new location Users As each user launchers the Report Designer FRx detects this option and changes the SysData directory for the user to the new location This option places a MOVETO entry in the Sytem cfg file located in the existing SysData directory Change the SysData directory Click Update Current User for only the current user Only Select this option if you plan to change the directory for each user manually You could do this if you want to remove the existing SysData directory immediately after completing these steps Click OK A message displays informing you that Report Designer will exit after the change is made Click OK again Launch the Report Designer If you do not need to change the Import Export paths for companies skip to step 17 Otherwise on the Company menu click Information to display the Company Information dialog box Select the first company Type or select the new Import Export path and then click Save Repeat step 14 for all remaining companies FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 326 Appendix A FRx System Information 16 17
328. ode will be 100 followed by rows incremented by 30 For example 100 130 160 190 220 and so on Note Don t try to create a row format that contains all general ledger account combinations in the company Report Designer works best with many small row formats and uses the reporting tree and other techniques to run reports for multiple departments If your selection results in more than a few hundred report rows you should break the format down into smaller sections of the report using the account range feature described in the next section FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 69 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats 6 Click OK to build the row format After the build is complete the row format window appears showing row codes that identify each row row descriptions and general ledger account codes The following figure shows the asset accounts in a master row format roe pane fot R Ped Ea oe ae Tl a at Bal Ctl General Ledger Cash Checking Money Market Short Term Accounts Receivable Allowance for Bad Debt Due from FWC Due from FWC Elimination Inventories Sales Inventories Sales Elimination Inventory Supplies Prepaid Other Leasehold Improvements Accum Depr Lease Imprvmnts Office Furniture amp Fixtures Accum Depr OF amp F Office Equipment Accum Depr Office Equip Money Market Long Term Accounts Payable Leases Payable Note O If your account code in
329. odeizetieniracaeeladhedaies vii Who Should Read this Guide 0 cceccccceeeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeaeeeeseeenaeeeeesenaeeeeenenaaes vii How this Guide is Organized i 2 i isis sdeeveccesiedate pesdddadicevsdiehelecnieditecesdidatievianeieres vii What s New in Report Designer 6 7 cccceeccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaaes viii Improved in FRX 6 7 seidcia snes miasan iara arie a aaa a aaa aaa i araa aaia aaa viii Available Product Documentation wscisececd cetetevecds cet aveeed atredeceenes ine setaeiededtanvedectenneaeeeehte ix Other DOCUMENTATION 222 sie se desi anes cestvs hapeaeecteeiebeteek O accede x Conventions Used in this Guide cccecccceccsecceeceeeseeceeceeeseneeeseaseneceseseeeeceeeeteseeaeeseeseaaees xi How to Contact US ccc cceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseneaeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeensenaeeees xi Software LICENSING tc 2cisllesteisidlasedneiaseeredeied adelaide lvlienacdelinanieivieneede viecndtatennads xi Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer cccseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 1 Using THIS Guide sxtacdecrriencectedstntaccavtaveded can E E O A a 3 Keyboard Commands ooo eceeeeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeeaaaeeeseeeaeeeeeeenaneeeeeeaas 3 Mouse Commands iii iccicccs ieee nancies nents heed naeeeencaseeeeeidaeveevaddiewevaieaaeeeeddon 3 Typographical CONVENTIONS oo ce eeeeeceeeeeente eect eeeeee eee e
330. of the following catalog or tree options e Use Catalog To send the entire report to e mail recipients who are set up in the catalog select this option e Use Tree To send reports containing only the reporting units designated for recipients in the tree select this option E mail recipients must be set up in the reporting tree to make this option available e Combine Catalog and Tree To send reports to those users set up in the catalog but only the reporting units available to them in the tree select this option A recipient must be set up in both the catalog and the tree or no report will be sent Address This box displays the report s recipients This information is read from your default e mail program Apply any of the following functions to Address recipients e Add To select a name from your e mail manager system or to type a new name and e mail address click this button e Remove To remove an address from the Address box click the address you want to remove and then click this button e Clear To clear all addresses click this button Subject To add a subject title to the e mail message type the subject title here Message To add a message to the e mail message type your message here Publishing Reports to the Web The FRx WebPort lets you store manage and render both FRx and non FRx reports including Microsoft Word documents and Excel spreadsheets for viewing in a Web browser WebPort interfac
331. of worksheet cell addresses to place data in specific columns Depending upon how your worksheet is organized specify these addresses using one of the following methods e Direct reference e Value placement e Direct column placement Direct Reference The most direct way to reference a cell from an external worksheet is to type WKS followed by the column code to receive the cell followed by an equal sign FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 125 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets and the worksheet cell itself The cell references must be enclosed in parentheses See Format Conventions on page 129 for examples For example to place the information contained in cell B10 of your worksheet into column D of your report your link would be WKS D B10 You can also place external worksheet cells in several Report Designer columns by typing multiple Report Designer column worksheet cell references like this WKS D B10 E B11 F B12 Note You cannot combine worksheet cells through a formula and then place the results in a report You can however place different cell references on consecutive rows in Report Designer and present the total in a report Value Placement This method allows you to type a list of cell addresses that are automatically placed into valid columns GL or WKS columns and skip any invalid columns Simply specify cell addresses separated by space
332. olumn layout 159 Print Ctrl cell using 82 Print Detail option 280 Print Immediately box 251 Printer option 244 printing blank rows with zero balances 82 Catalog of Reports 225 column layout 140 reporting tree 191 reports 244 row format 58 Priority Level box 272 Promote Unit command 195 212 Prompt for Output Type at Run Time box 251 281 Provisional box 50 R range of periods entering 152 README TXT file 5 Record Control box using 18 Related Rows Unit cell entering calculations 87 entering conditional statements 90 formatting 73 restricting to a reporting unit 80 using 80 Rename command 140 191 Renumber Rows dialog box 62 Replace command 16 192 348 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide Replace File Without Warning box 251 Replace With box 17 61 report date setting 276 Report Duplicate Accts option 271 Report Missing Accts option 271 Report Options tab 236 261 Report Server Status command 228 report specification sets 8 Reporting Tree box 241 Reporting Tree command 226 reporting trees amp characters using 201 adding e mail addresses 217 building from chart of accounts 46 manually 206 changing moving units 204 rolling up to parent unit 207 connecting with general ledger 183 menus Edit 191 File 190 Format 193 Tree 194 opening 188 planning structure 197 reporting units child defining account mask 183 parent relationship 203 structure 181 definition 181 editing 188 207 inserting 192 promotin
333. ome examples of incorrect formatting include Incorrect format Reason for error B B5 Missing WKS change format to WKS B B5 WKS B B5 Missing parentheses change format to WKS B B5 Table 4 2 Examples of Incorrect Formats in Column Layouts Windows For more information on the column placement methods see Identifying Individual Worksheet Cells on page 125 Using a Separate Worksheet Link If you have large amounts of worksheet data in multiple worksheets for different units of your company create a separate link column that contains only the worksheet cell addresses This method described in the following section requires that you use a reporting tree This section contains information and instructions on e Defining the Link Type e Entering Worksheet Cell Addresses FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 130 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets e Identifying the Worksheet in the Reporting Tree e Setting Up the Catalog ID Defining the Link Type This method requires that you create a new row format Link column To define a separate worksheet link 1 Inthe row format worksheet Link menu select Open Link Window or click the Link Form icon to display the Links dialog box 14 4 Links gt gt t Find New Save Delete ose Link Type W Extemal Worksheet z Link Name KS1 Use Default or Create New Link Name Worksheet File Name
334. ome row A B c a elele H E Row Description Fmt R Ani Norm Print Colum Link to Code Code Rates Rows Unit Bal Cil n General Ledger 570 Income From Operations TOT 238 560 575 ma 577 Interest Income Expense c 5650 7000 578 579 Income Before Income Taxes TOT 57010577 580 Income Tax Expense 5500 610 640 TOT 579580 cs lacs FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 41 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Saving Your Row Format File Saving Your Row Format File After you have built and modified a new row format you can save the file to use as your sample report You can now use this same format for more than one department with Report Designer The flexibility of Report Designer uses each row format for more than one situation Report Designer also uses the reporting tree and other techniques to run reports for multiple departments See To view an existing tree on page 46 To save your Row Format file 1 3 Review your completed row format for the sample income statement DES Revenue DES DES Sales Sales Returns 4110 Sales Discounts 4250 C 410 4109 _ Net Sales TOT 100 160 190 DES cogs Gross Margin ToT DES DES 206 220 Operating Expenses k i l DES Salary Expense T _ Officers Comp _ Depreciation Expense Office Expense Sup
335. on and instructions on e Referencing External Worksheet Cells FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 124 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets e Identifying Individual Worksheet Cells e Automatic Matching of Worksheet Columns to the Current Period e Using a Combined Worksheet Link e Using a Separate Worksheet Link Referencing External Worksheet Cells Because the column layout is defined separately from the row format you must determine which Report Designer columns receive the worksheet data You should have a copy of the column layout you will use as well as the referenced worksheet in the row format Report Designer columns that accept external worksheet data are those identified in the column layout as GL or WKS If you place a worksheet cell in a CALC DESC or FILL column the value is ignored When referring a particular worksheet in a workbook be sure the worksheet name is at least two characters for example workbook xls AA When referring to a worksheet cell address use the column letter and row number reference such as C10 column C row 10 Report Designer does not support range labels When referring to a specific sheet in a Lotus worksheet use the sheet letter in addition to the column letter and row number reference For example use A C10 where A represents the sheet letter Identifying Individual Worksheet Cells In the row format you can specify a series
336. onomy published by the XBRL Committee is installed in the IO_Data Taxonomy Files directory with FRx Add XBRL element tags to each GL Link CAL and TOT type row that you want to include in the XBRL instance document Only rows with XBRL element tags will be included in the instance document Remember that XBRL output does not support the use of FRx row modifiers in the row format Row formats created for XBRL version 1 0 must be updated to link to the XBRL version 2 0 taxonomy before they will run correctly See Updating Existing Row Formats for XBRL 2 0 on page 291 This section includes information and instructions on Creating a Link to the XBRL Taxonomy Adding XBRL Element Tags to the Row Format Updating Existing Row Formats for XBRL 2 0 Creating a Link to the XBRL Taxonomy To create a link to the XBRL taxonomy 1 a fF WO N On the Row Format Link menu click Open Link Window to display the Links dialog box 14 4 Links OE cl Find New Save Delete s Link Type x e Link Name Use Default or Create New Link Name XBRL Taxonomy Files c frs 6 7 io_data us gaap ci 2000 07 31 xsd a Optional Description General Ledger Year Optional Fiscal Year Usually Blank Describe the Link to the Source of Report Data In the Links record control box click New Click the Link Type arrow and select XBRL as the link type In the Link Name box type a name for the link Click the XBRL Taxonomy F
337. onsolidated into FRx WebPort to form a single product module that is available to all FRx users regardless of product edition or general ledger Users can quickly publish Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel documents with their FRx reports for easy access by others on a secure Intranet site Stability and Performance Improvements to FRx 6 7 allow for faster report generation and quicker export of reports to the FRx DrillDown Viewer and printing options Additionally FRx has been upgraded to support Microsoft Access 2002 and changes have been made to the database access technology These enhancements ensure a more stable environment In addition improvements to the way the general ledger index G32 file is built will reduce the likelihood of database corruption Available Product Documentation The following documentation is available for this product e FRx 6 7 Installation and Configuration Guide This guide helps system installation personnel install FRx products through hands on instructions e FRx Report Designer Getting Started Guide This guide helps new users understand how to set up and configure the Report Designer to work with their company s specific general ledger data FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide ix Preface FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide This guide helps users apply the Report Designer components to design and generate reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide This guide helps FRx
338. or non natural account segments Hook amp represented by the Go to the row format for the this segment ampersand character information Wild card represented by Avoid building details into the tree for this the question mark segment information To change the size of any of the displayed segments click Combine and then click the segment separator Otherwise go to step 7 With the segment separator selected use the double arrows to re size the box To split a segment such as location division click Split and then click the part of the segment where you want to split the characters to create a new segment To change the hierarchy of the segments in the Segment Hierarchy box click the segment you want to move and drag it to the segment to which it should report Note This is where you define how segments report to each other and define ranges if desired for each segment To specify a range of account numbers to bring to the new reporting tree in the Segment Hierarchy box select the segment for which you want to define ranges and complete steps 10 11 Otherwise go to step 12 Note When you select the segment in the Segment Hierarchy box the cursor moves to the From Acct box for that segment In the From Acct box for that segment type the first account number in the range and press the TAB key to move the cursor to the To Acct box In the To Acct box type the last account number you want to
339. ore information see Account Masks on page 183 Defining the Full Account Code If you define the full account code your row format options narrow sharply For example if you use the entire account code to generate detailed departmental reports higher level reports may not be possible If you enter the full account code in the row format that account will always be used when you generate reports The row format looks elsewhere for responsibility segments only when there are no responsibility segments entered in the account code definition in the row format However you can link data from one row format to another to create summary reports You can combine the full account code with natural segments in a single row format This technique can be helpful when you want to use the account template in the reporting tree for most accounts but also include accounts from other responsibility segments such as divisions or departments It s also helpful for generating company wide information such as total sales revenue in one row and then calculating the proportion of department total to company total When you use a full account code that has wildcard characters for each position outside of the natural code you include all accounts with that natural segment for the entire company Any row with the full account code is included in every unit of your reporting tree regardless of any responsibility segments that may be contained in the
340. ormation on the reporting unit structure FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 203 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Building Reporting Trees You can create this parent child hierarchy structure by moving individual reporting units or an entire branch parent unit and all child units to higher or lower levels on the graphical tree This is called promoting and demoting units Promoting a unit moves it to a higher level in the tree Demoting a unit moves a unit to a lower level When you build a tree manually you can promote and demote reporting units using a drag and drop operation or using the Tree menu See To promote and demote reporting units with drag and drop on page 211 or To promote and demote reporting units with the Tree menu on page 212 for the appropriate instructions Reporting Units Window You can also define a unit as a parent unit or assign a child to a specific parent unit on the Reporting Units window See To assign parent child relationships in the Reporting Units dialog box on page 212 After completing the tree reporting structure you can verify that parent units have been selected for each child For specific instructions on verifying parent units see To verify a unit s parent unit on page 212 When you are ready to start building a reporting tree manually continue to the following section Building Reporting Trees Manually on page 205 FRx Report Designer 6
341. ort Formulas option If you accidentally select this option Microsoft Excel will ignore reversed credit values and your reports may be unfavorable To add Print Control codes 1 Double click the Print Control cell in the column to display the Select Special Print Control Options dialog box 2 Select one or more codes for special printing characteristics Print Control for Conditional Columns When you use the conditional column options any column can be displayed or omitted based on whether the column s fiscal period falls before or after the base period on the report For example this feature allows you to create a report that displays 12 different periods in which actual amounts print for the base period and all prior periods Budget amounts or forecast amounts from an external spreadsheet display for all future periods Such a report dynamically derives the correct data for the actual or budget or forecast amounts based on the base period for which the report is run Use the following dialog box to select a print option for Conditional columns Select Special Print Control Options ron but u lations Col is Balance Sheet Column in Mixed IS BS Report Change Sign in Col if Normal Balance of Row CR Suppress Column if All Zeros Blanks Suppress Rounding Conditional Column Column is Printed only if Selected Condition is TRUE P lt B Period is LESS than Base Period Period is GREATER than Base Per Period is EQUAL to Base Pe
342. ort Launcher 6 7 User s Guide PB This code is used for reports that contain both a balance sheet and an income statement The code e Starts a new report page e Tells FRx the page is a balance sheet or supporting schedule to the balance sheet e Places the title from the Description column in this row into the report heading To activate this feature you must also use the ROW option in the report header in the Catalog of Reports For more information see Understanding the Catalog of Reports on page 223 e Suppresses printing of all columns other than the BS column when the column layout contains multiple amount columns and the BS option is selected in the Print Control section of one column in the column layout This allows a report to contain both a multi column income statement for example Current Period amp Year to Date and a FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 75 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats single column balance sheet for example Year to Date only For more information see Creating Column Layouts on page 137 Note Use the Balance Sheet Income Statement distinction only if your report includes both a Balance Sheet and an Income Statement and if the column display should be different for each type of report PI This code starts a new page for an income statement It functions like the PB code except that it tells FRx the page is an income statement You can use th
343. ort Manager is an optional module that pulls together FRx reports and other files such as Microsoft Office documents for easy viewing printing and distribution Report Server The FRx Report Server is a separate FRx product that runs on a server platform dedicated to report generation and report scheduling With the Report Server installed and configured on the network FRx users can continue working at their workstations while the reports generate on the Report Server reporting currency A currency used for financial reporting purposes This could be the functional currency or is typically the currency of the parent company reporting tree One of the three FRx building blocks Reporting trees are visual representations of an organization s structure showing levels in the corporate hierarchy such as companies divisions departments projects and tasks See also column layout row format FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 339 reporting unit A level within an FRx reporting tree that represents either an individual department that draws data directly from the general ledger or a summary unit A company can create multiple reporting trees to facilitate different financial reports without affecting the general ledger See also detail unit summary unit responsibility segment The segment or segments of the general ledger account code that refer to the overall structure of an organization Examples are departments div
344. orting unit For more information see Restricting a Row to a Reporting Unit on page 80 e Tell FRx which Historical Rate ID to use as the related rate when using the CCHIST format code or which type of average to calculate daily weekly monthly etc when using the CCAVG format code e Define the rows to sort when using with the SORT or ASORT format code e Define the base row for calculations when using the CBR format code You can design a single row format to use with all responsibility segments such as locations divisions and departments in your organization FRx allows you to build a reporting tree to define all of the different detail and summary responsibility segments which are referred to as reporting units However you may sometimes want to designate a row in a report to apply to a specific reporting unit in your reporting tree For example you may want to create an individual row that details the total operating expenses for a specific department To do this zoom in the Related Rates Rows Unit cell of the row format and select both a reporting tree and reporting unit FRx restricts this row to this specific reporting unit Note O Restricting a row to a specific reporting unit is particularly important when the full account code is used in a row format When you use the full account code the amount is reported to every unit in the reporting tree with the potential for significant duplication of the amount as it is ro
345. orting unit information Use this dialog box to enter delete or change information about the selected reporting unit For more information about the boxes in the Reporting Units dialog box see Understanding Building Reporting Trees Manually on page 203 Promote Unit Promotes the selected unit in the reporting tree to the next highest level Demote Unit Demotes the selected unit in the reporting tree to the next lowest level Expand All Expands all of the tree s detail Expand Branch Expands a selected branch by one level in the reporting tree to show additional detail The unit s child units display If there are multiple levels in the branch they expand by an additional level each time you execute this command Collapse Branch Collapses a selected branch by one level in the reporting tree The unit s child units disappear If there are multiple levels in the branch they collapse by an additional level each time you execute this command Table 6 5 Reporting Tree Tree Menu Commands Graphical Tree Unit Selected FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 195 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Reporting Tree Menus and Toolbar Icon Additionally the Tree menu contains command options that do not require you to select a reporting unit on the reporting tree Tree Menu Description Commands Expand All Expands all of the tree s detail Freeze at Freezes or u
346. orts you should normally include at least one column for the general ledger current period amounts CUR and at least one column for the general ledger year to date amounts YTD The transaction amounts appear in the CUR column and period balances in the YTD column You can also include any of the transaction detail codes that are specific to your accounting system See the FRx Report Designer Getting Started Guide for more information Remember when you generate your transaction detail report you must select either the Transaction Only or Financial amp Transaction option in the Detail Level box of the Catalog of Reports window Note Transaction detail accounts with a zero balance and no period activity are suppressed in your reports unless the Display Rows With No Amounts option is selected in the Formatting tab within the Report Options tab of the Catalog of Reports This section contains information and instructions on e Creating Multiple Period Transaction Detail Reports e Creating Year to Date Transaction Detail Reports e Creating Debit Credit Reports Creating Multiple Period Transaction Detail Reports Report Designer enters transaction detail amounts only in current columns CUR in the Current Per YTD cell If you want a report to cover more than one period enter the period range in the Period Code cell of the CUR column For example to run a report covering the last three periods enter a Period Code of BASE 2 TO BASE in the
347. ositive whole number that you want to place on automatic adjustments FRx compares this amount with the absolute value of the actual rounding difference When you generate your report if the Rounding Adjustment row value decreases or increases beyond the defined Adjustment Amount Limit a message appears Note FRx applies the adjustment limit based on the Rounding of Amounts option that you select in the Catalog of Reports For example if you select to round your report to thousands and enter 2 in the Adjustment Amount Limit FRx displays a warning message when the Rounding Adjustment row value increases or decreases by more than 2 000 7 Click OK The amounts in your balance sheet will balance even when rounding is turned on For additional information on rounding refer to Rounding of Amounts on page 263 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 113 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Automatic Rounding for Balance Sheets FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 114 FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Linking to Other Sources of Information Chapter 4 Creating Summary Reports Using Row Links Linking increases reporting flexibility by 116 allowing you to link to other sources of information within the same row format or Establishing Links 5 5 cdeskcakage 121 across multiple row formats You can link to several sources of information in your reports Linking to External Worksheets 124 inc
348. ou want to delete 2 Select Delete Column To delete one or more consecutive columns highlight the columns and select the Delete Column command A window asks you to confirm the deletion FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 141 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Column Layout Menu Functions Insert Column To insert one or more new columns do the following 1 Click the gray box at the top of the column after which you want to insert a new column 2 Select Insert Column To insert more than one column highlight the number of columns to be inserted and select the Insert Column command Report Designer adds the columns FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 142 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Headers Adding Column Headers Use the Column Headers portion of the Column Layout window to enter headers for that column Enter each column header exactly as you want it to appear at the top of your column on the printed report By default Report Designer centers and underlines the description over the column The default width of a Description column is 30 characters while the default width of an Amount column including cents commas and parentheses is 14 characters To accommodate long headers Report Designer allows up to 20 rows of column headers The column headers are different and separate from the report headers that you define in the Catalog of Reports window The column headers apply to
349. owser e XBRL Use this option to generate XBRL instance documents that include XBRL elements and syntax XBRL output requires the row format to include XBRL Element Tags applied to GL Link CAL and TOT rows Only the rows that are tagged with an XBRL Element tag will be passed into the instance document FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 244 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab Excel 5 or above via OLE Use this option to export your report to a Microsoft Excel 5 workbook via OLE To do this you must have Microsoft Excel 5 0 or later installed on your workstation or on Report Server if you queue the report for processing When you select this option the following options display on the Output Options tab Excel 5 or above via 0 LE BSRATIO XLS E4 These options are described in the following table Excel OLE Options Description Activate Workbook Use this option to open a Microsoft Excel workbook after generating a report If you do not select this option your report is saved as an xls file and Microsoft Excel does not open automatically Format as Excel If you generate an account or transaction detail report Outline you can use Excel s built in outline control to allow the user to hide or show row details Select this check box to enable this feature Password To assign a password to your Microsoft Excel xls file and protect it from unauthorized access type
350. oyment executable setup is created using options specified during the first installation When users install they install from a shared network directory and no CD is required Users are not prompted for any install options they simply click Finish at the end of the installation All users are accessing one file server to use FRx Troubleshooting and fixing FRx issues is usually a one time operation so you do not need to troubleshoot multiple computers Disadvantages This type of installation makes it easier for one user to bring all users down For example if one user deletes a file this action affects all users Moving FRx to a New Location or New Server Sometimes you need to move FRx to a new server or a different location on a network When you perform this move you must modify paths within Report Designer to allow use of the existing data files and to allow client workstations to continue to use FRx To set up a fat client In a fat client environment FRx does not need to be re installed on client machines 1 2 Have all users close all FRx applications Create the new SysData directory in its new location Warning Be sure to leave the existing Sysdata directory intact FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 325 Appendix A FRx System Information on O A Q 10 11 12 13 14 15 To Do Change the SysData directory Click Automatically Update All Copy all files from the existing SysData directory t
351. p amp amp amp in the reporting tree representing the natural and responsibility information Account Mask Example In the following figure you can view the account mask for the Sales Denver reporting unit in the Fabrikam Works Inc reporting tree CORPORATE LE CORP DETAIL Unit Code Tile Dexcilin Acct ee DENVER FABRIKAM WORKs Consolidated E SALES DENVER CORPORATE Corporate E SERVICE DENVER CORP DETAIL Corporate Detail amp amp amp amp 2000 000 Account za hia DENVER Denver Mask B SERVICE SF SALES DENVER Sales Division Denver Siekeb 1100 22 SERVICE DENVER Service Division Denver k amp amp k 1200 7 SAN FRANCISCO San Francisco SALES SF Sales Division San Francisco k amp amp k 2100 77 SERVICE SF Service Division San Francisco amp amp amp amp 2200 Figure 6 4 Account Masks in Reporting Tree Window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 184 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Reporting Trees FRx created this account mask amp amp amp amp 1100 when building the reporting tree and now displays it in the Acct Mask column for the Sales Denver reporting unit The specific account mask for Sales Denver reporting unit amp amp amp amp 1100 77 was created by FRx from the account mask entered amp amp amp amp when building the reporting tree The plus signs in the Location Division position of the original account mask instruct FRx to create a unit
352. p o Nl E Department Figure 6 13 Limiting Accounts in Reporting Tree by Segment Range Figure 6 14 shows the resulting regional reporting tree for Fabrikam Works gt SUMMARY Denver Sales E Retail E Wholesale Denver Service Lab E Studio gt San Francisco Se E Lab Figure 6 14 Summary of All Units Denver Sales Denver Sales Retail Retail amp amp amp 6 1100 001 Wholesale Wholesale amp kk amp 1100 002 Denver Service Denver Service Lab amp amp amp amp 1200 003 Lab Studio Studio amp amp 86 1 200 004 San Francisco Sa San Francisco Sales Retail Retail amp amp 88 2100 001 Wholesale Wholesale amp amp 88 2100 002 San Francisco Se San Francisco Service Lab Lab amp amp 88 2200 003 222ALZ2ZZZ Studio Studio amp 888 2200 004 EREEELELEEL FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide Reporting Tree with Specific Locations and Departments 199 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Building Reporting Trees Example 2 Splitting the Account Mask and Changing the Hierarchy In this example we have split the account mask and changed the hierarchy of the segments Figure 6 15 shows how we first used the Split icon cleaver to separate the location away from the segment Second we dragged the New Segment to the top of the graphical segment hierarchy L
353. pany 1 Start Report Designer to display the FRx Control Panel 2 On the Company menu click Information to display the Company Information dialog box Company Information Pe Fabrikam Works Inc O FRx Demo General Ledger si FRxDemo C Program Files FRx 6 7 io_data 4 Meni Ending Months Ering The Company Information dialog box displays showing the first company information record 3 Click the New icon to clear the boxes in the Company Information dialog box 4 Inthe FRx company code box type a unique code that describes this company and corresponds with your general ledger name Caution FRx does not recognize the following symbols as valid company code characters lt gt FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 22 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a Company 5 Inthe Company name box type a description that corresponds with your FRx Company name This name also appears on your reports by default so select and type your description with this in mind 6 Click the Accounting system box and select your accounting system from the list 7 Click the FRx System Information tab 8 Inthe Specification set box leave the Default option selected If you previously created a specification set to work with your accounting system you may select it here Note This is the database name where FRx stores a company s report building blocks the row for
354. pecially important when you want to show all unfavorable variances as negative amounts If a totaled or calculated number displays the wrong sign add a C to the Norm Bal column in the row format to reverse the sign For more information on the column layout Print Control see Print Control Codes on page 158 Print Control Column The row format Print Ctrl column controls print formatting features of the current row These print control codes apply to amount rows only NP Indicates a non printing row This row is not printed on the report but can be used in all calculations cS Includes a currency sign for example on all amount columns except percentage columns which never receive a currency sign On the Company menu click International Formats to set up the currency formats XD Suppresses display of accounts on account or transaction detail reports This feature is useful when a row includes multiple accounts that should not be listed in the account detail or transaction detail report X0 Suppresses display of the row if all amounts are zero This is meaningful only when the suppress zero balance option is not selected in the catalog of reports Bo Leaves zero columns blank DR Displays the debit amounts of the accounts for the selected period FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 82 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats CR Displays the credit amounts of the accounts for the s
355. pecified user when an application crashed causing Report Designer to close prior to removing the user name from the record Resolution 1 Verify that the building block is not open on another computer If it is wait for the user to finish or have the user close the building block 2 If the building block is not open on any workstation have all users close Report Designer 3 On the File menu click Close All This action closes all open rows columns trees and catalogs 4 On the File menu point to Compact FRx Database and then click Current Spec Set Database 5 Do one of the following e Ifthe specification set compacts successfully open the problematic building block again e Ifthe spec set fails to compact verify that all users are out of Report Designer and then try to compact the specification set again Disk or Network Error Q A I received the error message Runtime error 3043 Disk or Network Error when launching Report Designer building an index or generating a report What caused this message You can receive this error when launching Report Designer building an index or generating a report The possible causes of this error are e Invalid work drive path import export path or output path e Insufficient permissions to a network directory or resource e A network resource is unavailable To resolve this error use the following steps If you cannot open the Report Designer 1 Click Sta
356. plies Expense Service Maintainence Expense Service Rent Expense Travel Expense Advertising Expense Commission Expense Total Operating Expenses TOT 28070 550 Income From Operations TOT 238 560 Income Tax Expense _ Interest Income Expense 4 Income Before Income Taxes TOT p 570 T0 577 Net Income Row Format Set FRxDemo E In the Row Format dialog box do the following In the Name box type a unique name for the row format In the Description box type a description for the row format FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 42 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a Column Layout 4 Click OK to save the file and return to the Row Format window Creating a Column Layout You can define the layout of your report columns The information in a column layout is combined with the information in a row format and any reporting tree information and is stored in the Catalog of Reports To create a column layout 1 On the Report Designer Control Panel window click Column Layouts to display the Open Column dialog box Open Column 3 Month Current and YTD YTD Balances Only Balance_SByS YTD Balances Only Side by Side BalSheet_Tab Tabular Balance Sheet CashFlow Cash Flow Statement Consol_3Mo_YTD Consolidated Last 3 Months and YTD Act Bud Varianc Consol _FW_FWC Consolidated Filmworks and Canada Consol_Fw_PWC_EL Consolidated Fi
357. port Designer default value in the Link Name box or if you would like to use your own link naming system type a new name 4 Inthe Worksheet File Name box click the arrow 5 Inthe Worksheet File dialog box type or select the worksheet to use and click Open 6 To specify a specific worksheet select one of the following options To Do this Specify a worksheet within a Type the workbook name in brackets followed Microsoft Excel workbook by the worksheet name for example COMPBUDG XLS DENVER To specify a sheet within a Type the spreadsheet name in brackets followed Lotus 1 2 3 WK1 spreadsheet by the sheet letter Note Report Designer imports only the first sheet in a Lotus 1 2 3 WK3 spreadsheet To select a different sheet save the sheet as a separate WK3 file If you type a file without a full path Report Designer uses the path defined for the default 1O_Data directory in the Company Information dialog box The file name appears by default in the Link to GL Worksheet header description 7 Inthe Optional Description box you can type a description of the link 8 Click Save 9 Click Close Entering Worksheet Cell Addresses Type the worksheet cell address in the Link to GL Worksheet column along with the WKS x worksheet formula indicator for example WKS B A12 C A13 D A14 The row format shown in Figure 4 10 on page 127 illustrates how to use a combined worksheet link e Row 370 calculates gross profit e
358. ports The following list explains the options available Display GL Account Code To include the general ledger account codes in your report select this check box FRx places the general ledger account number into the report description DESC column at the account and transaction detail level Display Account Description from Chart To include account descriptions from the chart of accounts in your account and transaction detail report select this check box the default FRx includes as much of the account description as will fit into the report description DESC column Display Row Code To display the row format row codes in your account and transaction detail report select this check box the default Combine Posted and Unposted Amounts To combine posted and unposted balances in your account and transaction detail report select this check box the default If you do not select this option FRx displays the posted and unposted amounts on separate account detail line items for each account with unposted activity Display Underscore before Totals To display an underscore line before each row total in account detail reports select this check box the default For transaction detail reports select this option to print an underscore before and after each period total each account total and row total Mark Unposted Accounts with To flag unposted balances or transactions with an asterisk select this check box the
359. pter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats The following figure illustrates a row format with line types and 2 Following this is the report that this row format creates Note the thick line type 2 above the reporting unit Consolidated and the thin lines type 1 below Payables and Cost of Goods Sold A B c ra ED 7 EIE H Row Description Fmt R ated Norm Print Link to Code Code Rates Rows Unit Bal Cul General Ledger E DES 50 Type LNE 75 DES UNIT Cash BCDEHI 117 Payables c B C D E HI 2 2209 Type 1 LNE 130 Net Sales c 412 42 4109 Cost of Goods Sold 45 4509 Type 1 LNE 220 Gross Profit TOT 220 250 c Operating Expenses 5000 TO 5400 Provision for Taxes 5500 Other Income Expenses Cc 567 7 DES Net Income TOT 310 340 370 400 c Figure 3 9 Formatting Examples in Row Format Window Sample FRx Report For the Three Months Ending March 31 2002 Dollars in Thousands Monthly Activity Year To Date Current Year Last Year n January February __March Actual Budget Variance Actual Change Line Type 2 Consolidated Cash 2 471 2 522 5 429 10 422 10 422 129 009 91 90 Line Type 1 Payables 8 365 1 254 13 956 21 067 21 067 322 633 106 50 Net Sales 505 607 513 951 1 090 500 2 110 058 787 002 1 323 056 2 764 416 23 70 Cost of Goods Sold 311 722 318 268 798 339 1 428 329 490 304 938 025 2 015 147 29 10 Gross Profit 193 885 195 6
360. pter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail IF THEN ELSE Statements IF THEN ELSE statements allow any calculation to be conditional upon the results of any other column You can refer to other columns but not to a report cell in the IF statement thus any calculation must be applied to the entire column Type the calculation in the Cale Formula section of the column that receives the results of the calculation Note You cannot place the results of a calculation in any other column they must be in the column that contains the formula For example the formula IF B gt 100 THEN B ELSE C 1 25 translates to If the amount in column B is greater than 100 place the value from column B in the CALC column If the value is not greater than 100 multiply the value in column C by 1 25 and place the result in the CALC column IF is always followed by a logic statement which evaluates to true or false The formula used for both the THEN and ELSE clauses can contain references to any number of columns and may be as complex as needed including multiple nested calculations For example IF statement THEN H G C D E F 25 Adding Special Formatting Options The following column detail rows apply special formatting to selected columns Although some of the Print Control and Column Restrictions options are specific to GL columns most options apply to all column types Column Width Use this option to specify the number of
361. que will introduce rounding differences into your total making a true balance impossible You can solve this problem by adding an automatic rounding adjustment to your report Out of Balance Message when Drilling into Transaction Detail Q When drilling into transaction detail within the FRx DrillDown Viewer I receive the message A balance on the transaction detail report may be incorrect The column layout used with a transaction detail report must contain a CUR column and a YTD column This error could also indicate a problem with the transaction details not matching the period balance reports in the general ledger A Report Designer does not support the use of more than one YTD column in a transaction detail report Use of more than one YTD column may cause out of balance messages when drilling into the transaction detail of the report Reports that cross fiscal years at the transaction level are also not supported While this message may not appear on all reports this configuration is not guaranteed to produce reliable transaction detail reports and should not be used Resolutions To prevent the out of balance message use any of the following solutions 1 2 3 Change the column layout to include only one YTD column Generate the report for Financial and Account detail only Change the additional YTD columns to CUR columns with a period code of 1 TO 12 This message may also appear in a report that uses rounding if
362. r Period is LESS or EQUAL to Base Per Period is GREATER or EQUAL to Base Per Figure 5 19 Special Print Control Options FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 162 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail The following column layout is an example of a column layout with print selections for conditional columns ACTUAL ne ACTUAL na ACTUAL Budget_Origi BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE 1 2 2 3 3 CUR CUR CUR CUR CUR 10 Extra Spaces SE Tot Special Eome Mask These columns print only when the These columns print only when base period is 2 or less the base period is greater than 2 Figure 5 20 Conditional Columns in Column Layout Window Figure 5 20 when the base period is 3 then actual amounts print for periods 1 to 3 and budget amounts or forecast amounts from an external spreadsheet print for periods 4 to 12 To set up a conditional report 1 Create a column layout with two columns for each period The first column contains actual amounts and the second contains budget amounts 2 For the actual column in the Print Control row enter the conditional operator P lt B 3 For the budget column in the Print Control row enter the conditional operator P gt B Note When a column is suppressed by a conditional option it is not included in any calculations 4 Click OK to return to the Column Layout window You can also add a total column that totals all of the periods in the year However if yo
363. r the column layout restricted to reporting units Without a reporting tree Report Designer suppresses the data for the missing reporting units 6 Is there at least one general ledger column in the column layout A GL column is required for displaying numbers from the general ledger Reports Using Reporting Tree with Overstated Numbers Q When generate a report using a reporting tree certain numbers are dramatically overstated A What is happening There are two possibilities e Ifsome rows use the full account code as opposed to only the natural account code the related data may pull into every reporting unit with an account mask e Or ifthe summary units of the reporting tree use general ledger account masks this can cause a duplication of data Some Rows Use the Full Account Code in the Row Format If some rows use the full account code as opposed to only the natural account code the related data may pull into every reporting unit with an account mask You must restrict these rows to a particular reporting unit To restrict a row to a reporting unit 1 From the row format double click the Related Rates Rows Unit cell of the row that uses a full account code 2 Select a reporting tree and click OK 3 Select a reporting unit and click OK Report Designer restricts this row to the selected reporting unit Summary Units in the Reporting Tree have General Ledger Account Masks If the summary units of the reportin
364. re rows where all detail rows have been suppressed because of zero balances for example you can suppress the printing of format rows using the Related Rates Rows Unit column For more information see Relating a Format Row to an Amount Row on page 81 LFT RGT CEN These codes align the row format Description column information on the left right or center of the report line regardless of its placement in the column layout CBR The CBR Change Base Row code defines the base row for columns that calculate a percentage of or multiply by the base row for each row in the report You can have multiple CBRs in a row format such as one with net sales one with gross sales and one with total expenses Usually the CBR is used to create a percentage for accounts compared to a total line For example you could compare accounts like salary percentages and manager salaries as a percentage of net sales Enter the allocation base row code in the Related Rates Rows Unit column This base row is used for the calculation and remains in effect until another CBR row is defined The following figures illustrate the CBR format code In the row format the CBR code is in row 45 The Related Rates Rows Unit column of row 45 shows row 140 which is the Net Sales row The calculation formula in column C is B BASE and a special format mask This tells FRx to divide the amount in column B by the amount in column B of the base row row 140 and to put th
365. rement Each Row By box 69 Informal Desc box 208 Insert Column command 142 Insert command 16 Insert Unit command 192 inserting columns 142 reporting units 192 rows 60 Installing Report Designer 5 Instance documents XBRL 298 Int Format box 209 international formatting applying to reporting units 209 Index K kjhkjhkljh 313 L Levels Down From Starting Unit option 270 Link Menu commands 65 Link Name box 122 Link to General Ledger cell 96 Link to General Ledger column entering 94 Link Type box 122 129 131 linking account types 100 column placement methods 125 combined GL and external worksheet 128 to external worksheets 124 to other row formats 116 to separate worksheet 124 links entering separate worksheet 130 formatting combined links 129 identifying worksheet cells 125 worksheets in reporting tree 133 referencing external worksheets 125 Lotus 1 2 3 exporting reports 246 linking to 125 main account code segment 66 margins changing 257 Mark Unposted Accounts with option 267 mask defining an account mask 183 master row format creating 67 Maximum Digits Left of Decimal option 267 menus available commands 18 Catalog 226 column layout 140 Edit Catalog of Reports 226 reporting tree 191 row format 59 61 File Catalog of Reports 225 reporting tree 190 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 347 Format reporting tree 193 row format 63 Link 65 reporting tree 190 row format 58 Tree 194 Window
366. rent FRx session p Server Printer Selection No server printers available Printer is saved to the catalog and will affect all output until changed 3 Cancel From the Printer Selections dialog box select one of the following options e To print immediately to a local printer click the Local Printer Selection arrow and select a printer from the list e To print immediately to a server printer click the Server Printer Selection arrow and select a printer from the list Click OK to accept the printer selection and close the Printer Selections dialog box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 253 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab E mailing Reports You can send a report to another person via a MAPI compliant e mail system using the E mail Options tab With the FRx e mail options you can send any type of report output except server based OLAP cubes You can enter e mail recipients in the Reporting Tree window in the Catalog of Reports or both You can select a combined catalog and tree e mail security to send users in the catalog an e mailed file containing only the units available to them in the tree Recipients must have the DrillDown Viewer component to view report frd files When you select the E mail Options tab E mail selections displays on the Catalog of Reports window E Mail Options tab Building Blocks Send as attachment C Send as li
367. report specific commands File Menu Commands Description Page Setup Changes the page setup of your report Generate Generates your reports and sets or changes your default report output See Generating a Report on page 277 Print Catalog Prints selected catalog information See Printing Catalog Ctri P Information on page 279 Table 7 1 Catalog of Reports File Menu Commands FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 225 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog of Reports Menu Bar Edit Menu The Catalog of Reports Edit menu shown in Figure 7 3 allows you to edit the building blocks of your report the row format column layout and reporting tree Gut Girit Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl y Clear Font Styles Row Format Column Layout Reporting Tree Zoom F3 Figure 7 3 Catalog of Reports Edit Menu Note O Cut Copy Paste and Clear are not available from the Edit menu when the Catalog of Reports is open The Catalog of Reports Edit menu contains the following commands Edit Menu Command Description Font Styles Applies different font styles and shading to your report You can apply fonts globally or to a specific row column or report heading With the variety of font options available you can create customized reports to present your financial data with style See Font Styles on page 260 Row Format Opens the row form
368. riod Offset RPO Column Period Offset CPO If the worksheet you are linking to has multiple columns that represent different periods such as a worksheet with a 12 month detailed budget forecast you can use the CPO Column Period Offset switch This tells Report Designer to match the accounting periods in the column layout with the appropriate columns in the worksheet You can use this technique with either worksheet link method To use the CPO switch type the cell address that points one column to the left of the first period column in the worksheet for the given row then add the CPO switch at the end of the cell address Example of Linking to Multiple Columns with CPO Switch The worksheet shown in Figure 4 9 is used to link to a row format in Figure 4 10 to create a Gross Profit Per Unit report This worksheet has monthly statistics in columns B through M A B Cc D E E G H J K L M N 1 Fabrikam Works Inc 2 Units Sold 3 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC TOTAL 4 Units Sold 5 Denver 6 Wholesale 9 000 9 500 11 475 9 690 11 705 9 884 11 939 10 081 12 177 10 283 12 421 10 489 128 644 7 Retail 23 000 24 250 25 000 24 735 25 500 25 230 26 010 25 734 26 530 26 249 27 061 26 774 306 073 8 San Francisco 9 Wholesale 11 000 10 970 11 248 11 189 11 473 11 413 11 702 11 641 11 936 11 874 12 175 12 112 138
369. rksheet path in the reporting tree 1 Inthe row format check each worksheet cell address in the Link to Worksheet column Compare the address with the external worksheet cell 2 Inthe reporting tree open each reporting unit in the Reporting Units dialog box by selecting View Form from the Tree menu 3 Check the following e The Wks File Name box must contain the complete path to the worksheet For example C 123 CASHFLOW XLS or workbook C 123 CASHFLOW XLS DENVER where Denver is the worksheet name e Inthe Wks Link box select the worksheet column e You must enter a name in the Row Format Name box e The GL or Row Links box must be empty Note If the same worksheet file and link is present in more than one reporting unit the data imports multiple times possibly overstating results 4 Inthe catalog ID the Use Row Format from the Reporting Tree box must be selected This directs Report Designer to use the external worksheet path and row format as defined in the reporting tree for each reporting unit If you do not select Use Row Format from Reporting Tree Report Designer can not locate the external worksheet data One Link Column Link to GL Worksheet If you have one Link column Link to GL Worksheet you must define both the worksheet path and cells in the row format In the row format compare each worksheet cell address in the Link to Worksheet column with the external worksheet FRx Report Designer 6 7 User
370. rnal spreadsheet Thus a parent unit can in turn be a child of a higher parent unit Child reporting units can be detail units that pull information directly from the general ledger or a spreadsheet or they can be intermediate summary units parent to lower units and child to higher summary units FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 181 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Reporting Trees Following is a flowchart showing the parent and child reporting units and their hierarchical relationship for the Fabrikam Works Inc Summary reporting tree Fabrikam Works Summary San Francisco Denver Office Office Denver Sales m Denver Service _ San Francisco __ San Francisco Sales Service gt Retail Sales onl Lab Retail Sales a Lab Wholesale Sales Studio Wholesale Sales Studio Figure 6 1 Flowchart Fabrikam Works Inc Summary Reporting Tree Note the following reporting unit structure in the previous figure e In this example the Denver Office reporting unit is parent to the Sales and Service divisions Denver e The Sales division is both a child of the Denver office and a parent to the Retail and Wholesale departments e The lowest level detail reporting units Retail Wholesale Lab and Studio represent departments in th
371. rom the list and click OK to return to the Column Layout window This places your row format descriptions in this column 11 In the Column Detail Column Width row double click column A and in the edit bar type 40 This makes the first column 40 characters wide 12 Inthe Column Detail TYPE row double click column B to display the Zoom Select the Type of Column box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 44 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Creating a Column Layout 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Select GL from the list and click OK to return to the Column Layout window Report Designer inserts the following default values e Actual or Budget cell ACTUAL e Fiscal Year cell BASE e Period Code cell BASE e Current Per YTD cell CUR In the Column Detail TYPE row double click column C to display the the Zoom Select the Type of Column box Select GL from the list and click OK to return to the Column Layout window In the Column Detail Current Per YTD row double click column C to display the Zoom Select the Amount to Use box Select the Amount to Use Current Period Activit Year To Date Amounts Beginning of Period Balance Beginning of Year Balance Note Multiple book codes or YTD codes are not supported at the transaction level in Report Designer Select YTD and click OK to return to the Column Layout window On the File menu click Save to display the Column Layout
372. ror occurs while generating a report open the catalog for the problematic report Click the Output tab Ifa full path is listed in the File Name box make note of it because this is the output path If only a file name is listed the output path and import export path are the same Close the catalog and go to Steps for Resolution FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 321 Appendix A Error Messages Steps for Resolution 1 Ifone or more of the paths obtained in the above steps are located on a network sever verify that the server is up and running without errors 2 Ifone or more of the paths obtained in the above steps are located on a network server verify that the server is accessible from the computer receiving the error 3 Verify that the work drive path is valid and correct 4 Ifthe work drive path is incorrect update the path The path can be updated from the Processing Options dialog box or by modifying the frx ini file See To locate the necessary paths within Report Designer on page 321 5 Verify that the import export and output paths are valid and correct If one or more of these paths are invalid or incorrect locate and update them accordingly See To locate the necessary paths within Report Designer on page 321 Repeat the task that previously caused the error 6 Ifthe error no longer occurs skip all remaining steps Otherwise continue to step 8 7 Log in to the problematic computer wi
373. row and you want the row calculation to overwrite the column calculation e Calculate Rows First To perform the row calculations before the column calculations select this option the default This option works best in the following situations e Report with a CALC column or with simple calculations e Row format and column layout that use only simple mathematical operands and Other Options The following options are available to you e Include Amounts in Future Periods To include amounts in columns that specify periods beyond the base period as defined in the Report Date box select this option the default If you do not want the future period amounts to appear in your report clear this box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 272 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Report Options Tab e Display Report Processing Status To display the FRx Reporting Engine status window during report generation select this option the default FRx Reporting Engine Figure 7 20 FRx Reporting Engine Status Window e Missing Unit Warning With this option selected a warning message displays during report processing when a column or row is restricted to a reporting unit and the reporting unit does not exist or was not selected in the tree the default If you want to use a restricted row or column in other reports and do not want to see this warning clear this check box e Exclude Inactive Accounts If Available
374. row format Note Entering a GL link is optional and should be avoided unless you have a specific reason for doing so FRx automatically determines which link to use in each report Entering a link here overrides that selection process For example if you have multiple general ledger links for different years FRx determines the link used for each year If a link is specified here FRx does not attempt that year matching process If the selected row format has more than one link click the Wks Link arrow to display a list of worksheet links in the row format and select the appropriate link to use for this reporting unit If a separate link to an external worksheet has been established in the row format specify the Lotus 1 2 3 or Microsoft Excel file to be imported into this unit in the Wks File Name Ext File box To specify a worksheet do one of the following To specify a Do this Worksheet within a Microsoft Type the name of the workbook in brackets Excel workbook followed by the worksheet name For example type COMPBUDG XLS DENVER Sheet within a Lotus 1 2 3 Type the name of the spreadsheet in brackets WK1 spreadsheet followed by the sheet letter Note FRx imports only the first sheet in a Lotus 1 2 3 WK3 spreadsheet To select a different sheet save the sheet as a separate WK3 file Note If you enter a file without a full path FRx uses the path defined for the default IO_Data directory in the Company Informat
375. rows to the column detail rows Use Alt Page Up to move from the column detail rows to the column header rows This section contains information and instructions on e Specifying Column Types e Defining General Ledger Columns e Adding Calculation Formulas e Adding Special Formatting Options FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 147 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail e Adding Column Restrictions e Selecting a Reporting Unit e Formatting Multicurrency Reports e Account Filters e Attribute Filters e Restricting Columns to Specific Datess e Justification e Adding the OLAP Description to the Column Layout Specifying Column Types The first Column Detail row is for specifying the column type Double click the cell in the Column Detail row to display the Select the Type of Column dialog box shown in Figure 5 7 and then select a column type Calculated Column Row Descriptions from Row Format Row Codes from Row Format G L Account Codes from Row Format Fill Column w Character in Quotes Amounts from External Worksheet Account Type Attribute Transaction Type Attribute XBRL Element Tag from Row Format Transaction Detail Codes These codes only appear on Transaction Detail Reports TDESC Tran Desc Note don t use this code if description should appear in DESC column shown above TJDESC Journal or batch header Description TAPL Transaction Apply Date Figure 5 7 Column Type Dialog Box Th
376. rrency conversion in FRx are e Consolidation of Foreign Subsidiary If a company has a subsidiary that maintains its financial records in a currency other than the primary currency of the parent then the subsidiary s financial data must be converted to the parent s currency before the amounts can be consolidated Therefore if a parent unit in an FRx tree uses a different currency than one of its children every amount in the child s report must be converted to the parent s currency before the amounts are rolled up to the parent e Restatement to a Different Currency If a financial statement is required in a different currency than the primary currency of a reporting unit the amounts must be converted to the alternate currency FRx ships a currency definition table that is fully populated with every currency defined by the ISO standard 4217 1995 This table contains the numeric precision for each currency The default ISO code list is dated 9 10 2003 Check your FRx product release notes for information about current updates to this table Users can maintain currency exchange rates in the FRx Rate Maintenance tables if the appropriate information is not contained in the accounting system for a company The Rate Maintenance tables contain the exchange rates between an unlimited number of currencies and a single base foundation currency This base foundation currency is the currency in which all other currencies are stated For U S b
377. rt and then click Run 2 Type frx ini and then click OK FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 320 Appendix A Error Messages Look for the LastCompany line If this line contains a value after the equals sign remove the text after the equals sign on that line only Then save the file and close it Launch the Report Designer If the company selection window is displayed before you receive an error skip to To locate the necessary paths within Report Designer on page 321 Otherwise go to step 8 Open the frx ini file again Look for the WorkDrive line and then make note of the path listed after the equals sign This is the work drive path 10 Go to Steps for Resolution on page 322 To locate the necessary paths within Report Designer 1 If you are prompted to select a company click Cancel Locate the Work Drive Path 1 3 On the Admin menu click Processing Options to display the Processing Options dialog box Make note of the path listed in the Optional Work Drive box This is the work drive path Click Cancel to close the Processing Options window Locate the Import Export Path 1 3 On the Company menu click Information to display the Company Information dialog box Make note of the path listed in the Import Export Path list box This is the import export path Click Close to close the Company Information dialog box Locate the Report Output Path 1 If an er
378. rting Trees The following topic describes building a reporting tree manually You will find it helpful to review the following section whether you decide to build a reporting tree with the automatic build capabilities or whether you decide to build the reporting tree manually Additionally you will find the manual build information helpful for when you want to refine or edit a reporting tree that you have built automatically When you are ready to start building a reporting tree automatically go to Building Reporting Trees Automatically on page 213 for step by step instructions Understanding Building Reporting Trees Manually This section contains information you will need to understand building a reporting tree manually You will also use this information to further refine or edit a reporting tree that you have built automatically from the general ledger chart of accounts You can build a reporting tree manually using the Reporting Units dialog box or using the Reporting Tree worksheet When you use the Reporting Units dialog box you add one reporting unit at a time in a new blank Reporting Units dialog box When you use the Reporting Tree worksheet you can add a new reporting unit to the Reporting Tree window where you can also see the information for the previous units you have entered The Reporting Tree worksheet also makes it easier for you to add similar information for the new units You can use either the Reporting Unit
379. ryBS Row Format e Column Layout e Reporting Tree FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 117 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Creating Summary Reports Using Row Links Natural Row Format The Natural row format shown in Figure 4 2 links to the asset accounts in the general ledger D A B c E H Row Description Fmt Related Nom Link to B Ea aa BE cenaa Eatas 100 Cash Checking 1100 150 Money Market Short Term 1110 175 Money Market Long Term 1600 Accounts Receivable 1200 Allowance for Bad Debt C 1205 Due from FWC 130 Inventory 1310 Inventory Elimination 1319 Inventory Supplies 1350 Prepaid Other 1430 Leasehold Improvements 1510 Accum Depr Lease Imprvmnts C 1515 Office Furniture amp Fixtures 1520 Accum Depr OF amp F C 1525 Office Equipment 1540 Accum Depr Office Equip Figure 4 2 Asset Accounts in Natural Row Format DetIBSIS Row Format The DetlIBSIS row format links to the Natural row format The following figure shows how asset account balances from row codes 100 to 799 of the Natural row format are incorporated into the assets portion of the detailed balance sheet The link is established by selecting the row format option in the Link Type box in the Links dialog box In the following figure row 100 in the DetIBSIS row format links to rows 100 to 199 of the Natural row format Report Designer adds the values that were accumulated in rows 100 to 199 in the
380. s H Row Description Fmt wae Print Colum Link to IE s oo l Rasoren og General Ledger 570 Income From Operations 238 560 575 577 Interest Income Expense c 5650 7000 578 573 Income Before Income Taxes TOT 57010577 580 Income Tax Expense 5500 Adding a Net Income Row using a Formula You can include a formula in the Related Rates Rows Unit column that calculates net income The Net Income report row 640 in Figure 2 4 on page 38 is based on the following instructions To add a net income row using a formula 1 Go to the row following the underline format row for Income Tax Expense 570 Income From Operations TOT 238 560 577 Interest Income Expense c 5650 7000 579 Income Before Income Taxes TOT 57010 577 580 Income Tax Expense 5500 In our example this is Row Code 640 1 Click the Description column and in the edit bar type Net Income 2 Click the Fmt Code column and select TOT from the list FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 40 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format Click the Related Rates Rows Unit column In the edit bar type the following formula lt Income Before Income Taxes row code gt minus lt Income Tax Expense row code gt In our example row format we used the formula 580 610 Click the Print Ctrl column and in the edit bar type CS to include a currency symbol for this row Review your formatted Net Inc
381. s Multiply Divide To multiply and divide columns type the column letters in the order in which they should be computed separating each with the appropriate operator for multiplication for division For example if you type B D you are instructing Report Designer to multiply column B by column D You can also refer to a specific report cell by typing a column letter and a row code For example if you type B100 this refers to column B row code 100 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 155 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail You may want to divide an entire column by a specific report cell amount from the same column For example if you type B B100 you are instructing Report Designer to divide the entire column B by the value in column B row code 100 Note o This calculation will be incorrect if you change the report s calculation priority to Calculate Columns First on the Report Options Advanced tab in the Catalog of Reports Use a special format mask to format the number as a percentage For more information see Special Format Mask on page 157 Complex Calculations A complex calculation can contain any combination of cell references operators and values For example to compute an average of columns A and B you type A B 2 There is no limit to the number of nested parentheses you can use as shown in the example A B C 2 C 8 2 F TO H Multiply or Divide by Base Ro
382. s Denver Sales E Retail Retail E Wholesale Wholesale Denver Service Denver Service B Lab Lab E Studio Studio San Francisco Sa San Francisco Sales E Retail Retail EB Wholesale Wholesale San Francisco Se San Francisco Service EB Lab Lab EB Studio Studio 2 Inthe Select Reporting Unit s to Print dialog box do one of the following e Press the Ctrl key and select the units that you want to include e Click Mark All FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 53 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Generating and Viewing a Report 3 Click OK to process the report and display it in the DrillDown Viewer Meent Fabrikam Works Inc Income Statement For the Eight Months Ending August 31 2002 August YTD Revenue Sales 1 063 650 7 966 746 Sales Returns 8 622 63 952 Sales Discounts 28 728 213 157 Net Sales 1 026 290 7 689 637 COGS 747 900 5 596 129 Gross Margin 278 390 2 093 508 Operating Expenses Salary Expense 49 181 372 757 Officers Compensation 27 184 204 609 Depreciation Expense 4 855 38 840 Office Expense 4 135 31 028 Supplies Expense 730 5 698 Maintenance Expense 1 288 10 029 Rent Expense 10 449 78 203 Travel Expense 8 856 7 101 Advertising Expense 9 588 63 515 Commission Expense 16 233 139 142 Total Operating Expenses 132 499 1 010 922 Income From Operations 145 891 1 082 586 Interest Income Expense 614 6 805 Income Before income Taxes 145 277 1
383. s For example the amounts corresponding to the cell addresses in the list A12 A13 B23 C118 are placed into the first columns that are GL or WKS columns Direct Column Placement Common Method Use this method if your worksheet is arranged exactly like your proposed Report Designer report Specify the column to receive data by listing worksheet cells separated by commas For example assume you are using a Report Designer column layout that has six columns columns A through F where C is a Description column and E is a Calculation column To place four worksheet cells into the remaining columns you would type the cell addresses as A12 A13 B23 C118 Note the extra commas in the above list Each comma corresponds to a Report Designer column In the example the cells match up like this Report Designer A B C D E F Column Worksheet Cell A12 A13 B23 C118 Note e After you code the worksheet cell addresses into a row format try not to insert or delete rows or columns in the external worksheet If you do the worksheet cell reference changes and your Report Designer links will be incorrect FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 126 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets Automatic Matching of Worksheet Columns to the Current Period Use one of the following methods to link to worksheets that cover multiple reporting periods e Column Period Offset CPO e Row Pe
384. s as show in Figure 5 13 but you may need to edit the resulting entry Period AFTER Base Period Period BEFORE Base Period From Period 1 TO Base Period Enter the Actual Period Number Range of Periods Figure 5 13 Period Options For example if you select BASE you must change to the appropriate number of periods before the base period e Transaction Detail Reports Type the period range in this period cell to include year to date transaction details in a column or any range other than the current period See Customizing Transaction Detail Reports on page 173 Note O Although you can go beyond fiscal year boundaries in any of the period specifications Report Designer does not allow you to mix years within a range of periods For example if you specify periods 5 TO BASE representing the past 6 periods and run the report with a base period of 2 the report will not work properly If you run it with a base period of 6 it will work properly You can access different years by using separate ranges in separate columns in the same report For example if the base period is 3 you can use the ranges 2 TO BASE and 5 TO 3 because a year boundary isn t crossed within a range If you regularly cross year boundaries avoid using ranges Instead use a column for each relative period and print the total Suppress printing of the other columns in the Print Control cell Current Per YTD Use the Current Per YTD colu
385. s dialog box or the Reporting Tree worksheet to refine or edit reporting units including reporting trees and reporting units created from the automatic build capabilities When you build a reporting tree manually you need to also define the parent child relationships for the units in the reporting tree The following topics give you information that you will need to do this After you have built a reporting tree manually you must define the parent child relationships for the tree s reporting structure The easiest way to do this is to define all of the lowest level child units and then define each successive level of parent units You can then link each parent to its appropriate children Note O The parent child relationships are already defined for you if you build a reporting tree using the procedures described in Building Reporting Trees Automatically on page 213 You need to define these relationships only if you used the method described in Building Reporting Trees Manually on page 205 Detail and Summary Hierarchy Combinations The most common type of reporting tree is composed of parent units that pull summarized information from the detail units and child units that contain detail units of account information However many detail summary hierarchy combinations can be created A child unit can be both a child to the higher unit as well as a parent to a lower unit See Reporting Unit Structure on page 181 for more inf
386. sible Business Reporting Language XBRL Extensible Business Reporting lt measure gt USD lt measure gt lt unit gt lt scenario gt Budget_Best lt scenario gt lt numericContext gt lt XBRL1 usfr pt_SalesRevenueGross usfr pt_SalesRevenueGrossServices id P1M 2003 02 28 2 gt 556272 lt XBRL1 usfr pt_SalesRevenueGross usfr pt_SalesRevenueGrossServices gt lt XBRL1 usfr pt_SalesRevenueGross usfr pt_SalesRevenueGrossServices id P1M 2003 02 28 3 gt 486935 55 lt XBRL1 usfr pt_SalesRevenueGross usfr pt_SalesRevenueGrossServices gt lt XBRL1 usfr pt_SalesRevenueGross usfr pt_SalesRevenueGrossServices id YTD 2003 02 28 4 gt 1103330 lt XBRL1 usfr pt_SalesRevenueGross usfr pt_SalesR nueGrossServices gt lt XBRL1 usfr t_SalesRevenueGross usfr pt_SalesRevenueGrossServices id YTD 2003 02 28 5 gt 956676 22 lt XBRL1 usfr pt_SalesRevenueGross usfr pt_SalesRevenueGrossServices gt lt group gt n tey FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 288 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Including XBRL Elements in the Row Including XBRL Elements in the Row Format In order to build a report for XBRL output you need to include the XBRL elements in the row format This includes the following tasks Create a Link to the XBRL taxonomy The US GAAP CI taxonomy us gaap ci 2003 07 07 xsd a read only tax
387. signer 6 7 User s Guide 223 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog of Reports Window Catalog of Reports Window When you open the Catalog of Reports the Catalog of Reports window displays as shown in Figure 7 1 Menu Bar liz FRx Desktop Catalog Toolbar Es Fie Edt Company Catalog Options Admin Window Help Helma EE Bl Ese al Pande E cetaco Recors When you open an existing Catalog ID its name displays hera Financial amp Transaction l Use Posted Balances Only zi come os E n Tab options for r formatting reports Cnv Cert And VTO Actuals 5 5 Fa F FABRIKAM WORKS Denver and Sen Francisco Regon Figure 7 1 Catalog of Reports Window The main elements of the Catalog of Reports window are e Catalog of Reports Menu Bar e Catalog of Reports Toolbar e Catalog Identification e Tabs for Building and Formatting Reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 224 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog of Reports Menu Bar Catalog of Reports Menu Bar The Catalog of Reports includes the following menus with unique Catalog of Report functions File Menu Edit Menu e Window Menu File Menu Catalog Menu The Catalog of Reports File menu includes the typical windows options as well as page and print setup and report generation selections as shown in Figure 7 2 Figure 7 2 Catalog of Reports File Menu The File menu contains the following
388. sion specific features available under the terms of your license agreement Contact your reseller for more information about adding features under your FRx Software license agreement FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide xi FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Welcome to FRx Report Designer Using TMS GUIdE ei rrada aa 3 System Requirements 5 Installing and Starting Report Designer 5 Understanding Report Designer An Overview6 Getting Around in Report Designer 11 Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus 18 Chapter 1 Welcome to Microsoft Business Solutions for Analytics FRx FRx breaks traditional reporting constraints allowing you to be more creative and productive when building financial reports from your general ledger FRx extends the power of your accounting system by simplifying and enhancing your financial and management reporting FRx Report Designer extracts information from your general ledger and optionally combines it with information from Lotus 1 2 3 or Microsoft Excel spreadsheets Then it uses your customized report formats and your customized management reporting hierarchy to produce reports These reports can be viewed printed sent as e mail or exported to a text or spreadsheet file FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 1 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer XBRL A Print Repor
389. splay the selected column layout in the Column Layout window 3 From the Column Layout Currency Translation menu select Activate DAX Currency Translation Note You must activate currency translation from the Column Layout window menu so that FRx will recognize currency codes in the column layout and row format 4 To display GL amounts in the converted currency double click the cell in the Currency Display detail row of the GL type column and select the currency code from the displayed list 5 To display currency exchange rates in the report double click the cell in the Currency Display detail row of the TCURX type column and select the currency code from the displayed list 6 On the File menu click Save to save changes to the current column layout or click Save As to save the modified column layout with a new name Using Currency Rate Subtype ID in Column Layouts For those accounting systems that support more than one exchange rate per currency FRx uses the Currency Rate Subtype ID row in the Column Layout window to read the appropriate currency rate information from the general ledger The Currency Rate Subtype ID code can be used in conjunction with a currency display code in GL columns or in columns with transaction code TCURX If your accounting system supports more than one exchange rate per currency follow the steps below to include currency rate subtype data in your column layout To use a currency rate subtype ID in the
390. ssed using XBRL syntax and making use of the XBRL taxonomy The financial statements of a company or any part thereof expressed in XBRL would be an instance document as would an HTML file that had various XBRL items embedded in it Element Element refers to an XML element but also a fact or piece of information described by this taxonomy For example the element with the name nonCurrentAssets propertyPlantAndEquipmentNet is an element Element Names Element names consist of two parts separated by a period using camel case conventions of 80 characters total or less The logic for creating element names in this manner is discussed in the XBRL 2 0a Specification dated 2002 11 15 For example usfr pt_balanceSheet usfr pt_assets is an element name Table 8 1 XBRL Terms and Definitions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 298 FRx Software A part of Microsoft Business Solutions Using FRx Currency Translation Chapter 9 FRx Currency Translation Overview 300 FRx Currency Translation is a separately licensed function of FRx Report Designer Setting Up the FRx System for Currency This chapter explains how to Translatio socere erii hoe 302 e Setup the Report Designer to activate the Designing Currency Translation Reports303 Currency Translation functionality including specifying the file location of the DAX currency rate database e Design Currency Translation reports e
391. st in the GL database FRx supports two types of attributes account based and transaction based average rate The average of all currency exchange rates over the period of the financial statement This is nearly always used for income statement accounts The period between measurements to determine the average daily weekly monthly and quarterly can vary by type of report For example internal management reports will typically use daily intervals but some statutory reporting may require the average of the starting and ending rates during the period background Describes a window that is open but which is not the active window in which you are working base currency The foundation currency in which all other currencies are stated For U S based companies this will normally be the US dollar but European companies will probably use the EURO FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 333 base period A code used in column layouts to represent an accounting period that is relative to an actual period that is defined when a report is generated For example if the column layout specifies BASE in the Period Code box then the actual period is defined in the Catalog of Reports at the time the report is generated batch A logical group of transactions assigned the same apply date and posted as a unit beginning balances The opening balances for a period or a year box A control into which you type or select information
392. stakes during installation for example users can end up looking at different or incorrect SysData directories e Manual installation of service packs on each computer This installation effort can be time consuming if you have environments with many users e Requires the most hard disk space Thin Client or Compact Installation or Network Client Installation When you perform this type of installation you get the following results FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 324 Appendix A FRx System Information e All Report Designer program files are installed in a shared network directory Users launch most FRx applications from the shared server During installation shortcuts to executables on the network are created e System files are installed in the Windows System directory e FRx data files are accessed from a shared network directory e Reports can be generated to the local drive or to a shared network directory Advantages The advantages to this type of installation are Easy maintenance After the initial client install you do not need to do anything else on client machines One time installation of service packs The service packs are applied against the FRx program files in the shared network directory Requires a small amount of hard disk space enough for system files Easy installation In FRx 6 7 users can install the client on their computer using a Client Deployment executable The Client Depl
393. stion 7 184 204 809 Deprecistion Expense 4855 38 840 Office Expense 4 135 31 028 Supplies Expense 730 5 698 Maintenance Expense 1 288 10 029 Rent Expense 10 449 78 203 Travel Expense 8 856 67 101 Advertising Expense 9 588 63 515 Commission Expense 16 233 139 142 Total Operating Expenses 132 499 1 010 922 Income From Operations 145 891 1 082 586 Interest Income Expense 614 6 805 Income Before Income Taxes 145 277 1 075 781 Income Tax Expense 30 399 230 365 Net Income 114 878 845 416 Figure 2 1 Income Statement FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 25 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Building a Row Format from the Chart of Building a Row Format from the Chart of Accounts FRx is designed to be flexible and easy to use One way it accomplishes this goal is to provide you with familiar interface features that you may already be using in Windows based spreadsheet programs such as Microsoft Excel The flexibility of Report Designer makes each row format useful in many different situations Keep in mind that if you plan to use the same format for more than one department you do not need to repeat this procedure for each department In this section you learn how to build a new row format by automatically pulling data from the FabrikamWorks Inc sample database After you build this row format the row format contains row codes that identify each row row description general ledger code and o
394. t Excel or Lotus Spreadsheet Data Fabrikam Works Inc Denver Sales 190 Accounting System General Ledger Data FRx Report Designer xcel or Lotu Spreadshe Fabrikam Works Inc Denver Sak 190 031 Financial Demer Serioa 40 121 DataMart SF Saker 210 121 SF Sawn 154131 TOTAL Sia FRx Instant OLAP HTML Figure 1 1 Information Flow in FRX FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 2 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Using This Guide Using This Guide The following sections describe the conventions used throughout this User s Guide Keyboard Commands Mouse Commands Typographical Conventions Note and Warning Messages Keyboard Commands This guide uses the keyboard commands type enter select and press Type means to key in the data specified in the instruction Enter means to key in the data and then press the ENTER key Select means to mark menus and submenu options highlight text and choose items from drop down list boxes Press means to press a key or combination of keys on the keyboard If you need to press a combination of keys simultaneously the keys are shown with a plus between them For example Ctrl D means to press and hold the Ctrl key and then press D In some cases you should press a key release it and then press another key When this is the case keys are shown with a comma between them For example Press A
395. t Designer 6 7 User s Guide 30 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format To add a net sales row that includes a formula 1 Go to the row following the underline format you created for Sales Discounts D B E E F H inti Related P P Row Description Fmt n T Norm Print Link to i Code Ear 5 h PBG General Ledger J5 Revenue Sales 410 4109 Sales Returns 4110 Sales Discounts 4250 In our sample row format this is Row Code 206 Click the Fmt Code column and select TOT from the list Report Designer calculates a total when you select this code Click the Related Rates Rows Unit column and type the row codes for the following formula lt Sales row code gt minus lt Sales Returns row code gt minus lt Sales Discount row code gt In our sample row format the net sales formula is 100 160 190 4 Review your formatted Net Sales row B a Related Bessien Rates Rows Unit Link to General Ledger 50 Revenue DES 75 DES 100 Sales c 410 4109 160 Sales Returns 4110 190 Sales Discounts 4250 206 Net Sales TOT 100 160 190 Modifying COGS Report Rows You can apply the formatting features you used in the previous sections to modify the COGS report rows The COGS Report Codes 213 231 in Figure 2 2 on page 28 were modified using the following instructions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 31 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports
396. t sold If Then Statemnt Balance Sheet If Then Syntax in Row IncStmt Key Indicators Select All 2 Do one of the following To print information about Do this Multiple reports Press and hold the Ctrl key while you select the reports All reports Click Select All 3 Select one of the following options e To print summary information click Print Summary Your report prints the following format Catalog Information Building Blocks Catalog Id Row Catalog Description Row Description Company Code Column Column Description Tree Tree Description FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 279 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Reports e To print detail information click Print Detail Your reports prints report detail in the following format Catalog Building Blocks Report Report Information Information Formatting Catalog ID Row Base Period Left Margin Catalog Row Description Detail Level Right Margin Description Company Code Column Provisional Top Margin Column Output Type Bottom Margin Description Tree File Name Orientation Tree Description Chained to Scaling Catalog Exception Reporting Calculation Priority Rounding Print Selection 4 Verify the print settings 5 Click OK Chaining Your Reports When you want to generate several reports at a time chain them together so that they generate one after the oth
397. t without duplication for that unit and its parent units Note If a parent unit also uses a general ledger account template the account is pulled into the parent unit thus causing a duplication of data 4 Enter a general ledger code in the Link to General Ledger column Relating a Format Row to an Amount Row To relate a format row to an amount row When you build a row format you can define format rows or non amount rows by using Fmt Codes such as DES LFT RGT CEN and To avoid printing titles or underscores when no amounts are present relate the format rows to corresponding amount rows To relate a formatting row to an amount row enter the row code from the amount row in the Related Rates Rows Unit column of the formatting row Figure 3 13 shows a row format that relates rows 150 and 170 to the amount in row 160 If there is no value to display in row 160 then FRx suppresses rows 150 and 170 A B E A E G Row Description Fmt Nom Column Code Code Rates Rows Unit Bal H Link to GL Worksheet XLSICURYTD 3 CURRENT PERIOD ACTIVITY DES 95 DES Gross Sales C NP 410 4109 Returns amp Discounts NP 4110 4250 Sales TOT 220 250 C cs 140 Cost of Goods Sold 450 4509 370 Gross Profit TOT 280 310 c 370 Figure 3 13 Relating Rows in Row Format Window Here s another example Suppose you enter a row for the descriptive title Operating Expenses followed by a list of e
398. t you want to assign a different currency and click the Link to General Ledger cell of that row The account codes and formula used for this row appear in the edit bar In the edit bar click the end of the formula and enter the following text CURRENCY_CODE Replacing CURRENCY_CODE with a specific currency code or to include all currency codes that exist for the accounts D A B c e F G H Row Description Fmt eee a Norm Paint Colu Link to Code Code Rates Rows Unit Bal Cil mn General Ledger El 130 ASSETS DES heo DES 190 Cash Checking 1100 220 Cash Money Market 1110 250 280 Total Cash TOT 190 TO 250 310 DES 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each row that you want to assign a different currency FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 111 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Automatic Rounding for Balance Sheets Automatic Rounding for Balance Sheets When amounts are rounded to whole dollars thousands or millions totals may be out of balance Refer to the following table to see how rows are rounded Row Code Amounts without Amount with rounding rounding to whole thousands 100 3 600 4 200 3 700 4 TOTAL 7 300 8 Table 3 6 Rounding in Balance Sheets InTable 3 6 the total of rows 100 and 200 differ when rounding is turned on When you use the rounding option in a balance sheet report you can use the row format rounding adjustment feature This feature balances bala
399. tIBSIS row Fabrikam Works Natural uses the Natural format that links to the Natural row format row format that links to the general ledger Notice the account mask Figure 4 6 Row Linking in Reporting Trees Window Note the following important points about the reporting tree e The account mask is used only in the lowest level of the tree because the Natural unit code is the only one that uses a row format Natural that draws information from the general ledger e The hierarchy of reporting units in the reporting tree must match the links within the row formats e The middle unit in the tree Detail B S amp I S uses the DetIBSIS row format which is linked to the Natural row format That is this unit gets information from the Natural row format rather than from the general ledger e The highest unit in the tree Summary B S uses the SummryBS row format which is linked to the DetIBSIS row format This unit gets information from the DetIBSIS row format rather than from the general ledger If the reporting units in the tree are not matched properly to the row formats you may get the following error message FRx Reporting Engine The Row Format Yai spedfed ENARA does net ae a k to fhe General Ledger Either create the link in the Row Format Worksheet or Select a different Row Formai E Figure 4 7 Report Designer Reporting Engine Error Message When you generate the report from the Catalog of Reports using the row format
400. tains information and instructions on e Client Installation Types e Moving FRx to a New Location or Server e Permissions Required for FRx Users e Maintaining FRx Data Files and Preventing Corruption Client Installation Types FRx allows two types of client installation fat client also called local client installation and thin client compact installation also called network client installation Fat Client or Local Client Installation When you perform a fat or local client installation the following occurs e All FRx program files are installed on the computer s local drive Report Designer files are installed into C Program Files FRx Software FRx 6 7 by default but you can install them into any directory that you specify during installation e System files are installed in the Windows System directory e FRx data files are typically accessed from a shared network directory e Reports can be generated to the local drive or to a shared network drive Advantages This type of installation allows users to operate locally with no network access provided they access a local SysData directory and not a shared directory Users find this type of installation is useful for performing demos or designing reports outside of the office We do not recommend this type of installation for live environments Disadvantages The disadvantages to this type of installation include e Increased IT maintenance and effort e Easier to make mi
401. ted company the currency unit of measure will be blank in the XBRL instance document For information on setting the functional currency for a company see Entering and Editing Company Information in your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide In the column layout you can include a column type XBRL_TAG to display the XBRL element tag found in the row format for a report that you output as an frd file DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML The XBRL_TAG will not be passed from the column layout to the XBRL instance document To include XBRL_TAG column type in the column layout 1 2 In the Column Layout window double click the Type Column Detail row in the column where you want the XBRL_TAG column type to display the Select the Type of Column zoom Amounts from General Ledger Calculated Column Row Descriptions from Row Format Row Codes from Row Format G L Account Codes from Row Format Fill Column w Character in Quotes Amounts from External Worksheet Account Type Attribute Transaction Type Attribute Transaction Detail Codes These codes only appear on Transaction Detail Reports TDESC Tran Desc Note don t use this code if description should appear in DESC column shown above TJDESC Journal or batch header Description TAPL Transaction Apply Date aT cres Select the XBRL_TAG column type from the list FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 293 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Repor
402. tering in row format 97 in reporting tree account mask 183 using in column layout 169 Wks File Name Ext File box 210 Wks File Name box 135 Wks Link box 134 Wks link combined with GL link 124 128 WKS column type 149 worksheet combining links 128 a COG Index using a separate link 130 Worksheet File Name box 123 129 X XBRL Definitions 298 XBRL Element names 298 XBRL Element tags 290 XBRL Elements definition 298 in the column layout 293 in the row format 289 290 XBRL instance documents Rules for reporting trees 295 XBRL Output type in the Catalog of Reports 295 XBRL Taxonomy Document 298 XBRL TAG column type 293 XML option 244 Y year including in column header 144 YTD Current cell 154 Z zero suppressing rows 82 Zoom command 15 141 192 226 ZXczxcZxcZxc 314 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 351
403. th an account that has administrative rights on the domain 8 Repeat the task that previously caused the error If the error no longer occurs go to step 10 Otherwise go to step 12 9 Log out of the machine then log back in again as the user If the error still occurs the user has insufficient permissions for one or more of the noted paths 10 Check the permissions for each directory and grant permissions as needed Users must have Read Read and Execute Write and Modify permissions for the import export and output paths Once you have granted permissions the user should no longer receive errors 11 Ifthe error persists you could need to restart the server 12 Restart the server to correct the problem Specification Set Database Security does not Match Current FRxSys32 Security Setting Q A I received the error message Spec set database security does not match current FRxSys32 security settings What caused this message This message occurs when setting a company as a default The possible causes of this error are e Changes in the security settings stored inside the FRxSys32 mdb file e Incorrect regional settings FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 322 Appendix A Error Messages Changes in the Security Settings Security settings along with other FRx configuration settings are stored in FRxSys32 mdb a protected database file located in your FRx SysData folder You cannot modify the FRxSys3
404. the Catalog of Reports Report Designer dynamically displays a Define Printers button on the Output Options tab If Report Server is not installed and you are generating reports locally on the File menu click Print and select a valid printer from the Print dialog box FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 251 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab For other output options such as the default DrillDown Viewer Enhanced XML option Report Designer dynamically displays a Select Printer button when you select the Print Immediately check box Note e When Printer is selected as the output option the Print Immediately check box is disabled dimmed This section includes information and instructions on e Selecting a Printer from the Catalog of Reports Output Options e Selecting a Printer from the Print Immediately Option Selecting a Printer from the Catalog of Reports Output Options To select a printer from the Catalog of Reports output options 1 Display the report record in the Catalog of Reports 2 Select the Output tab 3 From the Output tab select the Output Options tab 4 Click the Output Option arrow and select Printer from the list If FRx Report Server is installed the Define Printers button appears on the Output Options tab 5 Click Define Printers to display the Printer Selections dialog box 88 Printer Selections serverman 6LJ5West B No server printers available FRx R
405. the FRx Groups list Do this Note The FRx Groups list is available only when FRx Security is active User profiles for all members of the group must include the individual e mail addresses for this selection to work correctly See your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide for details 1 In the Tree Unit Security and E mail dialog box click FRx Groups to display the Select a Group dialog box 2 Select the group names to include from the list Note To select multiple user names press the Ctrl key and select each user to include 3 Click OK Individual users 1 In the Add Individual Users box type the e mail address of the user 2 Click Add 9 To remove a user or group from the Access Granted list do the following To remove Specific users or group Do this 1 Inthe Access Granted list box select the user e mail address to remove Note To select multiple user e mail addresses press the Ctrl key and select each e mail address to remove 2 Click Remove All users and clear the entire list 10 Click OK Click Remove All 11 On the Reporting Tree File menu click Save to save the tree FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 220 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Securing Reporting Tree Units Securing Reporting Tree Units When FRx security is active you can restrict access to individual reporting units with the tree from the Security E Mail column in t
406. the correct codes to pull data from the general ledger Are there hooks in the row format Use hooks only in the reporting tree There is no function for hooks in the row format or the column layout Is there a GL column in the column layout Report Designer must have a column to place the values from the general ledger Report Does Not Use a Reporting Tree Check the following row format issues and causes 1 Do you have one Link to General Ledger column in the row format If you have multiple Link to General Ledger columns does a year appear in every general ledger link except the current year link If you do not have a Link to General Ledger column Report Designer does not have a data connection You must either use a reporting tree or add a GL column to the row format Are the correct general ledger codes used in the row format Report Designer must have the correct codes to pull data from the general ledger FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 314 Appendix A Frequently Asked Questions FAQs 3 Is the Use Reporting Tree check box selected in the Catalog of Reports Report Designer may be searching for a reporting tree when one is not needed 4 Does your company use a different departmental coding structure for income statements than you do for balance sheets Create different row formats for your balance sheets and income statements In the balance sheet row format use the full account code 5 Is the row format o
407. the cursor moves to the first record that begins with the letters you typed You can also select a record by clicking its name on the list New Click New to enter a new record into Report Designer In some cases default values may be provided Clone Click Clone to clear the form s primary unique keys and retain all other information You can use this button to copy information from an existing record to a new record Save Click Save to save any modifications you ve made to the current record Delete Click Delete to permanently delete the current record from Report Designer You will be asked to confirm that you really want to delete the record Table 1 3 Record Control Box Selections Defining Available Commands on Report Designer Menus Each row format column layout reporting tree and catalog window in Report Designer has a menu bar at the top of the window Each menu system contains several menus Some menu commands such as those in the File menu have many of the same commands for all Report Designer windows Other menus are used in some Report Designer windows but not in others For example the Tree menu is only accessible from the Reporting Tree window This section describes the menus and options that are standard on all the Report Designer main windows Menus that appear only in specific windows and building block options for example the Row Formats window are discussed in their respective chapters
408. the type of link used For information about entering general ledger account codes see General Ledger Account Codes on page 94 For information about linking to row formats and spreadsheets see Linking to External Worksheets on page 124 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 85 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Totaling and Calculations Totaling and Calculations This section contains information and instructions on e Standard Totaling TOT e Formula Totaling CAL e Point and Click Totaling for TOT and CAL rows Standard Totaling TOT The totaling TOT format code adds or subtracts amounts in other rows A total formula can contain any combination of ranges and individual row codes up to 256 characters See Figure 3 15 for examples of total formulas in the Related Rates Rows Unit column With the TOT format code you can do the following e Enter individual row codes separated by a plus or minus sign as in row 610 e Enter descriptive row codes separated by a plus or minus sign For example a TOT statement might look like LIABILITIES EQUITY see row 566 e Enter a range of row codes separated by the word TO see row 548 e Combine ranges and individual row codes D H B C E F x This i d Related a Link to dese id de Riou sa or ce ue calculation using You can use a total range You can use descriptive labels in your calculations LIABILITIES Total Lia
409. ther information extracted from the Fabrikam Works chart of accounts To build a row format 1 From the FRx Control Panel on the Company menu click Select Default to display the Select Default Company dialog box Select Default Company Fabrikam Works Inc Fabrikam Works Canada Inc 2 Inthe Select Default Company dialog box select FW 3 Click OK to return to the FRx Control Panel 4 On the File menu point to New and then click Row Note The row format name at the top of the window is Untitled 1 which means you are working with a new unsaved file 5 On the Edit menu click Add Rows from Chart of Accounts to display the Add Rows From Chart of Accounts dialog box Add Rows from Chart of Accounts Mask Overview _ ee Se ee P ss Description Natural Location Division Department Bik HEH Ht 4100 5500 Aill khk All HHH Starting row code f oo Increment each row by 30 E Cancel For information about using the natural account code segment see Account Codes on page 9 in Chapter 1 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 26 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Building a Row Format from the Chart of 6 Then do the following In the first Account Range Start box type 4100 In the first Account Range End box type 5500 Note When you type a segment Report Designer pulls only the unique codes for that segment into the row format
410. these selections are listed in the following table Microsoft Local Description Cube Options Cube Name Type the name of the OLAP cube file Cube Description Type the OLAP cube description Table 7 12 Microsoft Local Cube Options e Excel Pivot Chart When you select this option the following selections display under the Output Options tab on the right side of the screen Excel Pivot Chart CUBEOO1 XLS B a FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 249 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Output Tab A description of these selections are listed in the following table Excel Pivot Chart Description Options Cube Name Type the name of the Excel Pivot Chart cube file Cube Description Type the Excel Pivot Chart cube description Table 7 13 Excel Pivot Chart Options e Excel Pivot Table When you select this option the following selections display under the Output Options tab on the right side of the screen Excel Pivot Table l CUBE001 XLS al C A description of these selections are listed in the following table Excel Pivot Table Description Options Cube Name Type the name of the Excel Pivot Table cube file Cube Description Type the Excel Pivot Table cube description Table 7 14 Excel Pivot Table Options File Name The File Name list box displays the report file name To change the file name or path select a file name from the drop down box Using t
411. ting tree This section also contains information you II need to further refine or edit a reporting tree that you have previously built Note O You need to specify at least one detail unit when you build a reporting tree You cannot build a reporting tree consisting of only parent units The following steps refer to the Reporting Units dialog box The boxes in the Reporting Tree worksheet are essentially the same as the boxes in this dialog box When the labels that identify these boxes differ between the worksheet and the Reporting Units dialog box the worksheet label is in parentheses after the dialog box label To build a reporting tree using the Reporting Units dialog box 1 Doone of the following If you are Do this Building a new reporting tree On the FRx File menu point to New and click Tree to display a blank Reporting Tree window Refining or editing an existing 1 From the FRx Control Panel click the reporting tree Reporting Trees icon to display the Open Tree dialog box 2 Select a tree from the list to display it in the Reporting Tree window 3 On the graphical tree select the reporting unit to edit FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 206 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Manually 2 Do one of the following to display the Reporting Units dialog box e Click the Tree Form icon e On the Tree menu select View Form Reporting Units A blank dialog box displays
412. ting Language XBRL Including XBRL Elements in the 3 Click OK The XBRL_TAG column type is added to the column layout ACTUAL Budget Best ACTUAL Budget Best BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE BASE CUR CUF YTD YTD T 4 Save the column layout with a unique name and description FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 294 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Selecting XBRL Output Type in the Selecting XBRL Output Type in the Catalog of Reports In the Catalog of Reports you can select XBRL as an output type If the row format is properly populated with GL Link CAL or TOT rows and XBRL element tags and the report yields data FRx will generate an XBRL instance document with an xml file extension The XBRL Option in the Catalog of Reports allows you to select or deselect the Missing Element Tag Warning option When this option is selected FRx generates a warning message each time a GL Link CAL or TOT row is encountered that does not contain an XBRL element tag You can discontinue further warnings from the warning message box Also in the Catalog of Reports verify that a company code and company name are displayed in the Company boxes The default company as set up in the Company Information dialog box appears here unless another company is selected If no company name is specified here the company name identifier entity will be blank in the XBRL instanc
413. tion Select this code if the amounts in this column are part of a calculation only and should not be printed in the report When you use a non printing column in a calculation you need to directly refer to that column in the formula if you want to include it For example in the following calculation the non printing column C is included B C D However the non printing column C is not included in the following calculation B TO D BS Select this code to indicate a column as a Balance Sheet column to be printed on a combined Balance Sheet Income Statement Report Since the same column layout is used for both the balance sheet and the income statement this code is required to identify the columns that apply to the balance sheet XCR Select this code to create a budget or comparative report where an unfavorable variance is always negative such as a revenue shortfall or expense overrun apply the XCR code to a CALC column Select this code to reverse the sign of a CALC column amount if the normal balance of a given row is a credit identified by a C in the Norm Bal column of the row format Note Make sure that you code the appropriate rows in the row format in the Norm Bal column with a C for TOT and CAL rows that normally carry a credit balance X0 Select this code to suppress a GL column if all amounts are blanks zeros SR Select this code to suppress a column from being rounded P lt
414. tion 4 Inthe Book Code Description box type your book code description 5 Click OK to return to the Column Layout window Note Do not use the semicolon character in the period year description or book code description The semicolon is reserved as a field separator character Customizing Transaction Detail Reports If you plan to generate a transaction detail report first create a customized column layout specifically for that type of report Several of the column layouts included with Report Designer use the following displayed column types FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 173 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Customizing Transaction Detail Reports The available transaction detail TYPE codes vary depending on your general ledger The following dialog box displays all the possible transaction detail options Select the Type of Column Transaction Detail Codes These codes only appear on Transaction Detail Reports Tran Desc Note don t use this code if description should appear in DESC column shown above Journal or batch header Description Transaction Apply Date Source Document Doc Original Source Doc e g Invoice Reference Code Transaction Type Source ID Module Jnl Code etc Batch Code Currency Code Currency Exchange Rate Company Code Project or Sub ledger Code Figure 5 25 Select the Type of Column Dialog Box When you set up the column layout for your transaction detail rep
415. tion is not saved with the catalog record Base Year 2004 Rebuild FRx GL indexes Period Covered For the Seven Months Ending Report Date Juy 31 2004 Default Base Period p W This information is saved with the catalog record Figure 7 7 Periods and Dates The following period and date selections are available to you Base Period Changes to the base period are not saved with the catalog ID To save the base period you must assign a default base period in the Default Base Period box The Default Base Period box determines the initial setting in the Base Period box Although you can hard code period numbers in the column layout a column layout typically refers to the base period that you set here Usually in the column layout you set the period relative to the base period and then define that specific period here in the Catalog of Reports If you choose to enter a specific period number in the column layout that number overrides this base period setting Base Year Enter the fiscal year that you want the report to use You can save a base period and year with the report For more information see Default Base Period on page 234 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 233 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Catalog Identification Rebuild FRx GL Indexes Select this check box to rebuild the local GL index before processing the report Period Covered This box automatically combines the Base Per
416. tion selections in each of the report building blocks This section contains information and instructions on e Activating DAX Currency Translation e Using Currency Translation Codes in a Row Format e Using Currency Translation in the Column Layout e Using Currency Rate Subtype ID in Column Layouts e Setting Currency Options in the Catalog of Reports Activating DAX Currency Translation Activate DAX Currency Translation from the Column Layout menu before you use currency translation functions in the column layout You must also activate DAX before you run a currency translation report To activate DAX currency translation in the column layout 1 Inthe menu bar of the Column Layout window select Currency Translation 2 Click Activate DAX Currency Translation to place a check mark by Activate DAX Currency Translation Using Currency Translation Codes in a Row Format As you enter row format information you select the appropriate currency conversion codes for report rows that require conversion from the transaction currency to the reporting currency The figure below shows the format codes that are available in the Fmt Code column of the Row Format window Select a Format Code Currency Conversion Average Currency Conversion Spot Currency Conversion Suppressed Figure 9 1 Row Format Codes FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 303 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports Once you se
417. tion time The following are examples using Y where Y is the last column in your column layout e BASETO Y e BASE 1 to Y The column layout in Figure 5 4 uses a base period column to illustrate dynamic headings CoumnHeaders A e c 0o pe TF e _ Actuals Forecast Li EE Month Month Month Month Month Month Gv a TE Type GL Cale etc DESC GL GL GL GL GL Book Code Attribute Category ACTUAL Budget_Or ACTUAL Budget_Or ACTUAL i BASE BASE BASE BASE Po Fiscal Year Po Peto Code 1 2 2 3 Po CunentPer YTD Fi Pe zuren olu p pecial Fo CUR CUR CUR CUR m po Column iat 10 10 Im Header Options olumr OOO RenotinaUni O Cunene Cade Cell Test Forecast J _InvettCode Currency Rate Subtype ID Font Styles Arial 10 bold Red Format Options Underline Justification Left Spread Fiom BASE To Center Right Figure 5 4 Dynamic Headings in Column Layout Window For a description of conditional columns see Print Control for Conditional Columns on page 162 The following figure shows these dynamic headings as they appear in the resulting report Fabrikam Works Inc Film Works Inc All Locations Dynamic Full Year Actual Forecast For the Month Ending April 30 2002 Actuals Forecast January February March April May June July August September October November Figure 5 5 Dynamic Headings in FRx Report FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide
418. to know Note This note indicates additional information in procedural steps that may be important for you to know Warning This warning advises you to take or avoid a specific action in overview sections Warning This warning advises you to take or avoid a specific action in procedural steps FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 4 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer System Requirements System Requirements Specification requirements for installing and running FRx are outlined in the System Requirements and Installation Guidelines included on your Microsoft Business Solutions for Analytics FRx CD ROM Installing and Starting Report Designer The installation program displays several prompts used to configure Report Designer for your environment For example it displays a default directory and subdirectory where it installs FRx See the System Requirements and Installation Guidelines on your Microsoft Business Solutions for Analytics FRx CD ROM for information about installing Report Designer You can override the default values during installation For more information see your FRx Report Designer Getting Started Guide The README TXT File FRx is shipped with a Readme file that describes late breaking information not described in this guide You can open this text file from the FRx installation CD ROM or following installation from the FRx 6 7 program folder Sample FRx Companies FRx includes
419. tree This can cause dramatic overstatement of amounts in summary unit reports There are two ways to avoid this problem You can restrict that row to a particular reporting unit See Restricting a Row to a Reporting Unit on page 80 You can also use the XR suppress rollup print control code See Print Control Column on page 82 D B c E F H Description Fmt Related a Nom Print Link to Code Rates Rows Uni Bal Cti General Ledger E 100 Cash Checking Fabrikam Works 1100 0000 000 120 Cash Checking Denver 1100 1000 000 150 Cash Checking S F 1100 2000 000 E 190 Money Market Short Term Fabrikam Works 1110 0000 000 Ei 220 Accounts Receivable Fabrikam Works 1200 0000 000 250 Account Receivable Denver 1200 1000 000 2850 Accounts Receivable S F 1200 2000 000 E 310 Allow for Bad Debt Fabrikam Works C 1205 0000 000 Figure 3 24 Full Account Code in Row Format Window FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 95 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes Entering General Ledger Codes To enter general ledger codes 1 Double click in the Link to General Ledger column to display the GL Account Links dialog box GL Account Links Natural Natural No Natural 2 Double click a cell in the From Account range or Individual Account or Account Set column The Select General Ledger Account dialog box appears From this dialog box you can view or search for all
420. tree is generated and yields data any rows that have XBRL element tags but are missing the GL Link CAL or TOT row types will show a zero amount in the instance document This section contains information and instructions on e Selecting XBRL Output Type from the Catalog of Reports e Selecting FRD Output Type For XBRL Reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 295 Chapter 8 Using Extensible Business Reporting Language XBRL Selecting XBRL Output Type in the Selecting XBRL Output Type from the Catalog of Reports To select XBRL output type from the Catalog of Reports 1 on oOo uo In the Company box select the company code for the reporting company The company name for the selected company appears in the box to the right of the company code This is the company name that appears in the XBRL instance document Company Code Company Name that appears in the XBRL instance document sus Ete 8 Catalog ek SEE ACE Erie mee A EA mes l BRL No Overs J Mdoe a E P E U Use Posted Balances Only z In the Catalog of Reports window click the Output tab On the Output Options tab click the Output arrow and select XBRL from the list of output options From the XBRL Options select Missing Element Tag Warning to display a warning message each time a GL Link CAL or TOT row is encountered that does not contain an XBRL element tag Note The Missing Element Tag Warning option is selected by default Clear the c
421. tructions FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 32 Chapter 2 Creating Basic Reports with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format To add a gross margin row that includes a formula 1 Go to the row following the underline format row for COGS A B E D E F H do Related r a Row Description Fmt Norm Print Link to m Aiea pim General Ledger 25 Revenue Sales 410 4109 Sales Returns 4110 Sales Discounts 4250 Net Sales TOT 100 160 190 DES COGS In our example this is Row Code 238 Click the Description column and in the edit bar type Gross Margin Click the Fmt Code column and select TOT from the list In the Related Rates Rows Unit column type the row codes for the following formula lt Net Sales row code gt minus lt COGS row code gt In our sample row format the gross margin row formula is 206 220 In the row following the Gross Margin row click the Fmt Code column and select Fmt Code from the list This inserts an underline under the previous row Review your formatted Gross Margin rows Link to General Ledger 25 DES 50 Revenue DES 75 DES 100 Sales c 410 4109 160 Sales Returns 4110 190 Sales Discounts 4250 206 Net Sales TOT 100 160 190 213 DES 220 COGS 450 4503 238 Gross Margin TOT 206 220 Separating Revenue Rows from Operating Expenses Rows You can separate the Revenue portion of the sample income statement from operating expenses usin
422. ty in an account such as the purchase of an asset actually took place This is typically applied to non monetary assets for example inventory fixed assets long term liabilities and equity Glossary hook character amp The hook character amp is used in the account mask box in the reporting tree to define the report s connection to the row format Hooks are usually used in the natural account segment but they are not limited to that segment icon A pictorial representation of an object or a selection choice Icons can represent minimized forms or application windows or resident applications not currently active on the desktop insertion point The vertical blinking bar that notes where text is going to be inserted instance document Instance documents contain data An XBRL instance document contains accounting financial or other business related data for example a financial statement issued by a company expressed using XBRL syntax and making use of the XBRL taxonomy The financial statements of a company or any part thereof expressed in XBRL would be an instance document as would an HTML file that had various XBRL items embedded in it interface The common program boundary between two modules or applications that allows data entered in one to be used by the other Interfaces eliminate the need for duplicate data entry among modules link An FRx feature that connects a row format to the general
423. tyle relating to In the Int l Format box select a format style specific reporting unit amounts from the list Keep the format specified for Leave the Int Format box blank the unit s company as indicated in the Company box For more information on using international formats refer to your FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator 5 Guide To begin the report for this reporting unit on a new page do the following e Select Page Break Before Unit e Inthe Catalog of Reports on the Tree Options tab select the Report Options Use Reporting Tree to use whatever page breaks you defined in the reporting tree In the Optional Row Formats and Links section shown below you can enter information that specifies the unit s links to the general ledger external spreadsheet or row format Optional Row Formats and Links Row Format Name Dynademo Dynamic P amp L using worksheet links TOTE es Caution Specifying a Link Will Override Automatic Link Selection Note For more information see Linking to External Worksheets on page 124 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 209 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Manually 13 14 15 16 17 18 If you entered a row format use the GL or Row Links box to select a link in the row format for this reporting unit Use this box when you have multiple links of the same type in the
424. type ID in the Currency Rate Subtype ID row Note The code identifies which currency rate subtype ID to read from the general ledger to include the currency exchange rate in the column layout 5 On the File menu click Save FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 308 Chapter 9 Using FRx Currency Translation Designing Currency Translation Reports Setting Currency Options in the Catalog of Reports In the Catalog of Reports window you select the building blocks for your reports that use the currency translation function By using row formats and column layouts that include currency translation selections you can build a report that displays amounts in an international currency your base reporting currency or both Other selections you make from the Catalog of Reports tabs affect the precision of average currency rate calculations For detailed instructions about working with the Catalog of Reports see Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports in the FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide For a detailed explanation of methods for calculating average rates see Chapter 3 Administering Currency Translation in the FRx Report Designer 6 7 Administrator s Guide Show me an example Figure 9 5 shows the Currency Translation tab in the Catalog of Reports window Spot rate source Historical rate source wi Figure 9 5 Catalog of Reports Window Currency Translation Tab Selecting Rate
425. u specify a range of columns in the total Report Designer includes only columns that are actually displayed FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 163 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Adding Column Restrictions Use the following selections to restrict certain types of data to display within a column Select One or More Column Restrictions Suppress Totals in This Column Suppress Details in This Column Include Debit Amounts Only GL Cols Include Credit Amounts Only GL Cols Include Period Adjustments Only Exclude Period Adjustments Only Include POSTED Transactions in Column Only Include UNPOSTED Transactions in Colum Figure 5 21 Column Restriction Selections The following table describes each column restriction selection Column Restriction Code SU Description If an underscore or double underscore or command is entered in the row format selecting SU in a column suppresses the underscore for that column only For example you might not want to underline amounts that are the result of a percentage calculation ST Suppresses totals and shows only details in this column for example in statistical columns SD Suppresses details and shows only TOT rows from the row format in this column DR Restricts the amounts in the column to debit amounts CR Restricts the amounts in the column to credit amounts ADJ Restricts the amounts
426. u can click Delete to delete the currently displayed link New to create a new link or Find to select another link to edit Click Close to close the Links dialog box Create the necessary row formats as described under Creating Row Formatting Links on page 122 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 123 Chapter 4 Linking to Other Sources of Information Linking to External Worksheets 2 From the FRx Control Panel on the File menu open a tree T B c D G L N E Company Unit Code Title Description Acct Mask pnts Page Options Rollup n La Fw FABRIKAM WORKS Fabrikam Works Summary 2 w DENVER Denver Region 3 rw SALES DENVER Sales Division_Denver 100 TO 300 3 In the Row Format column I of the reporting tree select the row format to use for the link Note If you specify a row format for one branch of the tree you must specify a row format for all branches in the tree 4 To link specific rows from the row format to the summary report type the row codes in the reporting tree Row Link column Q When you type the row codes specify a range of row codes 100 TO 300 or individual rows 100 120 130 but not both 5 Click Save to link your rows 6 Inthe Catalog of Reports Building Blocks tab select the Use row format s and Worksheet Links from Reporting Tree check box for this report Linking to External Worksheets Report Designer lets you extend your financial reporting capabilities with Microsoft Excel
427. u enter in the box The default is 100 e Shrink to Page Width Fits the report columns within the width of a single page e Collate Collates multiple report copies FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 257 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Page Options Tab e Copies Indicates the number of report copies to print Default Font Style This box displays the default font used in the report FRx uses this font where you have not selected a specific font in the row format column layout or Catalog of Reports headers footers To change the default font style select a font from the Default Font Style list Headers Footers Tab From the Headers Footers tab you define and format the report headers and footers Headers Footers tab Balance Sheet TXTDATE BLANK Deta z _ Edt Font Styles Clea Figure 7 14 Catalog of Reports Window Headers Footers Tab Headers and Footers The following options allow you to add and align headers and footers in your report e Left Centered or Right Type text or codes in these cells to right center or left align the information in the header or footer e Center Headers Footers on Page Center your headers and footers horizontally on the report page If you do not select this option your headers and footers center over the report data e Page Headers Use or change the report headings e Page Footers Use or change report footers Codes
428. ude in this column Review the following types of period options you can use for column detail e Actual Period Type the period number This is an easy method but should be used sparingly for example when you want to present a 12 period report with a column for each period e Relative Period For regular reporting you should always use a relative period see the next two options so you don t have to change the column layout every period Type the period number relative to the base period specified when generating the report using the and signs For the period just prior to the base period type BASE 1 or 1 for two periods before use BASE 2 and so on To specify the base period use BASE e Range of Periods Type a range of periods using TO the standard Report Designer range indicator You can use this with either absolute period numbers for example periods 3 TO 6 or with the relative periods for example 3 TO 1 This last example specifies a range of periods from 3 periods before the base period to 1 period before the base period To actually include the base period in such a range use B or BASE to represent the base for example 3 TO BASE You can also specify a range which spans the base period for example 3 TO 2 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 152 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail You can also double click the Period Code cell and select from a list of period option
429. umn 4 Inthe Select Account Set dialog box select an account set and click OK The selected account set appears in the Link to General Ledger column and the account set description appears in the Description column If changes occur to your account structure you need to edit your existing account sets Editing an Account Set To edit an account set 1 Click to highlight the account set name 2 From the Account Sets buttons click Edit to display the GL Account Links dialog box 3 Make the changes to the account set 4 When you are finished making changes click Save in the Account Sets record control box 5 Click Close 6 Click OK Using Account Modifiers Typically when you select a specific account FRx combines the account with the fiscal years periods and other information that you specify in the column layout However you might need to use different information such as different fiscal periods for specific rows By adding account modifiers which apply to every account in the row you can change the nature or use of the specified accounts FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 103 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats General Ledger Account Codes To use Account Modifiers 1 From the GL Account Links dialog box click the Row Modifier arrow to display the Row Modifier dialog box Row Modifier rf E 2 From the Row Modifier dialog box click the Account Modifier arrow to display the Select an Account
430. units Denver Service Studio FRx creates these specific account masks amp amp amp amp 1200 004 San Francisco Corporate amp amp amp amp 2000 000 San Francisco Sales Retail amp amp amp amp 2100 001 San Francisco Sales Wholesale amp amp amp amp 2100 002 San Francisco Sales Inter Company amp amp amp amp 2100 012 San Francisco Service Lab amp amp amp amp 2200 003 San Francisco Service Studio amp amp amp amp 2200 004 amp amp amp E amp H Corporate amp amp amp amp 0000 7 Denver Corporate amp amp amp amp 1000 27 Denver Sales amp amp amp amp 1100 Denver Service amp amp amp amp 1200 7 San Francisco Corporate amp amp amp amp 2000 7 San Francisco Sales amp amp amp amp 2100 7 San Francisco Service amp amp amp amp 2200 7 amp amp amp E amp 2222 Corporate amp amp amp amp 000 Retail amp amp amp amp 001 Wholesale amp amp amp amp 002 Lab amp amp amp amp 003 Studio amp amp amp amp 004 Inter Company amp amp amp amp 012 All Locations Divisions and Departments Table 6 8 Original Account Masks and Specific Account Masks Continued FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Understanding Building Repo
431. unt Range End box 27 69 Account Range Start box 27 69 account range entering in row format 97 account sets creating 101 editing 103 Account Type option 100 account types using 100 Accounting System box 23 Acct Column type 149 Acct Trans Detail tab 236 267 Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts dialog box 197 198 Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accts command 192 Add Rows From Chart of Accounts dialog box 68 adding the OLAP description to the column layout 173 additional text entering in reporting trees 216 in report headers and footers 283 in the row format 72 Additional Text code 283 in row format 72 Address box 255 Adjustment Amount Limit box 113 Advanced tab 236 270 Allow Column Text Overflow box 262 Allow Rollup 1 box 207 270 Amount amp Date Format box 23 Amount with Currency Symbol box 262 ASCII exporting reports 246 asdfasdf 314 asdfasdfas 314 asdfasdfasdf 314 asdfsadf 314 asdfsdf 314 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 343 asfdasdf 314 B base period concept 10 entering column layout 152 Base Period box about 233 235 entering 276 base row changing or using in calculations 156 base year entering column layout 151 Base Year box 51 entering 276 Before Each Reporting Unit option 270 Book Code Description box 173 Book Codes restricting rows 106 budget data including in column layout 151 Building Blocks tab 236 C CAL Format Code 74 Calc Formula box 156 Calculate Columns First option
432. urrency Translation are only available if your FRx installation includes these separately licensed functions Your FRx windows could vary somewhat from the complete set of examples and descriptions included in this guide The following table describes each main tab and associated subtab available from the Catalog of Reports window Main Tab Subtab None Building Blocks Output Output Options Use this tab to specify the type of report output For example you could print the report or export it as a Microsoft Excel file E mail Options Use this tab to indicate the distribution list and file distribution method for automatically e mailing reports Web Publishing Authorized users can use this tab to send the report to the FRx WebPort Page Options Page Setup Use this tab to specify your report page layout Headers Footers tabs Use this tab to specify your report headers and footers Report Options Formatting Use this tab to control rounding and formatting of amounts at the report level Acct Tran Detail Use this tab to select options for displaying account and transaction details in reports Tree Options Use this tab to specify the reporting units included in a report Advanced Use this tab to set roll up basis calculation and processing priority and exception reporting for a report Currency Translation Use this tab to establish conversion options for currency reporting Table 7
433. use for this segment FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 214 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Automatically 12 Inthe Segment Hierachy box select a segment and under Get Unit Name from select one of the following Get Unit Name option Segment Description To assign the tree segment a Descriptive name based on your general ledger segment information Segment Code Short name as the actual account code segment value 13 For each segment in the Segment Hierarchy box repeat steps 4 12 14 When you have defined your account segments hierarchies and ranges the way you want them brought in to the new reporting tree from the chart of accounts click OK to build a reporting tree and display it in the Reporting Tree worksheet 15 When you are through editing the new tree s reporting units on the Reporting Tree File menu click Save to save the new tree FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 215 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Adding Text and E mail Links to a Reporting Tree Adding Text and E mail Links to a Reporting Tree After you build a reporting tree either manually or automatically you can add text entries or an e mail link to the reporting units in the tree The following section To add additional text to the reporting units in a tree shows you how to add text entries See To add e mail addresses to a reporting tree on page 217 when you want t
434. vsendcacennvaadedecs teed laseeas nia hdeveueviacues 190 Reporting Tree Toolbar ICOM sccccccccccecccutvesecccenetesecccceteesecedeneesuneceneeesatacentenseaedenerenise 196 Understanding Building Reporting Trees cccceeseceeeeenneeeeeeeenieeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaes 197 Understanding Building Reporting Trees Automatically 0 0 00 eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 197 Understanding Building Reporting Trees Manually i 203 Building Reporting Trees Manually cccecccceecceceeenneeeeeeeenneeeeeesenaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 205 Building a Reporting Tree with the Reporting Tree Worksheet aiseee 205 Building a Reporting Tree with the Reporting Units Dialog Box 206 Defining Parent Child Relationships ceecccceceeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesenaeeeeseeaes 211 Verifying a Unit s Parent Unit si ccsccc sc ceaits a ceescteacee estes veeet itasbervesisan acta ceeeeetnn 212 Building Reporting Trees Automatically ccccceceeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaas 213 Adding Text and E mail Links to a Reporting Tree cececeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeenteeeeeseeeneneees 216 Adding Text to the Reporting Units in a Tree ooo eee eeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeetteeeeeeenaaes 216 Adding E mail Addresses to a Reporting Tree eeccccceseeeeeeeeeneteeeeeeetteeeeeeeenaees 217 Securing Reporting Tree Units 20 2 2 cccccceeeccccceeceeecceeeeeeeeececeeenscececeesnseaceeeesneeaeeeeneneaaees 221 Chapter 7 Understandin
435. w You can create a column that displays all the values in a specified column as a percentage of base number This feature provides a method to show relationships between rows such as a percent of sales or percent of total expenses row To multiply or divide each row in a specific column by a base row type the column to be used in the calculation and BASE or BASE for example type C BASE or C BASE When you use a base row calculation make sure that each row format used with this column layout contains at least one row with a CBR Change Base Row format code The CBR code identifies the row used in the calculation To multiply or divide by base row 1 Open the related Row Format window 2 Inthe Fmt Code cell of a row above the rows that are to use the calculation enter CBR 3 Inthe Related Rates Rows Unit cell enter the row code for the base row to be used as the denominator 4 Return to the Column Layout window and create a CALC column 5 Inthe Calc Formula box type the letter of the column to use in the calculation followed by the operator and the word BASE for example type B BASE When you do this every number in column B is divided by the number in the specified base row and the resulting percentage is placed in the calculation column Note Use a special format mask to format the number as a percentage For more information see Special Format Mask on page 157 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 156 Cha
436. w Format Description to display the Effective Dates dialog box Effective Dates Use Period Numbers Use Dates Cancel Clear FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 238 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Building Blocks Tab 9 In the Effective Dates dialog box select one of the following e Use Period Numbers to make a row format effective as of a selected period e Use Dates to make a row format effective as of a selected date Double click the Format Name box to display the Choose a Row Format dialog box Select a row format and click OK Double click the Date Period or Starting Date box and enter the period number or date for the selected row format The row format goes into effect as of the date or period you select Repeat steps 5 7 for each row format that you want to include Note If you run the report for a period or date that is not covered in the Effective Dates list the report will run using the row format that was originally selected displayed as dimmed in the Row Format box Click OK to return the Catalog of Reports window Selecting Column Layouts Column Layout Options Use the following options for the column layout Column Layout Use to select a column layout for your report For more information on column layouts see Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Effective Dates This option changes the report presentation based on a specific point in time To assi
437. wing instructions will help you complete each of the tasks necessary for building a new tree automatically To build a reporting tree automatically The following steps show you how to build a reporting tree automatically You may find it helpful to refer back to Understanding Building Reporting Trees Automatically on page 197 as needed while completing these steps 1 On the FRx File menu point to New and click Tree to open a blank reporting tree worksheet 2 On the Reporting Tree Edit menu click Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accts to display the Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts dialog box Add Reporting Units from Chart of Accounts B Location Division E Department FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 213 Chapter 6 Creating a Reporting Tree Building Reporting Trees Automatically 10 11 Under Reporting Account Segmentation in the Natural segment box type a hook amp for each number in the natural account segment to tell FRx to go to the row format For example use amp amp amp amp for a four digit natural account segment Under Reporting Account Segmentation in each segment box type an account mask using one of the following account mask character types Account mask character type Tells FRx to Plus sign Create a unit in the tree for this segment Note By default FRx places a information in the general ledger plus sign in the all of the responsibility
438. with FRx Report Designer Modifying a Row Format To modify COGS report rows 1 o ON Oa A Go to the row following the Net Sales row D B E E H inti Related P Row Description Fmt Rows Unit Norm Link to Code Oo m 3 de Bee cence Less m25 Revenue Sales 410 4109 Sales Returns 4110 Sales Discounts 4250 Net Sales TOT 100 160 190 DES COGS COGS Elimination Salary Expense In our example this is Row Code 213 Click in the Fmt Code column and select DES from the list In the COGS row click the Link to General Ledger column and in the edit bar change 4500 to 450 4509 The wildcard tells Report Designer to include all natural accounts from 4500 to 4509 Select the COGS Elimination row On the Edit menu click Delete Row Starting with the Salary Expense row select seven rows On the Edit menu click Insert Row to add seven new rows In the row following COGS select the Fmt Code Review your formatted COGS rows Link to General Ledger 50 Revenue DES 100 Sales 410 4109 160 Sales Returns 4110 190 Sales Discounts 4250 206 Net Sales TOT 100160190 220 COGS 450 4503 Adding a Gross Margin Row that Includes a Formula You can include a formula in the Related Rates Rows Unit column that calculates the gross margin by adding the Net Sales row and the COGS row together The Gross Margin Row Code 238 in Figure 2 2 on page 28 was added based on the following ins
439. wn Viewer Read and Read amp Execute permissions are also required for the SysData directory Remote DrillDown Viewer users those that use the DrillDown Viewer only on their workstation do not require any permissions for FRx directories on the network Report Server The Report Server must run under a logged on profile on a server it cannot run as a service The user that launches the Report Server must have Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for the IO_Data and SysData directories If you use directories other than the IO_ Data directory for report output the logged on user must have Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for these additional directories If you use a separate Queue directory the Queue directory and the SysData directories are typically the same the user must have Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for the Queue directory If the Report Server publishes reports to the WebPort the user must have Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for the WebPort Data directory on the Web server WebPort Users Because the WebPort is a Web application users do not require any permissions for any directory However the Internet Guest Account for Internet Information Services usually IUSR_COMPUTERNAME and the Launch IIS Process Account usually IWAM COMPUTERNAME must have Read Read amp Execute Write and Modify permissions for the WebPort Data d
440. x Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 237 Chapter 7 Understanding the Catalog of Reports Building Blocks Tab Use Row Format s and Worksheet Links from Reporting Tree If in the reporting tree you specify the row formats or worksheets for your report to use select this option If you do not select this check box FRx uses the row format selected previously in the Row Format box for every unit in the reporting tree Note If you select this option and every reporting unit does not reference a row format then FRx uses the identified row format that appears dimmed in the Row Format box for those units by default For more information on reporting trees and assigning row formats and worksheets in the reporting tree see Understanding Building Reporting Trees Manually on page 203 To select a row format 1 Click the arrow to the right of the Row Format box to display the Choose a Row Format dialog box Choose a Row Format Seach OT Asset Detail for Transaction Detail Reports Balance Sheet Balsheet_Elim Balance Sheet BalSheet_SByS Balance Sheet Side by Side BalSheet_Tab Tabular Balance Sheet Balance Sheet With Ratios Cash Flow Statement Cash Detail Report Consolidated Balance Sheet and Inc Stmnt Select a row format and click OK to return to the Catalog of Reports window The Row Format list box automatically displays a Description Then click the Effective Dates check box located on the right side of the Ro
441. xpense accounts and a total row for those expense accounts If you run a report for a department with no operating expense accounts and you have suppressed printing zero balance accounts in the catalog of reports the title Operating Expenses appears on the report without any supporting amount entries FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 81 Chapter 3 Creating Row Formats Modifying Row Formats To avoid this problem enter the row code for the Total Operating Expenses amount row in the Related Rates Rows Unit cell of the Operating Expenses descriptive row The Operating Expenses title will not appear when the operating expense total is zero Use the same technique for underscores and other format only rows Normal Balance Column If you want to reverse the sign of a row or if the normal balance of an account is a credit enter a C in the Norm Bal column When general ledger amounts pull in to a row format FRx reverses the sign on all credit balance accounts When FRx converts these accounts it removes the debit credit characteristic from all amounts and makes totaling very straightforward For example to calculate net income you simply subtract expenses from income Totaled and calculated rows typically are not affected by a C code unless you select the XCR print control option in the related column layout By selecting XCR in the column layout you reverse the sign of any row that contains a C in the Norm Bal column This is es
442. y a Column Type 1 On the Column Layout window double click the Type Column Detail cell for the column to display the Select the Type of Column dialog box 2 Select a column type 3 Click OK to return to the Column Layout window Defining General Ledger Columns The next four categories under Column Detail define general ledger columns defined as GL in the TYPE cell as shown in Figure 5 10 FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 150 Chapter 5 Creating Column Layouts Adding Column Detail Column etal DESC ACCT TAPL TDOC GL GL GL ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL BASE BASE BASE BASE 2 BASE 1 BASE CUR CUR CUR Figure 5 10 GL Column Detail These column detail rows include e Book Code Attribute Category e Fiscal Year e Period Code e Current Per YTD Book Code Attribute Category The Book Code Attribute Category column detail gives you a choice of actual budget and non financial statistical options as shown in Figure 5 11 A column layout can contain multiple actual budget and statistical columns for displaying different periods current or year to date and amounts Select a Book Code Best Case Budget Original Budget Worst Case Budget Square Footage E of Employees Units Sold of Units Sold RT ces Figure 5 11 Book Code Selections The list that appears reflects the actual budget and statistical non financial options that have been established in your general l
443. y of a transaction such as an invoice which may be different from the functional currency parent unit A unit in an FRx reporting tree that has subsidiary or child units FRx can roll up data from child units to parent units to create summary reports FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 338 period modifier Typically when an account is specified in a row format FRx combines the account with the periods and account types specified in the column layout However you can use the account modifier codes in the row format to use different information such as different fiscal periods for specific rows The modifiers apply to every account in the row posting The act of transferring financial transactions entered in journals and subledgers to the general ledger in order to update account balances Posting updates accounts tracked in the general ledger module with financial data entered in other modules such as inventory and accounts payable as well as general ledger print control An option in the column layout that enables users to indicate special printing characteristics such as non printing and reversed credit and debit signs when reports are generated provisional reporting The provisional reporting options in the Catalog of Reports determine whether FRx includes posted unposted or both posted and unposted general ledger transactions in the report Posted transactions include activity from every module accounts
444. ypeover mode typed characters replace existing characters press the Insert key e Ifyou are editing a box after pressing the F2 key press Esc to restore the original box contents Selecting Rows or Columns You can select an entire row or column in your building blocks by highlighting it e To highlight a row with the keyboard press and hold the Shift key while pressing the spacebar e To highlight a row with your mouse click the box to the left of the Row Code cell e To highlight a column with the keyboard press and hold the Ctrl key while pressing the spacebar e To highlight a column with the mouse click the box at the top of the column FRx Report Designer 6 7 User s Guide 14 Chapter 1 Welcome to FRx Report Designer Getting Around in Report Designer Displaying a List of Available Entries F3 List boxes have a down arrow button on the right side If you click this button a list of available entries appears Note e On some list boxes such as those in the Column Layout window the down arrow button appears only when you select the cell move the cursor to that cell There are four ways to display a list of available options e Click the down arrow button e Double click on a cell that contains a down arrow button e Place your cursor in the cell and then press F3 e Place your cursor in the cell then on the Edit menu click Zoom Using the Right Mouse Button You can right click to open a shortcut

FRx Report Designer 6.7 User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents